Big, bold, colorful, and dazzling: these are the words that naturally pop into our minds when we picture our summer borders. We’ll often spend fortunes hoping to keep that early-summer color palette firing on all cylinders. And, typically, what we tend to imagine are dazzling perennial flowers with bright, showy blooms. But often, the joy that comes from vibrant blooms can leave your garden looking exhausted by June. Flowers are lovely, but their displays can be fleeting. Once their petals drop, you’re often left with a mass of plain, uninspiring green stems.

Furthermore, while flowers are pretty, foliage lasts longer. And foliage can be big, bold, colorful, and even dazzling. Pick the right foliage plants, and you’ll get jaw-dropping foliage that is often more impressive than the flower show. June is a great time to introduce some high-impact architectural foliage heroes into your garden beds and borders. By shifting your focus to hard-working perennials, you aren’t just planning for a quick burst of color, you’re also securing a lush, structurally gorgeous framework that anchors your yard from early summer to first frost.

The best part? Getting these vibrant foliage superstars settled now is simple and yields immediate, long-lasting rewards. We’ve lined up the hardest working foliage plant ideas to deliver structural, colorful foliage as well as flowers. Whether you’re dealing with sun-baked backdrops or damp, shady corners, these multi-talented gems offer a texture-rich appeal that pulls together different parts of your yard, just as it helps you transition between seasons with effortless style. Discover the assorted foliage plant heroes that prove leaves can easily steal the show!

Perennials for Showstopping Foliage

Have you ever said, "Oh, it’s just a foliage plant"? Trust me, you will never utter those words again once you meet these stunning, leaf-forward perennials. When leaves are this massive, deeply textured, or intensely colored, they easily outshine even the most delicate blossoms. To get the best out of these leafy icons, regardless of your USDA hardiness zone, just keep a few basic rules in mind.

Some of these perennials crave full-sun environments to deepen their pigments, while others require a damp, dappled retreat to protect variegated surfaces from getting scorched by aggressive UV rays. Make sure you know which zones best suit your plant, and choose foliage perennials with the best regional fit.

Before you plant, ensure you are setting these perennials up for long-term success, and check underground conditions first. Carry out a quick reading with a soil moisture tool, such as the XLUX Long Soil Moisture Meter from Amazon. This will help you ensure good drainage and moisture retention, so plant roots don’t risk sitting in stagnant puddles. Verifying hydration will also ensure your lively leafy perennials can handle any afternoon sun.

Topdress new foliage plants with a layer of organic compost to fuel massive leaf production without forcing leggy growth. Then you can decide which of these foliage beauties best fits your space. Remember, some foliage plants love shade, while others need full sun, so pick wisely!

1. Heuchera (Coral Bells)

Coral bells (Heuchera spp.) are mounding shade-loving perennials with pretty flower spikes. They bring gorgeous color, texture, depth and variety to the darkest corners of your yard. While pollinators appreciate their delicate, airy blooms, the real magic of these plants is generally in their lively scalloped leaves. The species plant offers leaves in lime green, wine, silver, purple, and nearly black. But if you pick a cultivar, there are plenty of other glorious options.

With standout cultivar 'Caramel', the ruffled leaves emerge in sun-kissed gold before deepening into a velvety apricot shade. Coral bells thrive in zones 4-9, requiring only a rich, organic soil that drains sharply. To create maximum drama, plant alongside fine-textured Japanese forest grass or wide-leaved blue hostas. Make sure to plant in partial or filtered shade, as intense afternoon sun will bleach those rich pastel tones. Don't let them sit in soggy, clay-heavy puddles, as their shallow root crowns are susceptible to winter rot. There are some amazing heuchera varieties available from Nature Hills, including lush Forever Purple Coral Bells.

2. Sea Holly

If you want to inject some dramatic metallic architecture into your backyard, sea holly (Eryngium planum) is highly memorable. This sun-worshipping marvel produces striking, thistle-like steel blue flower heads. However, its spiny-toothed, bluish-green foliage and intricate silver veining can steal the spotlight all season. Growing up to 3 feet (90cm) tall in USDA zones 5-9, it forms dense, structural clumps that look like living sculptures. It is highly prized for its unique, coarse texture and its rare ability to flourish in poor, sandy, bone-dry soils where other plants might wither.

For an unforgettable summer border setup, position sea holly next to soft, feathery ornamental grasses or bright yellow yarrow to make that icy blue pop. Full sun is mandatory to help it develop its signature metallic sheen. Don't overwater it or amend the soil with heavy fertilizers, though. This tough customer thrives on neglect, and too much rich food will cause those spiky stems to flop lazily. Buy Votaniki Blue Glitter Sea Holly from Amazon to add structural edge to sunny dry borders.

3. Japanese Forest Grass

For fluid movement and illumination in dark corners, flowers need not apply when it comes to Japanese forest grass (Hakonechloa macra 'Aureola'). This perennial forms a dense, cascading mound of slender, 10-inch (25cm) golden leaves adorned with delicate emerald-green stripes. It ripples beautifully in the slightest summer breeze, mimicking a sunkissed waterfall pouring over your border edges. While loose panicles appear in midsummer, they are secondary to this weeping ribbon of gold that brightens USDA zones 4-9.

Plant as a lush groundcover in partial or dappled shade, and pair it with broad, dark purple foliage plants for a high-contrast visual. Don't let the soil dry out during summer heatwaves, though. Consistent, uniform moisture is the secret to keeping delicate leaf tips from turning brown and crispy. This is an easy garden guest and requires little maintenance. You can get similarly bright chartreuse All Gold Japanese Forest Grass from Nature Hills for impressive cascading structure.

4. Blue Hosta ('Sieboldiana')

Hostas are the classic foliage champions of the shade garden, but 'Sieboldiana' takes things to another level of grandeur. Cultivar H. 'Sieboldiana' features colossal, 10-inch (25cm), heart-shaped leaves, bathed in silvery slate blue. You can get them bluer if you plant them somewhere with light sun. As the season progresses into late summer, the foliage develops a gorgeous, deeply puckered texture that adds structural depth in zones 3-9. While pale lavender flowers ascend in July, the true prize is the massive, cool-toned foliage.

Place your blue hostas alongside fine-fronded ferns or bright chartreuse coral bells. Plant in full to partial shade, and avoid harsh afternoon sun which will melt away the delicate waxy coating. Slug protection is also a good idea, as these magnificent leaves are a magnet for hungry pests. Buy Hosta Sieboldiana Elegans Live Plants from Amazon for the ultimate jumbo blue-shade anchor.

5. Ligularia ('Britt Marie Crawford')

For gardeners who want maximum, unapologetic drama, 'Britt Marie Crawford' ligularia has enormous, glossy, rounded leaves with a dark chocolate-purple hue on top and maroon undersides. Unlike many dark plants that fade to green in summer, this cultivar holds this lush, deep pigmentation all season long. In midsummer, the plant additionally launches 3-inch (8cm) golden-orange daisies, creating a high-contrast display in sun or partial shade with zones 4-9.

This 4-foot (1.2m) tall perennial beauty looks stunning as a back-of-the-border accent, especially when paired with lime-green hostas or gold-variegated forest grass. Plant in a consistently damp, moisture-rich location. It loves soggy ground, making it perfect for rain gardens or pond edges. Don't allow this plant to sit in full afternoon sun, or these dramatic purple leaves will wilt in protest. You can buy Perennial Farms Rocket Live Plants from Amazon for a low maintenance, high impact perennial.

6. Siberian Bugloss (‘Jack Frost’)

Close your eyes and picture a huge, shimmering silver, heart-shaped leaves with green edging. Now say hello to the Jack Frost cultivar of Siberian bugloss (Brunnera macrophylla), an incredible foliage plant that grows like a champ in partial to full shade and thrives in zones 3-8. While it produces a sweet mist of forget-me-not flowers in the spring, it is grown primarily for this luminous, crackled silver foliage that lights up dark, gloomy garden spaces all summer long.

Reaching 2 feet (60cm) tall and wide, it makes an exceptional groundcover or specimen plant when paired with solid-green ferns or dark-leaved coral bells. Don't leave it untended as winter approaches, though, and prune away spent leaves at the end of the season to keep the crown clean and healthy for next year's flush. Buy Jack Frost Brunnera Live Plants from Nature Hills for shimmering shade accents.

7. Elephant Ears (‘Black Magic’)

Bring tropical drama to your summer yard with the 'Black Magic' elephant ears plant. This lush and lovely low-maintenance giant features massive, dusty charcoal-purple leaves that hang elegantly from long, dramatic petioles. Growing up to 6 feet (2m) tall in USDA hardiness zones 8-12 (and easily dug up and overwintered indoors in cooler climates), this plant transforms plain spaces into an exotic oasis.

Plant in damp, boggy areas, alongside chartreuse sweet potato vines or silvery grasses. Provide ample waterings and rich soil. Don't place it in dry, windy spots, where gales can tear those velvety purple-black sails. Buy Black Magic Elephant Ear Live Plants from Amazon for a high-impact perennial to bring instant dark drama. Once you get this perennial in your yard, you’ll be making up reasons to go outside.

Superstar Foliage Essentials

Give these gorgeous foliage perennials the support they deserve. Perennial foliage requires a different approach to flowering annuals. Make sure you can keep those giant elephant ear sails glossy, protect pristine hosta leaves from unsightly spots, and ensure cascading grasses don't get scorched by summer heat, and make some room for targeted plant treats. These curated high-impact treatments ensure your landscape remains lush, vibrant, and high impact all season long.

Need more ideas for getting the most from your plants, indoors and out, and looking for the best seasonal expert advice delivered straight to your inbox? Sign up for the free Gardening Know How Newsletter!

June is when the yard suddenly fills with the joyful, chaotic sound of baby birds; half-feathered, clumsy, and utterly clueless, hopping along garden gates and begging relentlessly from worn-out parents. These first weeks out of the nest can be the most dangerous they’ll face. And here’s the secret that catches many backyard birders off guard: what to feed a fledgling bird almost never means seed mixes.

During early summer, nearly every songbird species rears its young on live insects, favoring protein-rich caterpillars above all. A single pair of Carolina chickadees might need between 6,000 and 9,000 caterpillars to fledge one brood. That’s a staggering number of bugs, and traditional feeders barely scratch the surface of a growing fledgling's daily caloric demands. So what to feed a fledgling bird comes down to smart growing strategies. While supplemental feeding always has its place, essential bird food options are often tied directly to your garden habitat during summer.

Key flowers and native plants are major sources of nourishment for fledglings. They act as hosts to caterpillars, invite beneficial predatory insects and yield early-summer berries for vulnerable birds. Stack the plantings by height, and you ensure something stays on the menu at every level, from the canopy right down to the leaf litter. Making small, thoughtful planting adjustments is a win-win for hungry young birds as well as your personal tastes. Try these plant combinations, and you’ll be rewarded with a new generation of feathered friends to fill your summer with song.

Plant Combinations for Baby Birds

Think of each of these curated plant combinations as an exquisite, three-course meal for your baby birds and fledglings, meticulously pitched at varying heights to cover different food groups at once. One layer pulls in dynamic insects. Another keeps nectar-seekers happy, while a third holds hard seeds and rich berries for later in summer. Really, knowing what to feed a fledgling comes down to planting the right company rather than topping up a tray all the time.

Pick even one of these planting companion trios this June, and your yard starts doing the work on its own. Of course, these combinations are adaptable, depending on your growing zone and yard size. The core objective is simply to minimize your feathered forager’s energy spend – and once they know that the good stuff is readily available in your yard, you can just sit back and enjoy the show. If you’re in need of a cheep and cheerful way to watch them from indoors, Vulness Compact Bird Watching Binoculars from Amazon lets you enjoy the action from a distance.

June is your prime window to establish these plant trios, allowing their root systems to develop at pace, while foliage flourishes and serves as a hunting ground. No matter your zone or yard size, these low-maintenance knockout natives and high-reward planting combinations create a secure, sustaining and vibrant source of fledgling bird food right outside your window. Birds are creatures of habit, so once you establish a one-stop-shop that offers safety from predators and easy-to-digest food, you’ll see an immediate increase in activity and diversity.

1. Serviceberry, Elderberry & Wild Strawberry

Serviceberry (Amelanchier) goes by the name Juneberry for good reason. It yields masses of succulent fruit earlier than almost any other native woody plant, dropping its bounty in the thick of fledgling season. These sweet purple pomes are highly compelling. American robins and sleek cedar waxwings arrive in droves, and you’ll also see gray catbirds, wood thrushes and Baltimore orioles stripping branches.

At ground level, native wild strawberries (Fragaria virginiana) fruit across the same summer window, providing easy foraging for ground-dwelling fledglings learning the ropes. American elderberry (Sambucus canadensis) runs on a slower clock. Its broad, flat flower heads open through June, pulling in bees and beetles to feed insect-eating birds. The berries mature in late summer, offering a vital lifeline just as many bird species begin rearing a second brood.

Plant them in a sunny to partly shaded location with well-draining, acidic to neutral soil (zones 3-9). Avoid planting elderberries in high-traffic footpaths, as their sprawling nature requires room to stretch. Applying a 2-inch (5cm) layer of organic hardwood mulch in June keeps soil moisture stable and encourages sweet fruit production. You can buy Autumn Brilliant Serviceberries from Fast Growing Trees for an abundant summer crop and refreshing cover, and Proven Winners Black Lace Elderberry from Nature Hills for that high-impact flurry of bugs and berries.

2. Trumpet Vine, Bee Balm & Salvia

A nectar garden often looks like it feeds hummingbirds liquid sugar and nothing else. Adult hummers do run on nectar, and a stand of trumpet vine (Campsis radicans), bee balm (Monarda didyma), and perennial salvia helps them to stay energized, but their nestlings require protein. A mother hauls in thousands of gnats, mosquitoes, and soft-bodied spiders. These flowers concentrate these insects into one zone.

Bee balm pulls double duty: beyond the nectar reserves, its aromatic foliage serves as a vital host plant for several native moth caterpillars. Prioritize a location featuring full, blazing sun and rich, moist soil (zones 4-9). Trumpet vine comes with a warning, though. It climbs hard and spreads harder, and it’ll want a sturdy support plus room to misbehave before it swallows a fence.

For the bee balm and salvia, deadhead the first spent blooms in late June to spark a secondary wave of bug-attracting flowers that will carry your local birds safely through August. You can buy American Beauties’ Jacob Cline Bee Balm from Nature Hills. And you can buy Hirt’s Gardens Trumpet Vine Plants from Walmart, guaranteed to anchor nesting hummingbirds to your yard for the summer.

3. Sunflowers, Cosmos & Zinnias

Most baby birds can’t handle seed, but there’s one cheerful exception, and this trio is it. All summer, sunflowers (Helianthus annuus), cosmos and zinnias hum with pollinators and caterpillars that chew their foliage, an insect buffet for nesting songbirds. Then, as summer matures, comes the seed. American goldfinches are some of the latest seasonal nesters, holding off until midsummer for a reason: they raise their chicks on a protein-rich seed mash harvested from plants like these.

So whatever you do, don’t deadhead or tidy up your spent flower heads as summer begins to wane. Leaving these stalks standing tall transforms a row of sunflowers into a bustling goldfinch nursery come August, while native sparrows, indigo buntings, and house finches will eagerly work the drying seed heads well into fall.

This trio thrives in a sun-baked garden bed with well-draining soil (zones 2-11). June is the perfect time to direct-sow these seeds or plant nursery starts, as the warm soil triggers rapid growth. Select multi-branching sunflower varieties like Autumn Beauty, which produce dozens of seed heads that juvenile finches can easily grip. You can buy popular Sensation Mix Cosmos Seeds from Eden Brothers, and Autumn Beauty Sunflower Seeds from Burpee to cultivate those delectable seedheads.

4. Dogwood, Highbush Blueberry & Native Ferns

Native flowering dogwood (Cornus florida) is one of the better caterpillar producers around. It’s a big host plant for spring azure butterflies and giant silk moths. It’s these soft-bodied larvae that provide easily digestible, nutrient-dense goodness for nestlings.The berries are a fall event, feeding migrating thrushes and bluebirds.

Highbush blueberry (Vaccinium corymbosum) contributes its own native caterpillars, alongside early-summer fruits that you and your juvenile birds will compete for. Ferns such as the ostrich fern (Matteuccia struthiopteris) don’t fit the pattern at first glance, but their work happens at ground level. A stand of ferns creates a cool, damp microclimate that sustains spiders, beetles, and cutworms. On bare ground, a couple of bags of LeafGro Leaf Compost from Home Depot jump-start this layer.

This structural trio thrives in partial shade, favoring rich, organic soils (zones 4-8). You can buy Ostrich Ferns from Walmart, so young fledglings can safely practice foraging for beetles and ground spiders. Alongside this, you can buy Blue Jay Highbush Blueberry Plants from Nature Hills for that tasty bug and berry combo.

5. Wild Rose, Blackberry Brambles & Purple Coneflower

Native wild roses (Rosa carolina) and blackberry brambles (rubus) grow into a thorny, tangled thicket, and that’s exactly the point. Almost nothing pushes through. This makes them about the safest nesting cover a clumsy fledgling could hope for. Cardinals settle deep inside, along with catbirds, thrashers and song sparrows. The food side holds up too. June blossoms attract a wealth of native pollinators, while juicy berries provide a continuous sugar rush.

Occupying the sunny perimeter, purple coneflower (Echinacea purpurea) gracefully bridges the seasonal gaps. Its prominent center cones are landing pads for bumblebees and butterflies in June, eventually drying into seed-stuffed goodies that finches will pick clean by late summer. The thorns are the real gift. They give the smallest birds a fighting chance while feeding on the collective treats.

Plant in an open, sunny border with well-draining soil (zones 3-9). Prune brambles selectively only after fruiting, ensuring you do not disturb any nests. Let it flourish along property lines, creating an invaluable fortress of food. Buy Purple Coneflower Seeds from Eden Brothers for the ultimate native snacking. You can also buy Apache Blackberry Plants from Amazon for a dense, berry-rich summer thicket.

6. Spicebush, Coral Bells & Foamflower

Shade doesn’t have to be a dead zone for birds. The workhorse is native spicebush (Lindera benzoin), the main host for the spicebush swallowtail and other native moths. Its aromatic foliage will attract caterpillars through the season, and the glossy red berries in late summer are a gorgeous draw for thrushes, vireos and catbirds.

Around it, coral bells (heuchera) send up airy spikes that shade-dwelling hummers work for nectar hits. Meanwhile, foamflower (Tiarella cordifolia) carpets the ground, its frothy blooms opening early to sustain vital pollinators. Using a north-facing wall, a shadowed side-yard alley, or a dense tree canopy can end up doing just as much for your local birds as any sunny flower bed.

This trio requires moist, rich soil in partial shade (zones 4-9). Apply a generous layer of decomposed leaf mold or shredded bark mulch around the spicebush. You can buy a phenomenal range of Coral Bells from Nature Hills to bring vital nectar and small insects to shaded spaces. Plus, you can buy a Greenwood Nursery Spicebush from Amazon, the definitive shade-loving host plant for swallowtail caterpillars.

Make a Start This Season

Nurturing a thriving sanctuary for summer fledglings does not require a big overhaul. One serviceberry by the patio, a patch of bee balm along a fence or a few ferns tucked into a shady corner will help both birds raising families and the fledglings making their first forays into foraging. Buy The Harvest Company’s Compressed Coir Bricks from Lowe’s for a compressed soil amendment to retain moisture around your baby bird-friendly plants. Mother nature handles the tricky timings; your primary task is to get these living resources into the soil.

Along with food, give a little thought to water, shelter, and safety. Because baby birds cannot fly well, they can’t easily reach elevated bird baths, leaving them vulnerable to ground predators. Add an extra water dish that you can keep near ground level. Make this wide and shallow, filling it no deeper than 1-1.5 inches (2.5-4cm) so fledglings can drink and bathe safely. You can buy the lovely Bakayoyo Ceramic Shallow Ground Bird Bath from Amazon. Add a flat stone to the base so they don't slip.

You can give this bathing spot extra curiosity and fascination for young birds with a water agitator, wiggler, or solar pump. You can buy the Mademax Solar Bird Bath Pump from Amazon to add instant movement and enjoyment to your bird bath. The continuous ripples catch the light and emit a unique sound signature, while also preventing mosquitoes from laying eggs – adding to the allure and security of your bird-friendly yard.

Other Essentials for Baby Birds

Crafting a vibrant, safe haven for young birdies comes down to a thoughtful blend of natural goodies and some well-selected supporting treats. Once you’ve got your plants and flowers off and running, these little extras will ensure that your yard is optimized for a broad range of young feathered guests, including juvenile hummers – and best of all, they are great for budget-friendly yards. Grab this trio of baby bird extras to keep your backyard busy and thriving with birdsong all summer long.

Need more ideas for timely gardening jobs and seasonal expert advice delivered straight to your inbox? Sign up for the free Gardening Know How Newsletter!

For the last couple of weeks, my bright pink and deep purple cranesbills have been burgeoning with rich hues and humming with happy bees. It’s been one of the most life-affirming corridors of color I could hope to witness – and I’ve loved seeing those early summer flourishes painting happiness across my modest garden wall. But behind the joy of early perennial flowering is the fear. Just one epic shower is all it takes to crush that ballooning mass of petals and pop the floral bubble in its prime.

The thing is, I’m always thinking about what happens next in my herbaceous perennial borders. Once this early euphoric summer flowering party starts to fade, then what? It can sometimes feel like sumer is ending just as it starts, which seems so darned unfair. If you’ve also been enjoying some early-summer rockstars and they are already starting to look a little floppy and faded, it’s tempting to let nature take its course (albeit with a bit of a sulk). But what if I told you that just beneath those spent flower heads lies the next wave of gorgeous perennial color in the form of secondary buds just waiting for their cue to burst onto the scene?

Too good to be true, right? Not at all, but the ability to encourage second bloom perennials does require a little courage (and some shears). You see, the best thing you can do for these key flowering perennials in June is give them a hearty chop. It might feel like a betrayal, but with the right plants, some timely cuts won't hurt: it re-energizes them, stripping away the old growth so they can channel that raw energy into a fabulous second act. So, if you’re chasing long lasting summer flowers, now’s the time to put your shears to good use. Cut back these iconic perennials this month, and get ready for a gorgeous bonus summer flower show.

6 Perennials that Love a June Chop

Chopping these perennials back after the first flush, you’re basically interrupting that plant’s seed-making process. That process takes up a lot of energy. Without the faff of creating seeds, these plants are free to refocus on their own health and vitality. In the case of these key ornamentals, it means they can generate fresh growth and trigger a lovely bonus round of summer color to fill gaps. Also, by removing the dominant top buds, you’re encouraging lower, dormant side buds to branch out. So as well as prompting extra blooms, you’re creating a bushier habit.

Before you rush out into the borders to target June perennials for summer color, there’s a tiny bit of housekeeping. Make sure you’re using sharp bypass shears, pruning snips or garden scissors. If you’re shopping around for a good set, Fiskars Micro-Tip Pruning Snips from Amazon are great for navigating smaller stems and give precision cuts that won’t damage plants. Never use dull or dirty blades, which can crush stems and introduce fungal spores. And be sure to wipe blades down with rubbing alcohol before use and between plants to keep things sterile.

Chopping back these perennials in June is most successful in USDA hardiness zones 3-8, where summer heat won’t scorch new shoots. In zones 9 and above, ensure plants have some afternoon shade. No matter where you live, check soil conditions and drainage before and after cutting back perennials. A simple soil test can help assess moisture and pH levels. If you don’t have one, the Luster Leaf Luster Leaf Rapitest Soil Moisture Meter from Amazon is easy, battery-free, and gives instant results.

When you do cut back perennials, it’s a good idea to follow up your June trim with a 2-inch (5cm) layer of organic mulch such as shredded bark or leaf mold, keeping a gap of a few inches from the plant's central crown. This mulch helps your freshly shorn plants retain vital moisture while they gather their strength. It also helps to cool the roots. With those little checks in place, it’s time to chop these perennials so you can enjoy another gorgeous summer flush as soon as possible.

1. Hardy Geranium (Cranesbills)

Let’s start with the one that hits the ground running with gusto in my garden in early summer: the hardy geranium (aka cranesbill). These pretty free spirits thrive in zones 3-9 and flourish mighty fast. But by mid-June, you’ll be seeing floppy flowers and telltale gaps where stems are sagging. Be brave: gather up clumps of post-flush foliage in one hand and use shears to cut the plant down to 2-3 inches (5-8cm) above the ground. This isn’t just a way to tidy up the plant, but a signal to your cranesbills to get to work on that second flowering medley.

To help them bounce back, give the area a deep watering after cutting. Skip heavy fertilizers and instead top-dress the soil around the base with a soil amendment like mushroom compost. You can buy Espoma Organic Mushroom Compost Blend from Amazon as a nourishing top-dressing right after pruning. Just take care not to overwater. For a bit of extra razzle-dazzle to fill gaps fast, add some zinnias this month. There are some lovely zinnia options available from Eden Brothers, including Benary’s Giant Orange, for a gorgeous color contrast.

2. Lady’s Mantle (Alchemilla)

Lovely lady’s mantle (Alchemilla mollis) gets my prize for the most neon-tinged member of this perennial gathering. This cottage garden classic is cloaked in chartreuse flower clouds of blooms early in the season, as well as elegant pleated foliage. But those early blooms can look more rusty than neon as June progresses. Also, if left unchecked, this prolific self-seeder can drop thousands of seeds. So trace faded flower stalks to the base of the plant and snip them off at the basal foliage line. If the leaves look sun-scorched, shave off large outer leaves as well.

Your reward will be an immediate burst of fresh, velvet-soft leaves and a scattering of late-summer blooms. Hydrate well after chopping back, and tuck a handful of fish bone meal into the surrounding soil to bolster root strength with a much-needed phosphorus kick. You can get Down to Earth Fish Bone Meal from Lowe’s. To enhance the gorgeous, textural presence of your fresh alchemilla clouds and scalloped foliage, add some vibrant coral bells in hues of deep purple or mahogony.

3. Catmint (Nepeta)

Catmint (nepeta) has a reputation for being practically indestructible in zones 3-8, as well as being highly drought-tolerant once established. Given its robust nature, a timely chop is not only safe but actively encouraged to keep this fluffy perennial in fine fettle. By late June, that distinctive lavender-blue flowering mist will be looking deflated and tangled. To add renewed vigor for the second act, chop the plant back by half its height, shaping it into a neat dome. This simple act will trigger a new wave of fragrant stems around a tighter center, filling out in a few short weeks.

Because Catmint thrives in leaner, poorer soils, avoid using heavy nitrogen fertilizers after its June trim. Instead, give the root zone a gentle drink of diluted Neptune's Harvest Fish & Seaweed Fertilizer from Amazon to support its late-summer flower production. This gentle tonic strengthens plant cell walls for strong support and also helps to intensify flower color in those subsequent fluffy clouds, for a second wave of blooming brilliance that is quite simply the cat’s pajamas.

4. Yarrow (Alchemilla)

I’ve got a real soft spot for this next flowering perennial, with its millefiori mosaic-style bursts of blooms in colors as diverse as bright whites and pastel pinks through to rum-soaked reds and butterscotch golds. Thriving to zone 9, the sunny flower clusters of yarrow (achillea) are popular with local pollinators, but those landing pads will likely be fading into a dull brown by mid-June. To kickstart the magic again, cut fading stalks cleanly down to the fern-like basal foliage at ground level.

Yarrow is very self-sufficient and doesn’t need loads of ongoing care after chopping back. However, I would recommend a little side-dressing with a thin layer of chicken manure. This helps to enrich the soil naturally without over-stimulating leafy growth. You can buy Espoma Organic Chicken Manure from Walmart for an excellent granular source of slow-release nutrients to support that dazzling second flush. Complement with a few black-eyed Susans for a relaxed meadow vibe.

5. Perennial Salvia (Salvia Nemorosa)

Woodland sage or perennial saliva (Salvia nemorosa) is both cold hardy and heat tolerant, giving it broad cross-state appeal, and these saturated purple flower spikes are oh-so-moreish. That said, you might be seeing a few ratty looking seed pods come late June, which is definitely not getting the best from these purple legends. So cut the faded flower stems back to the green leaves at the base. If you look closely before cutting, you might even see tiny flower buds nestled in the leaf joints.

Producing a second wave of dense flower spikes does require a bit of wellie. Salvia really appreciates a nutritional pick-me-up right after its June chop. Scatter a handful of granular fertilizer into the soil around the drip line and water in thoroughly to feed those emerging buds. You can buy Espoma Organic Flower-tone Fertilizer from Amazon for a boost of bone meal and potash, formulated to promote heavy blooming. Just be careful not to snip off those tiny emerging buds when chopping back, and don't let the plant dry out completely while it is regrowing.

6. Coneflower (Echinacea)

Purple coneflower is one of the mainstays of my summer yard, and a source of endless joy once those cheeky flower heads start poking through in earnest. Thriving coast to coast in zones 3-9, they seem to arrive all at once after months of quiet stretching, and their gorgeous hues are hard to let go. But you can encourage a second wave. However, unlike the other perennials on this list, this tough native requires something more akin to deadheading than outright chopping.

As the petals droop and the cones turn dark brown, follow the flower stem down to the next healthy leaves, where you see a new side-bud forming, and cut just above that node. This keeps the blooms cycling through until the first hard frost of fall. Insert a few fertilizer spikes, such as Jobe’s Organics All-Purpose Fertilizer Spikes from Walmart, around the root zone to deliver a slow-release stream of nutrients for summer. A layer of mulch, like Back to the Roots Organic Hardwood Mulch from Amazon, will also help keep that joyful second flush perky and nourished.

Shop Perennial Care Essentials

Ready to unlock a bonus round of gorgeous summer color in your backyard? Having the right timely treatments makes your mid-season pruning much healthier for your plants, and brings you that eagerly anticipated second flush even faster. Offering organic nutrients that fuel quick reblooming and nurture stronger, richer colors, this curated trio will help to guarantee a vibrant, long-lasting summer display.

Need more ideas for timely gardening jobs and seasonal expert advice delivered straight to your inbox? Sign up for the free Gardening Know How Newsletter!

What to do with strawberry plants after fruiting in June? Well, there’s one easy and obvious answer: eat them! But along with indulging, there are a few other things you need to do this month. Because what you do right now, in the immediate wake of your strawberry harvest in June, directly dictates whether you will be enjoying that same juicy abundance next June.

When you make the commitment to grow your own strawberries, you have to be prepared to roll up your sleeves and tend to your plants in summer, even after the yummy berries have been enjoyed. Indeed, the things you do now are critical to plant health and vigor and the future quality of your strawbs. Good strawberry care extends well past picking day, and this post-harvest period is a vital transition phase for June-bearing strawberries. Eating a few of those ripe, luscious fruits should be plenty of motivation for taking the best possible care of your plants.

June-bearing strawberry plants shift into a phase of structural repair and energy storage during midsummer. Take care of a few easy steps this month, and you’ll be helping your plants cultivate the rooting networks and dense foliage needed to generate a jackpot of free, luscious, and high-yielding strawberries next year.

5 Things to Do for Strawbs in June

Before you dive into these strawberry care steps for June, confirm that your berries are June-bearing. There are several types of strawberries commonly planted in home gardens. One type is June-bearing, and if you plant these in your berry patch, you get one big harvest of strawberries in late spring or early summer, often in the month of June. After that, the plants stop producing until the following year. The advice given in this article applies to June-bearing strawberry plants such as 'Jewel', 'Chandler', 'Cabot', and 'Allstar' strawbs.

These plants enter a semi-dormant phase for 4-6 weeks after harvesting strawberries, making June the ideal window for these quick steps across USDA hardiness zones 3-9. Before starting, just check soil moisture levels in the ground around your plants before making significant additions. You can buy the highly rated Yamron 4-in-1 Meter from Amazon to ensure the ground is well draining.

Everbearing or day-neutral strawberry varieties behave differently, producing a big crop in early summer, followed by lighter flushes through summer and fall. If you clean up the patch and cut back the everbearing foliage in June, you will forego all the rest of the berries, which would be a shame. For June-bearers, however, these steps are both vital and very straightforward. Once you have checked the soil, grab your trusty trimming tools and don’t forget some sterilizing fluid. You can buy Vi-Jon Swan Isoprophyl Alcohol from Amazon to sterilize cutting tools.

If you’re growing June-bearers in towers, hanging baskets, or terracotta planters, these rules still apply after strawberry harvest time. Container-grown strawberries experience quicker nutrient depletion and moisture loss than in-ground beds, making immediate post-harvest feeding and plant care even more critical. Just use handheld shears for container-grown strawbs so you don't accidentally nick favorite planters.

1. Renovate Strawberry Foliage

Just like you take dead branches off shrubs and trees when pruning, you need to take off dead or dying foliage after strawberry harvest. This tidies the plant and makes more room for healthy foliage to grow. Known as strawberry renovation, this process helps to give plants a new lease of life when they need it most. Wait roughly 7-10 days after harvest time for strawberries so the plants get a brief rest first.

For small beds, use hand pruners to clip away the old leaves. If you’re looking for a reliable bypass pruner, Corona’s ComfortGEL Bypass Pruner from Lowe’s is perfectly sized for making clean, precise cuts through dense strawberry leaf stems without crushing live tissue. If you manage a large, expansive patch, you can drive your lawnmower over the bed, making sure the deck is adjusted to a high setting.

The goal is to get rid of the old, worn-out leaves, while not touching the crowns and roots. This encourages the plant to put its energy toward new growth. It also eliminates the risk of common fungal diseases like leaf spot and powdery mildew. Just don’t renovate a newly planted strawberry patch during its first summer in the ground, and avoid mowing if your region is suffering a blistering heatwave.

2. Propagate or Prune Runners

Runners are shoots that I think of as babies to the mother strawberry plant. These runners (often referred to as stolons) are long, horizontal stems that extend outward from the mother plant. At the end of each long shoot, a small new plant begins to grow. If this baby touches the soil, it will grow roots and propagate a new plant.

In June: you can either let these babies grow into new plants to replace aging crowns or expand your patch size, or clip them off and toss them in the compost bin to preserve the mother plant’s strength. Generally, it’s not a good idea to let many of the runners develop any one year since it weakens the mother plant.

To maintain peak vigor, prune away excess runners so daughter plants are 7-11 inches (17-28cm) apart within a structured matted row. This intentional spacing allows sunlight to penetrate into the crowns, which improves fruit size and sweetness next year. You can buy team favourite Fiskars Micro-Tip Pruning Snips from Amazon to make light work of snipping wiry strawberry runners. Everbearing types rarely produce excessive runners, so this task is just for June-bearing varieties.

3. Feed Your Plants

Once your June-bearers are neatly trimmed and narrowed, it’s time to feed them. June-bearing strawberries require a targeted application of nitrogen after renovation to help regrow and repair leaves and roots. Apply a balanced feed or nitrogen-rich amendment directly to the soil surrounding the plants. Spread one-half teaspoon of a balanced 10-10-10 fertilizer around the base of each individual crown.

Avoid going overboard, though. Excessive nitrogen triggers a massive explosion of lush, green leaves and wild runners at the direct expense of next year's flower buds. You can buy balanced, gentle feeds like Espoma Berry-tone Fertilizer from Walmart, which stimulate fresh summer leaf canopy growth. Gently work your granular feed into the top inch of soil and follow up with a deep watering.

Strawberries possess shallow root systems and need an inch of water per week, from rain or irrigation. Consistent moisture through July and August ensures the roots can easily access those soil nutrients, setting the stage for a spectacular spring showing.

4. Tackle Weeds & Check for Pests

Weeds like the same nutrients and water that strawberry plants need for growth. Strawberry plants have shallow roots that are easily overwhelmed by aggressive weeds chasing the same moisture and nutrients. Water deeply the evening before you plan to weed. Moist soil loosens its grip on invasive roots, allowing you to pull out stubborn weeds cleanly without dislodging nearby strawberry crowns.

Maintaining weed-free alleys between your fruit rows improves air circulation, which helps dry out morning dew and keeps devastating fruit rots at bay. The Fiskars Ergo Scratch Weeder from Walmart is a lovely ergonomic option to dig deep and pop out stubborn weeds by the roots without disturbing neighboring strawberry crowns.

Keep an eye out for common pests. June is prime time for strawberry root weevils, spittlebugs, and tarnished plant bugs, which manifest as chewed leaf margins or distorted, stunted foliage. Also check the undersides of leaves for powdery mildew or the speckling of spider mites. If you spot signs of mildew or mites, worry not. You can buy Bonide Captain Jack’s Neem Oil Ready-To-Use Spray from Home Depot to clear out summer spider mites, aphids, and preventative powdery mildew.

5. Lay Down Some Mulch

The final step in your June strawberry routine is to pick a snuggly mulch to spread around your June-bearing strawberry plants. Excellent organic options include clean straw, pine needles (which maintain the slightly acidic soil pH that strawberries love), or dry, shredded leaves. Mulching adds a natural barrier that locks in vital moisture, regulates soil temperatures during baking heat waves, and prevents fresh weed seeds from germinating in your clear rows. It also helps prevent soil-borne diseases.

Spread a two-inch (5cm) layer of mulch across the open spaces of your rows. Just don’t let it touch the crowns of the plants. This light summer mulching keeps the environment clean and structured. In fall, add an extra four inches (10cm) of straw over the tops of plants to insulate the crowns against freezing winter temperatures. You can buy HealthiStraw Garden Straw All-Natural Mulch from Amazon.

Shop Strawberry Care Essentials

Taking proper care of your strawberry patch corner is really easy with the right care kit. Make room in your garden shed for these high-quality, task-specific tools so your fruity perennials can keep coming back stronger (and fruitier) than ever – for many seasons to come. Treat your berry patch to these curated berry treats to make your summer renovation work a breeze.

Need more ideas for timely gardening jobs and seasonal expert advice delivered straight to your inbox? Sign up for the free Gardening Know How Newsletter!

Whether your roses bloom once or reward you with repeat blooms, June is a month when many gardens are graced with spectacular colors and intoxicating fragrance. Whether you lean towards the classic, perfume-heavy hybrid teas or romantic, sprawling climbing roses, this is the moment your hard work starts to pay off. However, June is not a time to rest on your laurels! As we head into early summer, proactive care is essential for sustained success.

The choices you make over the next few weeks can determine whether many varieties continue to push out magnificent flushes of fresh buds, or prematurely shut down for the season. So as well as admiring your handiwork, this month needs to be about safeguarding your rose garden from the seasonal stressors that lie ahead. If you don’t know what to do with roses in June, hopefully this checklist will help.

While modern rose breeders have made terrific strides in introducing resilient, disease-resistant varieties, no plant is entirely self-sufficient. A little focused rose care in June will keep your garden looking immaculate, extend your flowering and cutting season for indoor bouquets, and ensure that your roses remain the undeniable stars of your summer borders for years to come.

Best Rose Care in June

This month requires just a little investment of time (often just an hour or two) to yield dramatic visual rewards. These easy steps will serve to intensify bloom color and longevity, maximize petal counts, and amplify the velvety textures of your favorite flowers. Furthermore, the right rose care in summer doesn't just prolong the current display, but also safeguards next year’s performance, preventing your shrubs from exhausting their energy reserves on premature seed production.

Give some thought to your hardiness zone. If you are growing in warmer southern regions (zones 8-10) and dealing with intense midsummer heat, then moisture retention and heat mitigation are top priorities. Conversely, in cooler northern climates (zones 4-7), June is when roses hit their initial peak, making nutrient availability and trimming more critical. Before you make any cuts, always check your local weather forecast. It’s best to perform tasks such as deadheading on dry, clear days to ensure wounds dry quickly, minimizing the risk of fungal infection.

Also, before tackling rose plant care in summer, be sure to give some thought to specific rose types. While robust, modern shrub varieties like the famous Knock Out Series require minimal intervention, repeat-bloomers, such as the deeply fragrant English shrub rose 'Gertrude Jekyll' or classic hybrid tea 'Peace’ will be counting on your assistance to fuel successive flowering cycles.

Before diving into these tasks, ensure your pruning blades are sharp and sanitized with isopropyl alcohol to prevent cross-contamination. It’s also a good idea to wear long, heavy-duty gauntlets to confidently reach deep into dense brambles. If you don’t already have a pair of sturdy gardening gloves for roses, the Wells Lamont Women's Rose Pruning Gloves from Amazon offer heavy-duty forearm protection. Here are five ways to keep your roses healthy in June and the rest of the summer.

1. Deadheading

Trimming off faded roses keeps bushes (including vigorous climbing rose varieties) blooming all summer long by preventing the development of rose hips. Hips are the fruits of the rose plant, containing the seeds that form once a flower is pollinated. Once seeds start to form, the plant’s energy shifts away from further flower production. Deadheading breaks this cycle, tricking the plant into generating a continuous supply of gorgeous new shoots and subsequent flower buds. As a bonus, it keeps the overall silhouette tidy and structurally sound.

For young plants, cut just below the spent cluster at a three-leaflet junction. For established varieties, cut further down the cane at a five-leaflet junction where the stem is as thick as a pencil. Cut at a 45-degree angle, one-quarter inch (0.6cm) above an outward-facing bud. This ensures that overhead water drains away from the developing shoot. Grab a pair of Corona Forged Classic Bypass Pruners from Amazon for clean slices that won’t crush vital plant tissue.

If your rose is the old garden type that only blooms once, now is a good time to lightly prune it for shape as well as to remove spent blooms. These roses are coveted for the colorful hips they produce in fall. Some types, like easy-care roses, are self-cleaning and do not require deadheading. However, you may want to cut back some stems to keep it tidy.

2. Watering and Mulching

As summer temperatures climb, watering is the cornerstone of rose health. Roses are deep-rooted, thirsty plants that generally require 1-1.5 inches (2.5-4cm) of water per week. To encourage a deep root system, water deeply and infrequently, rather than providing daily shallow sprinkles. This makes the plant more resilient to heat waves. If in doubt, insert your finger into the soil to a depth of 3 inches (8cm). If it feels dry, it’s time to water. To streamline your routine, use a heavy-duty soaker hose like the Teknor Apex Soaker Garden Hose from Lowe’s.

Container-grown roses, such as miniature varieties gracing patios, have confined root systems that dry out rapidly. During scorching afternoons, potted specimens may require thorough watering once or even twice daily. To conserve moisture, applying a fresh, premium mulch is non-negotiable. Natural, organic mulches like shredded cedar or pine bark are best. You can pick up bags of Oldcastle’s Timberline Shredded Pine Bark Mulch from Amazon. Remove any old mulch from last year, then apply 2-3 inches (5-8cm) of fresh mulch around the shrub. Avoid putting it right against the stem as it could cause disease.

3. Fertilizing

Because roses are heavy feeders, they need to be fed every 4-6 weeks, unless you can use a slow-release granular feed that lasts for longer. This month, your plants require balanced nutrition to recover from their initial flush and fuel subsequent bud cycles. A balanced, slow-release granular formula with an NPK ratio like 10-10-10 works well. Alternatively, look for a fertilizer aimed specifically at roses. Try Dr Earth Organic & Natural Product Rose & Flower Fertilizer from Walmart to enhance bloom size and root development.

Supplementing with a water-soluble liquid fertilizer can deliver quick-acting nutrients straight to the root system. Follow up any application with a thorough, deep watering to carry nutrients into the root zone. However, don’t apply fertilizer past midsummer. Late-season applications stimulate tender new growth that will fail to harden off before the arrival of fall frosts, leading to catastrophic winter dieback.

4. Staying Ahead of Pests

By the arrival of midsummer, several hungry pests will target lush rose foliage. Among the most destructive are Japanese beetles (identified by their metallic-green bodies and copper-colored wing covers). They can quickly leave behind skeletonized leaves and ruined buds. The most effective, eco-friendly way to manage them is to go outside early in the morning when the beetles are sluggish. Gently shake the branches to knock the beetles directly into a bucket filled with warm, soapy water.

Other problematic rose pests include aphids, spider mites, and thrips. Aphids are small, soft-bodied sap-suckers that pierce new growth and suck the juices out. To combat these pests, try introducing beneficial insects like ladybugs or lacewings. Alternatively, wipe aphids off with a moist paper towel, or spray with insecticidal soap or neem oil. To easily handle large-scale pest applications, you can buy Bonide Ready-to-Spray Neem Oil from Home Depot.

Spider mites are evident when foliage has a mottled or stippled look as a result of their feeding. You may also see fine webbing between leaves. And while some thrips are beneficial, others consume plant parts including foliage and flower bud sap. Brown spots or streaks on flower buds and petals are telltale signs. In both cases, control them by removing affected flowers, and spraying the plant with a neem oil spray.

5. Monitoring for Disease

A blend of warm daytime temperatures and high humidity creates the perfect environment for fungal diseases, most notably black spot and powdery mildew. Black spot will appear as prominent, circular black lesions, surrounded by yellow halos. Left unchecked, the fungus triggers rapid defoliation, and can leave a shrub severely weakened. At the first sign of infection, strip away all compromised leaves and clear away any fallen debris. Spray the plant with a copper fungicide to stop the spread.

Powdery mildew manifests as a talcum-powder-like coating across young leaves, tender stems, and developing buds. It causes foliage to distort, wrinkle, and dry out prematurely. To prevent these fungi gaining a foothold, irrigate directly at the base of the plant and make sure there is good airflow, trimming a few internal leaves if necessary. If your region experiences a lot of humidity, apply a preventative organic fungicide spray every 14 days. Treat your garden to a bottle of Arber Organic Bio-Fungicide Concentrate from Walmart. This helps to prevent black spot and powdery mildew from taking hold in humid weather. Neem oil can also be effective.

Shop June Rose Care Essentials

Taking care of roses in June is a gentle balancing act of tweaks and topups, but the results will stand you in good stead for years, so it’s worth investing in a few care items that can save you time and trouble down the line. These carefully curated products will help you nurture your favorite rose varieties toward a glorious summer display, while establishing a healthy foundation for future seasons.

Need more ideas for timely gardening jobs and seasonal expert advice delivered straight to your inbox? Sign up for the free Gardening Know How Newsletter!

Hydrangeas have plenty of personality and of course they can carry a border solo, and plenty of gardens stop there. What gets missed is the tension that comes from pairing them against something unexpected: the wrong color, the wrong texture, the wrong scale. That unexpected friction is what makes a border feel deliberate, and arrests the attention in a way that is both compelling and unforgettable.

Most hydrangeas get planted as standalone specimens, and if that’s your preference, that’s fine. But pairing your hydrangea with a plant that shouldn't work – and yet really does – is so easy and satisfying. These plant combinations offer a breadth of tones and textures that can turn a lovely hydrangea display into something that will have the neighbors gawking over the hedge. This goes beyond hydrangea care and shows you how to create something unique and effortless.

This savvy companion planting selection is all about leaning into contrasts and clashes – some polished, others outright confrontational. So if you’re wondering what to grow with hydrangeas to create high impact with minimal fuss, these pairings guarantee next-level dynamics, featuring plants that share a lifestyle but speak a different visual language. Discover 8 unexpected plant pairings that use color and texture clashes to make your hydrangeas truly pop.

Bold Hydrangea Pairings for High-Drama Borders

When deciding what to plant next to hydrangeas, give some thought to soil health and condition. Hydrangeas are moisture-loving shrubs that thrive in rich, organic, well-draining soil, with bigleaf types (H. macrophylla) preferring acidic soil to maintain their rich blue shades. When pairing your hydrangeas with perennials or grasses that might prefer leaner, drier conditions, you may need to add some soil amendments in and around specific planting holes, and maintain regular soil pH and moisture checks, preferably with a meter kit such as the Yamron 4-in-1 Meter from Amazon.

Your USDA hardiness zone, light levels, and regional rainfall patterns will also have some bearing on how you position these high-impact hydrangea plant partnerships, as well as which types of hydrangeas are likely to benefit the most. Some of these combinations are tailor-made for shade-loving mophead and smooth hydrangeas, while others are designed to share the blazing sun with tough panicle types. Plant sun-and-drought lovers on a slight incline just outside the hydrangeas' heavy watering zone, or utilize the natural canopy of the shrubs to shade delicate roots.

No matter which of these hydrangea pairings you choose, always use a good mulch. Use an organic compost or a fine bark mulch, such as Back to the Roots Organic Premium Mulch from Amazon, to conserve moisture for the shrubs. This will provide a stable, nutrient-rich environment where both species can thrive. So, here are 8 next-level pairings built around a different kind of contrast. These unique texture and color clashes will help turn your borders into high-octane summer spectaculars.

1. Blue Hydrangea + Orange Butterfly Weed

Blue and orange sit opposite each other on the color wheel, making this pairing of complementary colors an intentional visual treat. And while the name might have you worrying, there is nothing weedy about orange butterfly weed (Asclepias tuberosa). This dazzling plant features flat-topped clusters of electric, fiery-orange flowers that burst into bloom in June, perfectly syncing up with classic blue mophead or lacecap hydrangeas. This hardy native is also great for monarchs, bees, and local pollinators.

Asclepias thrives in full sun and well-drained, lean soil, whereas bigleaf hydrangeas require consistent moisture and rich, acidic earth. Amend the specific planting pocket for your asclepias with sand or gravel to ensure good drainage, and direct your deep-watering hoses strictly at the base of the hydrangea. Plant the lower-growing butterfly weed along sunny borders, using the blue hydrangea heads as a cool, stabilizing backdrop. You can buy Orange Butterfly Weed Seeds from Eden Brothers.

2. White Hydrangea + Black Lace Sambucus

Black Lace elderberry has near-black, deeply cut foliage that can seem at odds with other bright garden tones. However, white hydrangeas don't wash out, and the contrast sharpens both. White panicle hydrangeas (H. paniculata) or smooth hydrangeas (H. arborescens) appear crisp, sharp, and luminous against this moody backdrop. In early summer, the elderberry produces pink-tinted flower clusters that give way to dark berries, providing a brief warm note before your white hydrangeas dominate the late-summer stage.

This fast-growing woody elderberry variety can reach 6-8 feet (1.8-2.4m), making it a stellar choice for the back of a border. Both plants appreciate moist, well-draining soil and happily share a watering schedule in zones 4-7. However, Black Lace requires at least 6 hours of sun to maintain its signature dark foliage, so this combination is best suited for bright, sun-dappled spots. Remember to cut back elderberry hard in winter to maintain its shape. You can buy Black Lace Elderberry Plants from Nature Hills.

3. Pink Hydrangea + Blue Fescue Grass

This hydrangea pairing plays on structural friction. Blue fescue (Festuca glauca) forms tight, spiky, fine textured mounds that grow 10-12 inches tall (25-30cm), offering a stiff geometry that contrasts beautifully with a fluffy, round pink hydrangea. The warm, cotton-candy pink tones of bigleaf or smooth hydrangeas pop forward when framed by these cool, silver-blue hues. In June, delicate, feather-like seed heads add light, airy movement to the lower tier of a garden bed.

Fescue wants drier soil and good drainage, which may seem to put it at odds with moisture-loving mopheads. Try deep watering aimed at the hydrangea's root zone rather than the surface, as this lets both plants get what they need. Plant the fescue along the front edge of the border, elevated on a well-draining mound amended with coarse grit. This layout keeps the grass roots dry. Buy Blue Fescue Plants from Walmart for well-rooted starter clumps.

4. Purple Hydrangea + Lady's Mantle

If you want to make deep violet or rich purple hydrangeas look even more vibrant, try chartreuse-soaked lady’s mantle (Alchemilla mollis). Lime green is the ultimate foil for deep purple, making the dark jewel tones appear to glow. In early summer, the lady's mantle erupts with a frothy mist of neon flowers that hover above scallop-edged leaves which hold that color through fall. This foliage catches rainwater droplets that sparkle in the sun.

Both plants love partial shade, cool summer temperatures, and moisture-retentive soil. It is a fantastic choice for zones 3-8. Plant as a lush groundcover directly beneath purple bigleaf hydrangeas to hide their woody lower stems, creating a seamless, multi-tiered border that requires very little maintenance once established. You can pick up OutsidePride’s Lady’s Mantle Seeds from Amazon. Just make sure you deadhead the spent flowers of your lady’s mantle to prevent self-seeding.

5. White Hydrangea + Deep Purple Salvia

For a classy hot and cool contrast (and a pleasing juxtaposition of shapes), plant deep purple salvia spikes near white hydrangea blooms. The rich spikes of Salvia nemorosa present a fine geometric pairing for dome-shaped hydrangea heads. It’s sophisticated yet high-contrast, bringing energy to formal and cottage borders. Perennial salvias are also pollinator magnets, and give off a pleasant, herbal fragrance when brushed against along a path. Buy deep purple Salvia May Night Plants from Fast Growing Trees for impactful spikes of color.

Tough panicle hydrangeas like Bobo or Little Lime can easily handle the full sun and moderate moisture that salvias prefer in zones 4-9. Salvias need well-drained soil to prevent winter root rot. Try interplanting drift-forming salvias like Caradonna or May Night in staggered groups around your hydrangeas. Shear your salvias back by half after blooming for a second flush. Use a high-quality pair of Fiskars Bypass Pruning Shears from Amazon to keep those fresh purple flushes coming strong.

6. Blue Hydrangea + Copper Fennel

For an ethereal twist on a conventional blue hydrangea border, pair with the smoke-like copper fennel (Foeniculum vulgare 'Purpureum'). This fine textured foliage is an evocative partner, producing gossamer-thin fronds in shades of bronze, copper, and deep plum. Its soft, metallic haze is the perfect foil for the solid, waxy leaves and heavy blue blooms of mophead hydrangeas. In midsummer, you’ll see flat yellow umbels with a sweet, anise fragrance, attracting beneficial predatory insects and acting as a host plant for swallowtail butterfly caterpillars.

Copper fennel can quickly reach 5-6 feet tall (1.5-1.8m), so plant directly behind your hydrangeas. You can buy Hyper Tough Jute Twine from Walmart to help with staking and supporting elongated or wayward stems. Deadhead faded flowers, unless you don’t mind this vigorous self-seeder popping up elsewhere. It thrives in full sun to partial shade and prefers fertile, well-drained soil in zones 4-9. Also, because it develops a deep taproot, it won't compete with thirsty hydrangea root systems for surface moisture. You can buy ‘Purpureum’ Plants from Walmart.

7. Pink Hydrangea + Russian Sage

Russian sage (Salvia yangii) sends up long silver stems with a haze of small lavender-blue flowers through midsummer. This is loose and billowing, nothing like the dense rounded form of your hydrangeas. When paired with the solid form of a pink panicle or bigleaf hydrangea, it forms a soft, romantic, pastel display. Both plants bloom at the same time, and the color is close enough on the spectrum to soften rather than clash, but the structural difference is what drives the pairing. The wild texture of the sage prevents a hydrangea from looking too heavy or static.

A little care is needed with placement due to their differing care needs. Russian sage is a drought-tolerant perennial that requires full sun and sharp drainage, and it will flop over and develop root rot in damp shade. Sun-loving panicle hydrangeas are generally the best bet for a Russian sage pairing. Plant your Russian sage on a sunny, sloping edge where water drains quickly, and cut back in spring. Buy Clovers Garden Russian Sage Plants from Amazon for delicate texture in abundance.

8. Purple/Blue Hydrangea + Dusty Miller

For a crisp, frosted look, try pairing intense blue or purple mopheads with the shimmering silver foliage of dusty miller (Jacobaea maritima). These woolly, deeply felted leaves look as though they are permanently covered in winter frost. When planted next to deep violet or electric blue hydrangeas, the silver foliage is a visual amplifier. It reflects light and deepens cooler tones, making hydrangea blues and cooler purples look as lusty and vibrant as fresh paint.

Dusty miller typically reaches 8-12 inches (20-30cm) tall, so it’s a great front-row edging plant. Grown as a perennial in zones 8-10 and a hardy annual in cooler northern climates, it handles partial shade well, but requires excellent soil drainage to keep its woolly foliage pristine. Plant beneath 'Nikko Blue' or Endless Summer hydrangeas for a frosty silver edge, and pinch back growing tips in early summer to keep it bushy. Buy Dusty Miller ‘Silverdust’ Seeds from Eden Brothers.

Shop Perfect Hydrangea Partners

Want to bring these high-drama looks to life in your yard? June is the ideal summer launchpad for planting container-grown perennials and sowing fast sprouting seeds. Sowing means you grow strong root networks for vibrant color upgrades, while live plants and plugs allow you to enjoy instant texture wins, plus pollinator benefits. These curated selections all help to take your hydrangea borders to the next level.

Need more ideas for timely gardening jobs and seasonal expert advice delivered straight to your inbox? Sign up for the free Gardening Know How Newsletter!

Shady corners can be tough. There isn’t enough ambient light to highlight dark green leaves, so north-facing borders and under-tree canopies can feel like lost causes. But by intentionally introducing light-reflecting, variegated foliage into your landscape, you can capture and magnify every single inch of ambient light, transforming a dim recess into a luminous focal point that seems to glow in the dark.

When planting your shade garden, these silver plants can help you reflect more light and create dazzling focal points. Unlike deep green leaves which absorb light, these plants have high concentrations of white, cream, and silver pigment that amp up the shimmer factor. And the best part for your perennial shade garden is that you don’t need flowers to brighten up your space. These silver leaved plants work tirelessly from early spring right through the first heavy frosts of fall. They offer months of continuous interest and remain vibrant even on overcast days.

Planting now gives these varieties a chance to establish robust root systems before summer’s peak heat arrives. Once properly sited, these tough beauties can cope with neglect, requiring only minimal care to keep shimmering in the shade. So if you’re keen for dynamic dazzlers in low light, these luminous silver plant ideas can help you give your garden the ultimate glow-up all through the growing season.

Choosing Silver Plants for Shade

Before introducing your silver plants, a few small prepping essentials will pay massive dividends. Many of these silver-leaved champions are low maintenance and highly tolerant of neglect once established. However, shady areas (particularly those beneath mature trees or tucked alongside house foundations) frequently suffer from depleted, dry soil or heavy clay that traps stagnant moisture. To boost plant health, you need a rich, sponge-like soil structure that is well draining and highly fertile.

Gently clear away any matted winter debris or aggressive weeds from the border. Lay down a 2-3-inch (5-8cm) layer of rich, well-rotted organic matter, like compost or leaf mold. Lightly incorporate this organic material into the top 6 inches (15cm) of your soil. This will dramatically improve soil aeration, jumpstart beneficial microbial activity, and ensure that delicate roots can access moisture and oxygen.

Silver and white leaves require a high-contrast backdrop to deliver a glow-in-the-dark vibe. Pair your plants with dark shredded bark mulch, such as Back to the Roots Organic Premium Mulch from Amazon, to accentuate that reflective effect. Planting against dark painted fences, deep red brick foundations, or dense evergreen backdrops will amplify the luminescent quality of these silver plants.

1. Brunnera ‘Jack Frost’

Also known as Siberian bugloss, Brunnera macrophylla is a clumping, low growing perennial with large, pretty heart-shaped leaves. The leaves of standout ‘Jack Frost’ are silvery with dark green veining and a crisp green outer border. The silver patches reflect the light beautifully, and brunnera thrives in partial and even full shade in USDA zones 3-8. Spring also brings dainty, airy sprays of forget-me-not-like flowers, offering a stunning contrast to the frosted backdrop.

Place ‘Jack Frost’ along the front edges of shady pathways or underneath tall, leggy shrubs. While it is highly resilient, it is best to keep it out of the harsh afternoon sun, which will scorch the leaves and turn them a crisp, unsightly brown. Brunnera thrives best in rich, organic soils. Once established, it requires little maintenance and is ignored by deer and rabbits. For a lively textural contrast, plant alongside broad-leaved hostas or dark-leaved coral bells. Buy ‘Jack Frost’ Brunnera from Nature Hills to establish instant light-reflecting architecture in borders this spring.

2. Japanese Painted Fern

Ferns are some of the most shade tolerant of all plants, thriving even in deep shade where other plants refuse to grow. The Japanese painted fern (Athyrium niponicum 'Pictum') is suitable for zones 3-8 in partial or deep shade, and soil that is moist but drains well. This award-winning fern variety features a mesmerizing blend of metallic silver, dusty blue-green, and rich burgundy foliage tones. The arching fronds give elegance and tactile softness to heavy, stagnant spaces, creating a shimmering, kinetic light show. It grows to about 18 inches (45 cm) tall.

Choose a location sheltered from drying winds. This fern detests dry conditions, so regular moisture is key during its first season. This plant-and-forget shade superhero requires no staking or fussy pruning, but don’t let it dry out completely. Plant in structural pockets alongside broad-leafed blue hostas like 'Halcyon' or mass them under a canopy of old rhododendrons, where their metallic hues can gleam against the dark wood. Buy Daylily Nursery Store Japanese Painted Ferns from Amazon to weave soft, feathery silver into your borders.

3. Lamium ‘White Nancy’

Spotted dead nettle (Lamium maculatum) is a lovely evergreen groundcover that forms a dense, weed-smothering mat of pure silver illumination in partial and full shade (zones 4-8). Cultivar ‘White Nancy’ grows small, heart-shaped foliage that is coated in metallic silver-white with dark green margins. In late spring, this foliage is topped with snow-white flowers that amplify the plant's pristine, cooling presence.

Lamium ‘White Nancy’ can thrive in dry shade once its roots find their footing. This makes it ideal for planting under shallow-rooted trees or along dry foundation walls. To encourage a plush, dense look and prevent leggy center patchiness, shear the plant back by half after the spring flowering fades. Grow with woodland bulbs or variegated Solomon’s seal. You can buy Green Promise Farms’ Lamium ‘White Nancy’ Container Plants from Amazon to transform a shady hill into a silver carpet.

4. Heuchera ‘Silver Gumdrops’

Coral bells (heuchera) come in a mind-boggling array of foliage colors, but the silver varieties have a singular intensity. For high-drama illumination, cultivar ‘Silver Gumdrops’ is a delight. This mounding perennial features large scalloped leaves with a vibrant, metallic sheen, underpinned with a sultry purple. In midsummer, it sends up slender stems bearing vibrant pink flowers that attract hummingbirds, but the gleaming foliage is the true star and lasts for months on end in zones 4-9.

These silver stars require a loose, airy soil mix. When planting, mound the soil up to ensure excess water runs away from the crown. In northern zones, these plants are tough, but in southern regions, they benefit from afternoon shade and a good layer of mulch. Other dazzling silver heuchera include ‘Mint Frost’ and ‘Northern Exposure Silver’ Heuchera Live Plants from Walmart for burgundy-silver interplay.

5. Lungwort ‘Excalibur’

Don’t let the unglamorous name fool you: lungwort (pulmonaria) is one of the most striking and resilient early-season perennials you can grow in zones 3-8. Cultivars like ‘Excalibur’ are bred to push the boundaries of silver foliage in full or part shade. Lance-shaped leaves are almost completely silver white, framed by a razor-thin dark green edge. The foliage is also covered in downy hairs that protect from deer and rabbits. In early spring, funnel-shaped blossoms open rose-pink and mature to blue.

This groundcover thrives in cool, damp spots, so it’s great for a north-facing wall or low-lying pathway. If the foliage starts looking tired in summer, cut the plant back to the ground, for a new mound of gleaming silver leaves within weeks. Try ‘Excalibur’ for its shiny leaves, or ‘Trevi Fountain’ and ‘Spilled Milk’ for green leaves speckled with silver or white. You can buy Lungwort ‘Excalibur’ from Digging Dog Nursery.

6. Caladium ‘Moonlight’

For shade gardens in warmer climates, elephant ear or caladium is a great option. Often prized as houseplants, caladiums (aka angel wings) can grow outdoors as a perennial in zones 9-11. It loves the shade, rich soil, and plenty of humidity. The other silver plants in this list are hardy perennials, but caladiums such as ‘Moonlight’ and ‘Candidum’ are tender tropical tubers. Their massive heart-shaped leaves are a luminous ghostly white, punctuated by pale green veins and edging.

Because Caladiums are tropical natives, they crave warmth, humidity, and rich, moisture-retentive soil. Plant only after the risk of last frost has passed and soil temperatures reach 60°F (15°C). These plants require loose, loamy soil so their tubers don't rot. You can dig up the tubers in October to store indoors for winter. Group a few silver caladiums against a backdrop of deep black coleus or dark ferns for high-intensity planting. You can buy Caladium Candidum Sr Bulbs from Walmart.

Shop Silver Lining Heroes

Curating a light-reflecting sanctuary in your yard's darkest corners doesn’t mean you have to settle for boring monotone. As well as offering bulletproof reliability in low-light conditions, these silver-leaved varieties bring instant structural interest and eye-catching elegance to any border or patio container. Get ready to watch your garden glow from dawn until deep into the twilight hours.

Need more ideas for timely gardening jobs and seasonal expert advice delivered straight to your inbox? Sign up for the free Gardening Know How Newsletter!

May is a month of incredible momentum in our backyards, but while much of the focus is often on planting new arrivals, the real secret to a lush, high-impact space lies in the plants you already own. Dividing perennials in May is a real treat both for you and your plants, providing you with a bounty of free plants to fill gaps in borders, while also acting as a vital reset button for the health and vigor of garden favorites.

Perennials are fantastic plants to invite into your garden because they just keep coming back. Unlike one-and-done annuals, which put all their energy into a single season, many perennials flower year after year because their roots do not die in the fall. Instead, the root ball keeps growing. Over time, a perennial plant root ball can get dense and congested. By digging these up and splitting them now, you help to refresh the plants, giving them a new lease of life. And the best bit is that you are creating new plants for your own garden, or to share with friends or neighbors.

But can you really divide perennials in May? You bet you can. While autumn is often cited as the traditional time for division, this month is better for many species, especially those that bloom in late summer and fall, as well as a few that flower in spring. Plants divided now have the entire growing season to rebuild and establish new roots before winter. So it’s smart to get stuck into dividing perennial plants in May for a chance to make more of your favorite perennials. Ready to fill your beds for free? Here are 7 key perennials to divide and conquer.

7 Best Perennials to Divide in May

This mid-spring window is a highly beneficial time for dividing key perennials, across a range of USDA hardiness zones (3-9). Being able to split plants in May allows the newly separated perennials to settle into the ground without the stresses of extreme temperatures. Dividing now doesn't just give you an easy way to fill empty spaces (although that is important), it also creates security at the root level. It’s also a great way to control how your plants look across a bed or border. By spacing out divisions, you can create rhythmic repetitions of color and texture that lead the eye through the garden, and can actually make a small yard feel bigger.

Before you start, check your soil health. Using a digital soil moisture and pH meter, such as the Yamron 4-in-1 Meter from Amazon, can tell you if your replanting spot is ready to receive its new guests. Ideally, you want moist, well-draining soil that has been enriched with organic matter. If your soil is compacted or depleted, this is the perfect moment to work in some high-quality amendments, such as a healthy dose of compost, and some finely shredded bark mulch, such as finely shredded bark mulch, like Back to the Roots Organic Premium Mulch, available from Walmart.

To divide perennials in May, you need a sharp garden spade, a dedicated dividing knife or a sturdy hori hori for precision cuts. You can buy the highly rated Hokuru Hori Hori Garden Knife from Amazon to cleanly slice through divisions without crushing surrounding plant tissue. Aim to keep as much of the root mass intact as possible, but don't be afraid to be firm: most perennials are much tougher than they look. It’s a good idea to divide your perennials every 3-4 years to keep them healthy.

1. Goldenrod

Goldenrod (Solidago spp.) is one of the most beautiful native perennial wildflowers you can grow, and if you’re lucky enough to have some, you can easily multiply your good fortune. These plants offer plumes of sunshine just when the rest of the garden starts to flag. Hardy in zones 2-8, these sunseekers bloom in late summer and keep those flowers into fall, adding an invaluable food source for pollinators. However, they grow quickly, so they should be divided every few years to control their spread.

Dividing goldenrod in May is easy. Dig up the entire clump, and use a sharp spade or a serrated knife to slice the root mass into 3-4 healthy sections. Each section should have several vigorous shoots and a good portion of roots. Replant your divisions in a sunny spot with well-drained soil. Add a little slow-release fertilizer in the planting hole, such as Espoma ​​Organic Flower-tone Fertilizer from Walmart. After replanting, give them a good soak and a layer of mulch to keep roots cool as they re-establish. Within a few weeks, you should see them surging upward.

2. Hosta

Hostas (Hosta spp.) are some of the flashiest perennials you can grow in shade (partial to full shade), offering bold texture and cool colors, from lime green to cool blue foliage. But after a few years, plants can start looking thin or die out at the center, and dividing your hosta plants is a great way to rejuvenate them. May is the perfect moment, ideally as the pointed leaf buds (eyes) are poking through the soil, but before leaves fully unfurl.

Simply dig up the root ball, cut into pieces, then replant each separately. As you are dividing the plant roots, toss out the central portion if it is thin or bare. You can pull smaller clumps apart by hand, or use a hori hori knife to cut through denser centers of older specimens. Relocating divisions is one of the quickest ways to brighten up a dark corner or line a shady pathway (just make sure your new spots are safe from the afternoon sun). Check the crown of the plant is level with the soil surface. They love rich, moisture-retentive soil, so don't be shy with the compost during replanting.

3. Beebalm

Beebalm (Monarda didyma) is a stunning plant with big, shaggy blossoms. It attracts all kinds of pollinators, and thrives in full sun or partial shade. This is one plant that flowers in spring and summer, yet should be divided in spring, because it spreads quickly. Dividing in May keeps the size in check and reduces overcrowding. This reduces the risk of powdery mildew and allows companion plants breathing room.

The key to division: toss out the center of the plant. Dig around the perimeter of the clump and replant the younger, more vigorous outer sections. By giving them fresh soil and more space, you improve air circulation, protecting against the powdery mildew that often plagues this species. Keep new divisions well-watered for 2 weeks. It’s also wise to add a little bio-fungicide to divisions. You can buy Arber Organic Bio-Fungicide from Walmart to help keep powdery mildew at bay.

4. Dianthus

Known affectionately as pinks, dianthus (Dianthus spp.) provides intoxicating scents in spring, and plenty of enchanting ruffles. But if you are growing carnations or pinks, you know how quickly these beauties spread. At the same time, the overcrowding of dianthus can negatively impact the quality of the plant, and you might see it clumping or looking thin at the edges. You can solve these issues by dividing every year or two. Yes, it’s a summer-flowering plant, but it divides best in spring.

Dividing in May, right as they are gearing up for their main show, is a fantastic way to refresh the foliage and double your fragrance for free. Dianthus often has a shallow root system, so a sturdy hand fork is often enough to lift the clumps. Gently pull the sections apart, ensuring each piece has a good bit of root and some healthy growth. Dianthus divisions just need excellent drainage and full sun. Add a handful of fine grit or add crushed eggshells to the planting hole. These beauties will reward you with a second flush of flowers if you deadhead through summer.

5. Asters

This is a classic fall-flowering perennial to divide in May. Let aster (Symphyotrichum spp.) plant growth determine how often to divide. If your asters are truly vigorous, divide every year. Slightly calmer plants can be divided every couple of years. If you leave an aster clump alone for too long, the stems become weak and the plant often flops over under the weight of its own blooms. By dividing every year or two, you create sturdier, self-supporting plants that thrive in full sun or part shade (zones 3-9).

Use a sharp spade to chop the clump into quarters. You can be quite aggressive, as asters are tough as nails and will bounce back with enthusiasm. When replanting, give them plenty of room (18 inches/45cm apart) to allow for air movement. Ensure they are in a spot that gets at least 6 hours of sun. You can buy Jobe’s Organics All-Purpose Fertilizer Spikes from Amazon to nourish these fast-growing bloomers.

6. Garden Phlox

Garden phlox (Phlox paniculata), with their erect, domed clusters of flowers, wake up your landscape with color and fragrance from mid-summer to fall. However, this sun-loving perennial is also a magnet for powdery mildew if it gets too crowded. Dividing in May is the best way to keep phlox healthy, while filling more of your yard with this pollinator favorite. Like beebalm, phlox gets tired in the center. Dig up the clump and use a sharp knife to take 4-inch (10cm) sections from the outer ring.

Replanting these fresh starts will result in larger flower panicles, and it’s an easy way to turn one plant into 3-4 healthy superstars. Phlox loves plenty of organic matter and consistent moisture. When replanting your divisions, choose a spot with full sun, plus some afternoon shade if you live in a very hot climate. After replanting, apply a thick layer of organic mulch, like shredded bark or leaf mold, to keep roots cool and moist, exactly what phlox needs to produce those iconic, domed flower heads.

7. Hardy Mums

Hardy garden mums (Chrysanthemum spp), aka old-fashioned mums, are perennial treasures that can return year after year in zones 4-9. However, they are short-lived if they aren't divided regularly, and May is the ideal time to make that split. Do it now, and you allow the divisions to develop a massive root system before they need to produce flowers in fall. Dig up the clump and look for new runners. These are your new plants. Simply snip them off with a bit of root attached and you’re ready to go.

Replant only the healthiest sections taken from the outside of the clump. Replant in a sunny, well-drained spot. Because mums are heavy feeders, they will appreciate a balanced liquid fertilizer every few weeks in early summer. Add a splash of seaweed fertilizer to boost mum growth. You can buy Neptune's Harvest Fish & Seaweed Fertilizer from Walmart. It’s also good to pinch off the tips of stems every few weeks until July. This forces the plant to branch out, resulting in a carpet of flowers in fall.

Shop Perennial Care in May

Ready to multiply your garden? Having the right gear makes the job faster, easier, and healthier for the plants. From precision cutting tools that protect delicate crowns to the rich soil amendments that help new babies thrive, these curated items will help you divide and conquer your borders.

Need more ideas for timely gardening jobs and seasonal expert advice delivered straight to your inbox? Sign up for the free Gardening Know How Newsletter!

The wait is almost over, and if you’re anything like me, the anticipation is unbearable. Chances are, for the last few weeks, you’ve been peering at those pink asparagus tips, willing them on as they unfurl into lush bushes. Now, the finish line is in sight. My herbaceous ‘Coral Sunset’ peonies have reached that tantalizing marshmallow stage, by which I mean their fat buds are getting squishy, hinting at blooming peony displays so spectacular yet still elusive, teasing me every time I walk past.

But here’s the thing about peonies: those last few weeks before blooming can often be the most critical. You see a slightly floppy marshmallow stalk listing after heavy rain, lean over to nudge it into a support, and hear that sickening snap (believe me, I’ve been there). After all this patient waiting, the last thing any of us wants is to sabotage the grand finale with silly oversights and ill-advised last-minute peony fixes. And the worst thing you can do for your peonies this month is... nothing at all.

While they don't need us to hover over them, a few simple steps this month can ensure your precious marshmallow buds reach their full fluffball potential and don’t wind up face down in the mud. Don’t panic, you’re nearly there: you just need a few minutes and these last checks to make sure your herbaceous favorites can turn fat, happy buds into magnificent blousy peony blooms.

Get Ready for the May Growth Spurt

By the time May rolls around, it might feel like it’s too late to do much for peony size or peony bloom time, but we can be effective in the weeks before herbaceous and Itoh varieties bloom – and in the days after tree peonies are fading. Even when peony clumps seem to be putting on several inches of growth overnight, we can determine the fate of those massive fluffy heads in simple, straightforward ways.

Depending on USDA zones, May weather can be fickle. One week we’re dealing with a heat spike that seems to wilt tender stems. The next, a downpour threatens to batter healthy foliage (and nascent blooms). A few small environmental checks can make a big difference. This isn’t the time for nitrogen-heavy peony fertilizing which can trigger weak, sappy growth. That said, I do like to add a gentle splash of seaweed in spring, like Neptune's Harvest Fish & Seaweed Fertilizer from Amazon. This contains micronutrients and hormones that support flower strength at this volatile time, and serve as a vital plant tonic to intensify eventual bloom color.

Caring for peonies in spring isn't about grand gestures. If it’s turning out to be a wet spring, airflow is key. If it's a dry one where you are, deep hydration is the goal. It’s about responding to these shifts with a steady hand to nurture peony bloom. With these few high-impact tasks, you’ll ensure your peonies have the structural integrity and health they need to withstand whatever the skies throw at them. Here are the small steps you need to enjoy those big, pillowy peonies you’ve been waiting for.

1. Support Your Peonies

Rainwater and wind can be a devastating combination for peonies in May. One should never underestimate the weight of a rain-soaked 'Sarah Bernhardt' on the verge of blooming. And nobody wants to see our beloved peonies face-down in the mud. Because May growth can be explosive, this is your absolute last call to get peony supports in place – but do make sure they are the right kind.

Not all peonies need scaffolding. If you’re growing Itoh hybrids like 'Bartzella,' you’ll find they’ve inherited the stiff stems of their tree peony ancestors. For herbaceous types, though, you may need to bring in reinforcements late on. Don’t wait until the plant is flopping to try to secure it with twine or, worse, cages. Frames and cages are great when peonies are young enough to wind through them naturally as they grow. But once you are staring at 20-inch (50cm) tall peony stalks, it’s too late to twist brittle stems into these plant supports. Even if you don’t risk snapping stalks, you might choke off airflow and invite disease.

If you missed the window for grow-through grids, don't panic. Place three or four sturdy bamboo stakes around the perimeter of your peony clump, with another in the center, then weave soft twine between them. This allows individual stems to lean naturally while staying upright. You can also link together individual stakes designed to be connected for a last-minute show of strength. You can buy GiCare Peony Plant Connecting Stakes from Amazon, which can be linked together around developing plants in a gentler way than a cage. Use Velcro Adjustable Plant Ties from Walmart for another level of reinforcement. Be sure to check your supports weekly.

2. Watch Out for Disease

The sadness of a peony bud that fails to open is hard to put into words. Watching a fat, promising bud suddenly turn brown and shrivel up is genuinely upsetting. You may think this was due to a late frost, but more often than not, this is likely fungal disease in action, especially if you have also been forcing peonies into cramped cages with spring rain in full swing. One of the most common diseases for peonies is botrytis blight, a fungus that thrives in damp, humid conditions. Botrytis loves the tender tissues of emerging buds. Swift action is crucial: if left, the fungus can travel down the stem and infect the crown, weakening the plant for years.

So the second of your easy checks this month is to check your precious marshmallow buds. What you are looking for is bud blast: this is evidence of buds that have turned black or dark brown or feel mushy. If you see one, don't panic. You’ve likely caught it early, and stopped it getting worse. Simply snip it off, and remember to sanitize as you go. Keep a small jar of rubbing alcohol or a 10% bleach solution handy to dip your snips in between every single cut. You can get Epic Medical 70 Percent Rubbing Alcohol from Amazon. This prevents you from accidentally hitchhiking spores from a sick stem to a healthy one.

If you see ants crawling all over your 'Karl Rosenfield' buds, it’s not as bad as you think. While they look like trouble, they are just sipping the nectar the buds secrete and, in exchange, deterring other sap-sucking pests. As long as the buds look green and healthy, let the ants do their thing. You can protect foliage from the risk of gray mold without harming the ants, by applying a gentle foliar spray. Try Bonide Captain Jack’s Copper Fungicide Spray from Home Depot. It’s also wise to thin out any spindly stems that don't have buds, to make it harder for mold to settle in.

3. Check Mulching and Watering

If you want to gaze into the future with peony health, look into the eyes. These pink buds on the crown are where a lot of the magic happens, from flower size to strength of stalks. Hopefully, you sorted out a good mulch for your peony, but now is a good time to inspect moisture levels and see how your mulch is doing. Your third check is to make sure peony eyes aren’t sitting too deep in the mulch. Since there’s more activity around beds in spring, it’s possible for mulch to get kicked over crowns. Burying the crown even by 2 inches (5cm) can tell a plant it’s too deep to bloom. So pull back any mulch from the center, leaving a 3-inch (8cm) circle around stems.

Deep hydration is also important in May, especially if you are having a dry spring or live in the south or west. Inconsistent moisture during the bud-swelling stage leads to smaller, shorter-lived blooms. And a sprinkle only wets the surface and encourages shallow roots. Aim for a long, deep soak once a week, early morning or evening, and target the base of the plant: water the toes, not the nose!

A soaker hose can deliver water directly to the root zone. Try the Gilmour Vinyl Soaker Hose from Lowe's to automate the process. You can also get individual drippers that work even if you don’t have a full irrigation system set up. Try an emitter like the Rain Bird 2 GPH Spot Watering Emitters from Home Depot. Just avoid overwatering, as this can encourage botrytis.

Bonus Checks for Post-Bloom Care

While herbaceous peonies are just approaching bloom time, many tree peonies are already taking their final bows. If you’re lucky enough to grow these woody wonders, May is a critical month to ensure the longevity and vitality of future blooms. As those blooms fade, your tree peony puts its energy into producing large seed pods. Leaving these to develop is exhausting for peonies, especially when you have no intention of propagating more by seed. So deadheading these flowers is critical, using clean, sharp shears. Industry-standard Felco 2 One-Hand Pruning Shears from Amazon give a clean, bypass cut that won't crush the cambium layer.

By snipping off the spent flower heads now, you trick the plant into redirecting energy into root development and forming buds for next year’s show. Prompt deadheading also helps reduce the risk of fungal spores hitching a ride on decaying petals. So remove just the flower heads, cutting above the first set of true leaves. Keep everything tidy with pop-up gardening bags like Fiskars Kangaroo 10-Gallon Collapsible Gardening Bags from Walmart. Whatever you do, though, don’t cut the tree to the ground. This quick tidy-up ensures a stronger, more resilient tree peony.

Shop Peony Care Essentials

Keeping on top of peonies deserves a treat. These key essentials don’t just make the chores easier but create an element of indulgent ritual. Just like peonies, the right tools, treatments and accessories can keep you company for years to come. So treat yourself, and your peonies. These curated picks will help nurture your favorite plants towards a glorious flowering finale – and set them up for years of future blooms.

Need more ideas for timely gardening jobs and seasonal expert advice delivered straight to your inbox? Sign up for the free Gardening Know How Newsletter!

In certain areas of my life, I’m a sucker for the slow burn, and love having things to look forward to – but when it comes to gardening, I’m passionate about the quick and easy wins, because I totally appreciate how growers feel time-strapped these days, and I get that the magic phrase “free time” can often feel like an optical illusion. With time being such a precious commodity, the prospect of filling empty beds and bare patches might feel overwhelming. But it doesn’t have to be hard work, believe me.

You can plug those garden gaps and create a florally fabulous landscape in weeks. The beauty with these speedy gap filling flowers is that they prefer a bit of neglect and are happy being left to run their own flower show. These plucky beauties don’t require special conditions under ground and don’t have outrageous weather needs. All these easy flowers need is what you have: bare patches and a tiny bit of time. Give them that, and they will transform awkward gaps into vibrant tapestries of color.

And just because they are good at filling gaps, that doesn’t mean they are humdrum. These zingy flowering dynamos are some of the most desirable ornamentals you can grow, offering a mix of dimensions and tones, from towering lace to ground-hugging neon fireworks. And they don’t just burst with color and disappear a few days later. They may show up fast, but they maintain an exceptional flowering marathon that stretches right through to fall. So if you’ve still got gaps to fill, rejoice! These gorgeous fast gap fillers will knit your garden together in record time, and they are raring to go right now. All you have to do is enjoy the show.

Choosing Fast Growing Gap Fillers

Tapping into your yard’s unique personality does help when mulling over these fast growing fillers. But it’s quite easy to prep your beds and borders, and you don’t need loads of skill or special tools to get the best from them. These 8 easy gap fillers aren’t overly fussy and won’t wilt if you forget the watering can. Just think about your space before you sow. Most of these high-speed bloomers are fine in USDA zones 4-9 and many can cope with some partial shade, but the more sunshine you can give them, the better. Whether you’re looking to fill a sunny border space or a vertical gap (empty spaces on a trellis or a bare fence line), there’s something here to suit.

A little ground-level prep goes a long way. Checking your soil’s moisture retention and pH levels is key, and the speed of growth you can enjoy with these plants means you have a little time to make small soil amendments if needed. Before sowing, just carry out a quick check of your soil using a meter like the XLUX Long Probe Soil Meter from Amazon and add with a little coarse sand if your soil is claggy.

Even if your tests don’t flag up problems, I’d advise applying a gentle, diluted seaweed treatment like Neptune’s Harvest Liquid Seaweed from Walmart before you fill gaps with flowers from my list. This will prime your planting spot ahead of the mammoth flowering marathon, and provides a wealth of trace minerals these flowers love. Seaweed strengthens the plant's cellular structure, making them more resilient to pests and heatwaves. This quick ritual ensures the soil is pre-loaded with goodness, so you can walk away once the roots have anchored.

Planting in May takes advantage of the warming soil, allowing nature to do most of the rest. These varieties are wired for speed, either because they are annuals with a mission to max out for one season, or because they are vigorous perennials that use runners to claim territory. In the first few weeks, a regular deep watering is the only thing required to help them settle in. Once they have established their root system, they will be reassuringly self-sufficient and ready to erupt in a riot of color in weeks.

1. Zinnias

Dynamo zinnias (Zinnia elegans) have a justified reputation for fast growth, and make gorgeous ornamentals if you’re after vibrant colors at speed. These plucky annuals are perfect for plugging awkward mid-border holes with crayon-bright tones, as well as a range of petal textures. Wherever a patch of bare dirt needs a bit of wow factor, zinnias deliver with gusto. These heat-lovers thrive in zones (2–11), leaping from seed to bloom in 60-80 days. Once they hit their stride, they create a continuous parade of color for 3-4 months, standing proud until first frost.

These curb appeal favorites only need full sun and well-drained soil to truly explode. I space my zinnias 8-10 inches (20-25cm) apart, as the natural huddle this creates helps them to support each other as they grow. Give individual plants a pinch at 12 inches (30cm) tall, as this encourages branching out, doubling your blooms. These easy gap fillers are cut-and-come-again kings, and every flower you snip triggers more. Talk about the gift that keeps on giving! You can buy gorgeous zinnias at Burpee, including ‘Queeny Lemon Peach’ and ‘Zinderella Lilac’ varieties.

2. Nasturtiums

These vigorous scramblers fill a bare patch of earth almost as quickly as your back is turned. Within 50-60 days of sowing, a dusty gap becomes a lush, lily-pad-like carpet of emerald-green leaves, soon followed by spicy-scented, jewel-toned blooms. Nasturtiums are tender perennials but are grown as annuals in zones 2–11, and provide a relentless show to first frost. Whether you go for mounding types or trailing varieties, they excel at filling a space with character and color. What’s more, they are hooked on neglect. They produce more flowers in poor, lean soil. If you feed them too much nitrogen, they’ll grow massive leaves but hide their blooms.

They crave full sun, but appreciate some afternoon shade in hotter climates. For an instant knit, sow directly into the ground, 10-12 inches (25-30cm) apart and an inch deep. They hate being moved, so you can virtually leave them to it. They don't even require deadheading to keep their 5-month flower show going. For a stunning visual mix, try the marbled foliage of 'Alaska Mix', the moody dark tones of 'Black Velvet', or the classic trailing 'Jewel of Africa'. There are some stunning nasturtiums available from Eden Brothers, including ‘Jewel Cherry Rose’ and peachy ‘Vesuvius’ varieties.

3. Cosmos

Dreamy cosmos (Cosmos bipinnatus) are the queens of elegance, and love to fill large, vertical visual holes at speed. They are capable of reaching 3-4 feet tall (90cm-1.2m). Even before the blooms arrive, they produce clouds of airy foliage that masks bare fences or leggy shrubs with a soft, green screen. They take a little longer to flower (typically 70-90 days from seed) but they are relentless once they start. You can expect a prolific display of daisy-like blossoms from mid-summer to first frost). Thriving as annuals in zones 2–11, they are perfectly happy when you do less.

Go easy on the fertilizer, or avoid it altogether. Cosmos prefer poor, sandy soils, so add a little coarse sand to the planting hole to create this texture. Tuck into your brightest spots, and for a seamless gap-filling effect, sow 12-18 inches (30-45cm) apart. Cosmos will appreciate being planted in drifts where they can lean on their neighbors for support. They are another classic cut-and-come-again plant, so the more you snip, the more the plant branches out to fill the space. For effortless charm, try the classic 'Sensation Mix', ruffled 'Double Click' or dwarf 'Sonata' varieties, all available from Burpee.

4. Bee Balm (Monarda)

If you have a sizable gap that needs a shot of high-octane energy, these perennials will give you a festival of colorful fireworks, exploding mid-to-late summer in shades of electric scarlet, violet, and pink. Even when not in bloom, the foliage is a sensory treat. I love the dark green, lance-shaped leaves which release a lovely citrus scent. And of course, this filler is so popular with hummingbirds and butterflies. Hardy in zones 3–9, bee balm spreads via underground runners. This means it doesn't just sit in a tidy clump but hunts for bare soil, knitting together to fill a large border gap within a single season. While seeds can take over 90 days to truly establish, buying nursery starts can provide mid-summer bloom that lasts for up to 8 weeks.

The biggest challenge for monarda is powdery mildew, so plant them in a spot with excellent air circulation. Space your bee balm plants 18-24 inches (45-60cm) apart, and they will fill the negative space in no time. They thrive in full sun to partial shade, and you can virtually leave them to it once established, as their mint-family genes make them tough as nails. Just deadhead spent blooms to trigger a secondary flush. For the easiest care, look for mildew-resistant varieties like the 'Sugar Buzz' series, the compact 'Pardon My Purple', or vibrant magenta Bee Balm ‘Be True’ plants from Amazon for a headstart on a spectacular season.

5. Hardy Geranium ‘Rozanne’

The hardy geranium (aka cranesbill) is a genuine speed superhero that can knit together disparate ornamental plants with seamless charm and beauty. While many perennials bloom in a single, short burst, hybrid 'Rozanne' pumps out violet-blue flowers from late spring to first frost. A single nursery start planted in May can easily sprawl to 2-3 feet (60-90cm) wide in its first season, weaving its way between leggy shrubs and taller perennials to hide bare soil with a dense canopy of mounding foliage. Hardy in zones 4-8, these plucky cranesbills are happy in full sun and partial shade and just get better and better as they knit your border together.

Because this plant is sterile, it never wastes energy making seeds, and puts all its power into a 6-month flowering frenzy. It requires no deadheading and is unfussy about soil, though it appreciates a bit of organic mulch to keep its roots cool. While 'Rozanne' is the undisputed speed champion, other quick-filling relatives like 'Johnson’s Blue' or magenta 'Max Frei' offer similar fast carpet effects. If the plant gets floppy in late August, a quick snip prompts a fresh flush in days. You can buy Geranium ‘Rozanne’ from Nature Hills.

6. Coreopsis

My next pick is a true sunshine superstar, and perfect for sun-baked gaps. Coreopsis (aka tickseed) offers a dense carpet of sunny yellow, bronze, or bicolor blooms that shimmer like golden stars. The verticillata varieties offer delicate, thread-like foliage, while grandiflora types provide a sturdier, leafy base that rapidly mounds to fill horizontal gaps. Ideally suited for zones 4-9, they are fine with a weekly watering once established. For an immediate fast fix, plant nursery starts in May. That said, annual varieties can flower in 60 days, providing a relentless display for up to 4 months.

Shearing plants back by about a third after the first flush of flowers encourages a fresh burst of foliage and a secondary wave of blooms that carries you right into early autumn. Coreopsis craves full sun and thrives in poor, rocky, or sandy soil. There are some delightful zingy yellow blooming varieties. Look for award-winning 'Early Sunrise', airy 'Moonbeam', or vibrant 'Jethro Tull' with its fluted petals. One of my favorites is the peachy bronze ‘Creme Caramel’, available from Nature Hills.

7. Bishop’s Flower

Bishop’s flower (Ammi majus) is a beautiful paradox in a border – looking like some delicate lace sculpture, but surprisingly tough and self-reliant. Often mistaken for its wild cousin, Queen Anne’s lace, this garden-friendly version is just as gorgeous. It sends up sturdy, branching stems topped with frothy, lace-like umbels that swoon in the breeze. Even before the flowers appear, the foliage masks mid-border gaps. While it can take 80-90 days to flower from seed, you can buy nursery plants or plugs to seal the deal far quicker. Its high-impact flower towers last for 10 weeks. Hardy in zones 2–11, it brings height and light with easy grace.

To speed up the clock for a May sowing of this lacy survivor, you can also soak your seeds in warm water for 12 hours before planting. Once they establish, they are very self-sufficient, and the more you snip these elegant clouds for your vases, the more the plant sends up fresh lateral shoots. Look for varieties like 'Queen of Africa' or 'Graceland', which are bred for more prolific flower heads. Or for a delicate chartreuse cloud, buy Bishop’s Flower ‘Green Mist’ Seeds from Eden Brothers.

8. Lantana

For a speedy neon color pop in sun-drenched gaps, lantana gets to work fast. These plucky bloomers can spread 3 feet (90cm) wide in a single season. Lantana plants produce tight clusters of kaleidoscopic flowers in electric shades of orange, hot pink, and sunshine yellow, often all on the same plant. Even before those intense colors start stealing the show, the sage-green foliage provides a dense, aromatic filler. Perennial in zones 9–11 and terrific fast-growing annuals in the rest of the country, a nursery start can become a full-border beauty in just 60 days.

Lantanas dislike pampering and flower better in poor soil. They are drought-tolerant once those roots are anchored, and require zero deadheading. For a quick knit in a large gap, space plants 18-24 inches (45-60cm) apart. A little heads up to pals in the deep South and Hawaii: since lantana is a vigorous grower, it is viewed as invasive in some areas. But you can get sterile, non-invasive cultivars. Try the 'Bandana' series for its mounding habit, the 'Luscious' series for vibrant bicolors, or the trailing 'Confetti' types. Just give them a hot, sunny spot and a light mulch to settle them in, then watch your garden glow for almost half a year. You can buy Luscious Royale Pina Colada Lantana from Fast Growing Trees.

Shop Stunning Gap Fillers

Turning a bare patch of earth into a vivid floral haven is easy-breezy. By selecting these plucky, fast-growing flowers, you can create a seamless and sophisticated border in weeks. These curated high-impact picks settle fast, flourish easily, and thrive with minimal fuss, ensuring your yard remains gorgeous all season long.

Need more ideas for timely gardening jobs and seasonal expert advice delivered straight to your inbox? Sign up for the free Gardening Know How Newsletter!

Enjoying fabulous patio pots that flower all summer long doesn’t have to be hard work. Just choose the right drought-tolerant plants and looking after them won’t interfere with your precious R&R garden time. All our recommended plants are low maintenance perennials, too, so they’ll return year after year with minimal care.

While it’s true that plants growing in pots typically need more nurturing than those in the ground, there are a few tricks to container gardening to set yourself up for lush results without breaking a sweat. For a start, choose a large container: the more potting soil there is, the more moisture it will hold and so last longer between waterings, and the less it will be affected by extremes of temperature or weather.

Next, throw a couple of handfuls of pebbles into the base of the pot. Any small stones will do – and if you don’t have a gravel driveway to poach then a sample pack from a building supply store is the cheapest option. These pebbles will stop the planter drainage hole getting blocked and prevent roots sitting in waterlogged soil.

Using a moisture control potting soil such as this from Amazon protects potted plants against over- and under-watering by absorbing excess water then releasing it slowly. This will guard against disasters if you're an erratic waterer. If you’re filling a big container, then you can save money but still achieve a similar effect by mixing coconut coir such as this from Amazon into a regular potting mix. Coconut fiber expands up to eight times its size when soaked, so it’ll help smooth out moisture levels on the days you don’t get round to watering.

And then it’s all down to selecting plants that naturally thrive in well-drained conditions and have a tolerant nature as well as a will to produce abundant blooms. Of course you’ll still need to water them, but they’ll forgive you for forgetting for a few days, and keep you in flowers all summer without sulking. As these are all perennial plants, you'll also need to refresh the top layer of potting soil every spring.

By choosing a perennial plant as the centerpiece of a planter, you can then easily tuck in a few annual plants around the edges for extra color. Any plants that do well in a hanging basket will thrive in a container and, if your planter is big enough, why not add a hanging basket trailer to cascade over the pot rim too? Then you’ve hit the patio-pot jackpot of thriller, filler and spiller, with hardly any effort!

Ready? Let’s get your patio pots looking fabulous…

1. Agapanthus

Agapanthus, also commonly called Lily of the Nile and African lily, bloom far more profusely in pots than they do in the ground, as in a constricted space they prioritise flowers over foliage. May is the perfect time to add them to your garden, ready to flower through June, July and August.

These perennials love good drainage so mix a few handfuls of poultry grit into the potting soil, ensuring you buy grit made from crushed granite and not oyster shells – you’ll find it at farm supply stores or it’s available from Amazon.

Blue Lily of the Nile, available from Fast Growing Trees, is only hardy in zones 7–11, but the beauty of growing agapanthus in a pot is that you can easily move it into a sheltered, frost-free spot for winter. This is an eye-catching plant with its clusters of flowers atop strong stems but, for even more drama, try ‘Black Pantha’, available from Burpee. It has almost-black buds that open to dark violet-blue blooms. Both eventually grow up to three feet tall.

2. Anouk Lavender

Every patio should bathe in the relaxing scent of a lavender plant, and Lavandula stoechas ‘Anouk’ is a perfect choice for a pot. This drought-tolerant perennial thrives in full sun and loves to have its roots restricted, producing showy flowers topped with butterfly-like bracts. Compact and evergreen, its aromatic silvery-grey foliage is pretty year-round, too.

Though it’s considered hardy in zones 7–9, by growing ‘Anouk’ in a pot you can extend your options by moving it to a sheltered spot before temperatures fall. There are a few varieties to choose from, all reaching around 18 inches high, depending on your color preference. ‘Purple Flare’ has the deepest flower color, through ‘Dark Purple’ to ‘Deep Rose’ with lighter spikes; all are available from Fast Growing Trees.

3. Gaura

This perennial is a wonderful addition to a group of patio pots, with tall, slender stems smothered in small flowers that draw clouds of butterflies. Gaura sways in the slightest breeze, adding movement, and has a chameleon-like ability to look stylishly nonchalant in a modern backyard yet full of charm in a more relaxed cottage garden.

In a sunny spot, Gaura flowers from June all through summer, and often well into fall, and enjoys the quick-draining conditions of a large container.

There are plenty of varieties to choose from, and all have the same airy habit and are suitable for zones 5–9, in various combinations from white to deep pink. ‘Gambit Rose’ is the darkest with pink flowers on maroon stems, and also the most compact, growing to 20 inches, and plants are available from Burpee. ‘Rosy Jane’ is also available from Burpeeand has pretty white petals with pink picotee edges and grows to 24” tall, while the pink and white petals of ‘Siskiyou Pink’ are more painterly – this is a little taller, too, and is available from Garden Goods Direct. ‘Whirling Butterflies’ has pink buds that open to white and can reach 3 feet in a pot, and is also available from Garden Goods Direct.

4. Cat’s Pajamas Catmint

Catmint is an easy-going drought-tolerant perennial, and ‘Cat’s Pajamas’ is a compact cultivar that’s especially suitable for container growing. Reaching 1–2 feet tall and a foot wide, its indigo-purple flowers last from late spring to late summer. This is a variety from Proven Winners so you can safely buy a plant via Amazon.

If you’re a cat parent, then catmint is a must for your patio. While it’s not as intoxicating as catnip (Nepeta cataria), catmint is still beloved by cats who like to rub against the aromatic leaves and stems. This variety is pretty robust though, so don’t worry it'll get squashed.

Nepeta ‘Cat’s Pajamas’ needs great drainage so raise your container on pot risers such as these from Amazon through fall and winter.

5. Dianthus

Here’s another low maintenance plant that will bloom all summer in a pot for very little effort. And if you think of Dianthus as an old-fashioned plant, think again! All sorts of modern varieties now offer incredible fragrance and abundant showy flowers while retaining the easy-going nature of their forebears. With flowers growing 6–18 inches high and naturally forming a mound of foliage, they make for pretty little pots. Most Dianthus are evergreen or semi-evergreen, maintaining their attractive blue- or gray-tinged foliage through winter, too.

The Dianthus Scent First series is a great example of modern breeding with fabulous double flowers – ‘Coral Reef’ is a standout variety as the white edges to its coral-pink petals accentuate the frilly effect. It’s suitable for zones 5–9 and is available from Jackson & Perkins.

EverBloom is another super series to look out for which, as the name suggest, flowers for months on end. ‘Plum Glory’ has a particularly pretty mix of colors and pinking-shear petals and grows well in zones 3–9; it’s available from Nature Hills.

6. Compact Hybrid Tea Rose

As a general rule, roses don’t like to live in pots because they have long roots that like to stretch out. Of course, there are miniature and patio roses, but if you want big blooms, then look out for a compact hybrid tea rose cultivar that’s been bred for life in a container. A variety that’s marketed as good for beginners is an especially good bet, as it’s highly likely to be very tolerant of a wide range of growing conditions.

‘Parfuma Bliss’, available from Jackson & Perkins, would be my pick. It’s a bushy shrub, only growing to 2–3 feet high and wide, yet has 3-4 inch blooms, each with up to 120 apricot petals and a heady fruity-vanilla perfume. It has glossy dark green leaves and blooms in flushes all through summer.

Give your hybrid tea the biggest pot you can afford, remembering that rose roots like to spread out rather than dive deep, so a cube planter such as this corten steel box from Amazon works well. A container with a base that’s as wide as the rim also brings stability for a bigger plant that may catch the wind.

This is one plant you'll have to remember to water if you want it to keep on blooming – perhaps every day in the heat of the summer – but the reward of those fragrant flowers will easily make the effort worthwhile.

7. Gaillardia

If you want patio drama without having to put in much effort, blanket flower is the stunner to fill your patio pots. Its daisy-shape flowers appear in June and, as long as you keep deadheading, carry on coming till the first frost. ‘Arizona Sun’ is native to North America so it’s remarkably heat- and drought-tolerant, and its wonderfully fiery red and yellow flowers don’t fade in the sun.

Suitable for zones 3–9 and available from Garden Goods Direct, it does best with fewer nutrients so don’t feed this workhorse – you’re better off refreshing the top layer of soil every year to keep it blooming well.

8. Coreopsis

Tickseed is a cheerful bloomer that loves good drainage so it does well in containers, and flowers all through summer from June to September in a sunny spot. Though it only reaches 18 inches tall, it’s fast-growing and vigorous so quickly fills a pot. Coreopsis can be annual or perennial so, if you want a patio pot that’ll last for years to come, do read the plant label or online description. While it’s straightforward to grow from seed, May is a little late to be sowing perennial Coreopsis for flowers this summer, so best to buy a plant.

‘Moonbeam’ is a tough, reliable perennial coreopsis, with buttery-yellow flowers that butterflies love; plants are available from Burpee and are hardy in zones 3–9. Another perennial that’s excellent for a container is ‘Mercury Rising’ with velvety wine-red petals tipped with white. Though it’s a similar height to ‘Moonbeam’, it spreads up to 36 inches and naturally forms a mound, so looks great in a wide bowl planter such as this from Amazon. The other advantage this variety has is that it’s sterile, which means it doesn’t produce seeds so doesn’t need deadheading to keep blooming all summer. It’s suitable for zones 5–9 and is also available from Burpee.

I’ve been thinking a lot about partnerships lately. So many things about gardening are made easier when we combine forces – and when time is short, key dream team plant partnerships can carry a lot of the heavy lifting with minimal effort. Container growing can make our planting horizons a lot more exciting when space is as short as time. But here again, the right plant combinations can free us up to enjoy a mass of benefits with zero hassles. I know this time of year comes on like a rush of tasks after months of waiting – so picking the right double acts is a huge time saver. Think that all sounds like a big ask? I’m happy to tell you it can be done.

In my container garden, there’s always an element of experimentation, but I also make sure I have a few old faithfuls in the mix. These are my all-stars because they have served me well in different settings, evolved with my tastes, and grown up with me. What makes them truly all-star is that they are genuinely undemanding and give so much by way of benefit. These power couples simplify the process of container gardening, take me only minutes to get started, thrive on minimal care, and bring months of joy that can last to first frost. And being reliable doesn’t mean they are dull – far from it! These options are exuberant, prolific, dynamic and sensory. And as well as being high impact, they are all highly adapted to a “set and forget” lifestyle, so you can start them this month and leave them to flourish.

These dynamic duos are a joy for time-strapped plant lovers (like me) who are drawn to vibrant, easy wins that just keep on going strong. May is the perfect time to plant these high-impact containers, allowing these rugged, reliable beauties to make the most of gentler seasonal temperatures, so they can see out the summer with ease. Geared towards real partnership power, these plant pairings assist each other’s growth, share the same thirst levels, and deliver a wow factor that lasts all the way through September. Covering combinations for visual dynamics, dramatic height, intoxicating fragrance, lively textures, and even gorgeous flavors, these low-effort container pairings are your secret to vibrant summer displays that never seem to end.

Choosing Your Container All-Stars

Growing effortless container planting combinations isn't empty rhetoric – it really is possible, and it has saved me hours of fiddling and fussing in the backyard. It really comes down to just making that little bit of effort upfront in May, so you can save yourself precious time later to sit back, relax, and show off your pretty pots. These dream team pairings are the ultimate survivors because they are classic drought-tolerant summer stalwarts. Whether your passion is dramatic structure, big color, evocative fragrance, easy texture, or intriguing edibles, these 5 sensory combinations cover all the bases and ask for very little in return.

Just remember that a plant in a container is generally two zones less hardy than if it were in the ground, because the roots aren't insulated by the earth. So a zone 5 lavender might only survive a zone 7 winter in a pot. That said, most of these all-stars are rock-solid for USDA hardiness zones 4-9. For southern readers, humidity may be more of a worry than the cold. But if you allow for good airflow, growing these lovely double acts is a breeze. You can even bring key tender perennials indoors as houseplants when the first frost hits, allowing your set-and-forget joy to move into the living room. And even the annuals can self-seed, bringing you even more effortless color and beauty next summer.

To plant and forget, give just a little thought now to the container. The larger the pot, the more soil it holds, and the slower it will dry out. Look for non-porous materials like glazed ceramic or high-quality resin to lock in moisture. Most importantly, check for drainage holes and optionally try a few planting toes, such as Choclaif Pot Feet from Amazon. Opt for a well-draining potting mix, and don’t be afraid to add a sprinkling of perlite or coarse sand for Mediterranean combos, and a handful of organic worm castings for the bushier selections, like Wiggle Worm Pure Organic Worm Castings from Walmart, to provide a slow-motion feast.

Give these sun-loving container combos at least 6 hours of sun, but factor in that some of the most foliage-heavy appreciate a little afternoon shade to prevent leaf scorch. Before you plant in their forever containers, give nursery pots a good soak. For the first 2-3 weeks, give your dream team regular watering to help optimize plant roots. Adding a little mulch (like pea gravel or wood chips) saves you loads of time later. Do this, and they practically grow themselves, and actually prefer being left to their own devices. Plant now, and these combos develop the root strength needed to glide through September and take it all in stride. These perennials and long-season annuals can easily push through to fall, giving you months of joy for a few moments of prep.

1. Scents and Scentsability

The pairing of lavender and scented pelargonium is a union of aromatic endurance. By combining the woody, upright structure of English lavender with the lush, textured foliage of lemon, nutmeg and rose-scented pelargoniums, you create a powerful bond for pest control, as well as evocative scents you will want to reach out and touch. May is beneficial to planting this duo, thanks to the increasing light levels that kickstart essential oil production. This is what gives that heavenly scentsability to deter unwanted garden guests like mosquitoes and gnats. The lavender provides those iconic silver-green spikes and purple haze of midsummer blooms, while the pelargonium acts as a hardworking filler, offering velvety leaves that exude perfume every time you brush past. Talk about complementary fragrant bonding.

Part of their partnership power lies in their shared Mediterranean souls. Both resent being fussed over with a watering can. In fact, the quickest way to ruin this pot is by being too kind. They are both exceptionally drought-tolerant once established, and prefer a lean, gritty soil over rich, heavy compost. This pairing is a dream for zones 5-9, though as a tender perennial, you’d just need to bring the pelargonium indoors before the first frost to enjoy it again next year. These are fast growers, and if you plant in May, they will quickly fill a 12-15-inch (30-38cm) pot. Position in the sunniest spot you have, somewhere it can catch a breeze to carry the scent. Add a layer of horticultural grit or perlite to reflect light and prevent rot in summer downpours.

This is a sophisticated, silver-and-mauve partnership that honestly requires about as much maintenance as a plastic plant. For visual dynamics, pair a tall, upright lavender like 'Phenomenal' or 'Munstead' with a trailing or mounding pelargonium for a full and scent-soaked union. You can buy ‘Munstead’ Lavender Plants from Burpee for a drought-tolerant summer bloomer. For a gently trailing pelargonium, try ‘Attar of Roses’ or ‘Grey Lady Plymouth’ Pelargonium Plants from Walmart. This sweet velvety scent pairs beautifully with the clean notes of lavender and evokes the sensory hit of a high end box of fondant chocolates. It will stay stunning and shapely from May until the first frost with zero drama.

2. Chocolate Orange Tower

Just looking at the words “chocolate orange” makes me feel happy, but this sensuous pairing is more than just a pretty name. The pairing of zingy heliopsis (oxeye sunflower) and rich coleus is the garden equivalent of a decadent dessert: rich, bold, and utterly satisfying. By marrying the sunny, upright backbone of heliopsis with the dense, lower velvety contours of a sumptuously toned coleus, you’re creating a visual feast. Heliopsis appreciates May’s rising temperatures to help launch its sturdy, daisy-like stems, and coleus needs that late-spring warmth to unfurl its neon-edged, chocolatey leaves. Together, this high-contrast, architectural dynamic creates height and depth in a way that looks polished yet also natural.

To keep this rich, lush display in plant-and-forget mode, choose a substantial pot that is at least 15 inches (38cm) across. Sprinkle in a little granular slow-release fertilizer at potting time, such as Osmocote Plus Smart-Release Plant Food from Lowe’s. A single application in May will fuel the heliopsis’s marathon blooming season, and ensures the coleus stays perky. While they are both sun-lovers, a bit of afternoon shade will help prevent bleaching with those vivid coleus colors. And you can give the oxeye shape a quick snip of the central stem midsummer to encourage a bushier flowering display. Other than that, this is one of the easiest, longest-lasting plant combination ideas for container gardens.

The beauty of this chocolate orange plant partnership is how they balance each other's needs. Heliopsis is a drought-tolerant stalwart that remains a perennial favorite in zones 3-9, meaning it can survive the winter in most pots if given a bit of insulation. Meanwhile, the coleus acts as a living mulch, shading the roots of its container companion to keep them cool while it drinks up the sun. For the best visual punch, look for variegated Heliopsis ‘Sunstruck’, or copper-hued ‘Bleeding Hearts’ Heliopsis Plants from Walmart with its orangey gold flowers. Choose a dramatic coleus variety like ‘Chocolate Covered Cherry’ or ‘Chocolate Mint’ Coleus from Burpee, for stunning velvety choccie contrasts and neon edgings to partner your burnished orange heliopsis, creating a low effort, high impact pot.

3. Pimms and Pepperoni

This pairing is one of my all-time favorites, and one I’ve been growing since I was old enough to enjoy a cocktail. The container partnership of borage and nasturtium is a cocktail for the senses, as well as the ultimate lazy love-in. Combining the structural, pretty starry blue of borage with the sprawling, sunset hues of nasturtium, you are creating a double act that is as tasty as it is visually pleasing – and it really is one of the simplest ways to guarantee summer color without having to lift a finger (apart from the ones wrapped around that refreshing summer tipple). They are container sunseekers but need to get their roots down before high summer, so May planting is ideal. Borage sends up fluffy, silver-green stems with clusters of bright blue flowers that taste like cucumbers and hold their shape in summer drinks. Nasturtiums is a lively spiller, cuddling the passages around your borage toes, with lilypad-like leaves and flowers that offer a peppery kick, hence my cheeky container soubriquet.

While it looks like something designed by a cottagecore enthusiast, this partnership is all about effortless harmony. Borage is a magnet for bees, which ensures your nasturtiums are well-visited, while the nasturtiums act as a trap crop, pulling aphids away from garden favorites. As annuals, these two will give you everything they have until the first frosts. To keep them looking tidy, you can snip back the borage by half in midsummer, which often triggers a fresh burst of flowers. Let a few flowers go to seed, and both these allstars will come back hale and hearty next year. Position the pot in full sun for the best flowers, but don't worry about feeding or watering too much. This dynamic duo prefers things lean and can handle drying out slightly between drinks, making them the perfect companions for an easy, vibrant summer.

While they aren’t fond of overfeeding, you can add a little splash of seaweed in June to toughen them up without overstimulating foliage at the expense of flowers. Otherwise, this dream team is unfussy about soil, and thrives in zones 2–11 as warm-season annuals. They are incredibly fast-growing, often going from a small start to a lush, tumbling display in less than a month. Try vivid ‘Empress of India’ nasturtium for its dark foliage and scarlet blooms, or peachy ‘Vesuvias’ Nasturtium Seeds from Eden Brothers. Plant with 'Blue Stars' borage for inspirational summertime hues. You can buy Seed Needs ‘Blue Star’ Borage Seeds from Amazon. Truly, this is one of the ultimate lazy container combos for edible pleasures.

4. Precious Metals Texture Pot

Don’t let anyone ever tell you foliage has to be an afterthought when planting the perfect container combo. Foliage plants deserve their turn in the spotlight just as much as the heavy bloomers. I love to have at least a few foliage-centric pots on the go as spring gets underway, and this pairing of heuchera and dichondra is one of the most dynamic if you’re looking for easy wins that just do their thing. It’s all about the interplay of metallic sheen and velvet depth. Combining the ruffled, jewel-toned leaves of heuchera (coral bells) with the shimmering silver cascade of ‘Silver Falls’ dichondra, you’re creating a pot of rare-looking gems that are robust, easy-growing, low-maintenance and stuffed full of textural beauty. May is the ideal launchpad for this duo, as heuchera is hitting its stride with fresh spring growth, while dichondra (a heat-loving trailer) needs these warming nights to begin its dramatic, six-foot (1.5) descent over the rim of your pot. While heuchera provides a ruffled anchorpoint, ‘Silver Falls’ acts as living jewelry, draping a container in positive metallic intensity.

To keep this precious metals pot looking mint, position it in partial shade. While the heuchera is quite drought-tolerant, dichondra appreciates a regular drink to keep its silvery waterfall lush. A single application of a balanced liquid fertilizer in May is all the feeding they’ll ever need. Since this pot is all about the leaves, you could also use a highly diluted liquid seaweed or kelp feed. Try Neptune’s Harvest Seaweed Liquid Fertilizer from Amazon as a diluted spray, applied directly on the foliage once a month. If the dichondra gets a bit too long, a quick snip encourages it to grow back thicker. For winter care, the dichondra is a tender annual in the north, but the heuchera is a hardy perennial champion in zones 4-9. Simply tuck the pot into a sheltered spot near the house, and it will sparkle again next May. Otherwise, there’s no deadheading required, and it will look as lush and sheeny in July as it does in May.

Yes, heucheras do produce delicate, airy wands of tiny flowers in early summer that hummingbirds adore. But the real show here is the exquisite foliage, which remains vibrant until the first heavy snow. For dramatic, sophisticated pots you can leave to it, lean into the metallic theme. Try ‘Caramel’ heuchera for a burnished copper glow, or ‘Berry Smoothie’ for metallic magenta notes that pop against your silver dichondra. You can buy Clovers Garden Dichondra ‘Silver Falls’ Plants from Amazon, and ‘Berry Smoothie’ Heuchera from Nature Hills for a highly memorable precious metal pairing. You can also try hybrid ‘Copper King’ Heucherella Plants from Burpee for a mixed color fusion of metallic tones to complement your silver cascading dichondra gems.

5. Neon Prairie Mini Meadow

For happy days combining stunning color and evolving texture with minimal input, this duo has natural wow factor. Fusing pure Americana and prairie pot simplicity with outrageous color and easy movement, the container combination of electric echinacea (coneflower) and fluffy purple fountain grass deserves a spot where it can be admired and envied (while you chuckle quietly about how hassle-free it is). Pairing tall, architectural shapeshifting with disco vibrancy, it creates lively color with every sunny day and playful breeze. My potted perennial echinaceas are waking in May, while purple fountain grass uses this month’s sunlight to ignite its lovely rich pigment. The combination of chunky neon flowerheads and fuzzy plumes feels wild, yet it’s perfectly composed, with a designer catalog vibe that’s perfect for easy living.

Their shared resilience makes this partnership really pop. Both plants are the ultimate drought-warriors, built to weather heat-soaked summers. The fountain grass provides near-indestructible movement, while the coneflower provides the nectar-rich landing pads for butterflies and bees. It's a winner in zones 4-9, though the grass is treated as an annual north of zone 9. They are fast growers, so by July, you’ll have a 3-foot (90cm) explosion of texture that needs zero staking. To maximize your neon meadow, pair a dwarf coneflower variety like ‘Guatemala Gold’ or ‘PowWow Wild Berry’ Echinacea from Nature Hills with classic ‘Rubrum’ purple fountain grass for a tiered finish. You can buy Purple Fountain Grass from Fast Growing Trees for thrillingly self-sufficient, fuzzy fountain shocks.

To keep this dynamic duo rocking through September, place it in the brightest spot you own. These container partners want to languish in the sun forever. While they thrive on neglect, you can add a tiny sprinkle of Epsom salts around the base of your coneflowers when you pot them up. The magnesium boost helps them produce those neon pigments and strengthens the stems for a summer of heavy blooming. As the season winds down, don’t reach for the snips. The dried cones and tawny plumes provide gorgeous winter interest and a vital seed buffet for local goldfinches. To keep your grass for next year, simply trim it to 3 inches (8cm) in October and bring the pot into a cool, sunny garage. And that’s literally all it takes to sustain this gorgeous, high-definition spectacle of fluffy plum arches and neon prairie bloomers.

Shop Container Dream Teams

Grab your container all-star for your dream team planting. These standout curated selections represent the best of the best for May plant-and-forget containers that will keep flowering and coloring up well into high summer and as late as September. Each has been chosen for its resilience, its ability to thrive, and that unmistakable wow factor. Whether you're looking for fragrance, foliage, or a neon explosion of color, this shopping list of superstars guarantees high impact pot partnerships.

Need more ideas for timely gardening jobs and seasonal expert advice delivered straight to your inbox? Sign up for the free Gardening Know How Newsletter!

When we talk about controlling weeds, it’s usually either mulching measures ahead of planting, or eradication measures after planting. More often than not, it’s with a sense of resignation about the cycle of pull, dig, lift, repeat that comes into play as we head into the growing season. But what if I were to say to you that some of the best weed controls can happen at the time of planting? Plants for controlling weeds are not only possible, they are a necessity for us time-strapped yardheads. And now is the time to get cracking so they hit their stride ahead of weed season.

Now the soil’s warming up and the sun is lingering a little longer into the late afternoons and early evenings, most of us anticipate the coming months with giddy excitement, but also a tiny bit of weed control anxiety. We picture weekend afternoons hunched over stubborn crabgrass and dandelion rosettes, and I know that’s nobody’s idea of a good time (unless you need the satisfaction that comes from ripping out unwanted growth). But the smartest way to weed doesn't involve a hoe, a chemical spray, or back-breaking sessions on your knees. The secret lies in introducing key plants that create a living mulch in beds and edgings.

By taking advantage of this narrow window to plant strategic, weed-suppressing superstars, you’ll save loads of manual labor later. And the best bit? They look lovely, too. These 8 plants for weed prevention aren't just utility players, but a curated collection of beauties that form a lush, impenetrable carpet. They move faster than the weeds, hugging the ground and hogging the sunlight, so rogue seeds never get a chance to germinate. This helps you to reclaim your time, while adding dynamic color and texture. From honey-scented mats to architectural foliage, these selections are about working smarter, not harder. Here are the key players you need on the field now to save you time over the weeding bucket later!

Plants that Stop Weeds Taking Over

Weeds just get everywhere, don’t they? I sometimes feel like they might follow me indoors if I’m not careful. But whether you’re dealing with a sun-scorched patch of dirt or a moody, shaded corner under an old oak, there is a natural weed control in this list ready to go to work for you. Giving you options in full shade, full sun, and partial sunlight, these plants are chosen for their grit, their speed, and their sheer refusal to let invaders into their territory. This early spring preparation is where you take back those irksome weeding hours, and really earn your future relaxation – but think smart. While these plants are hardy, they need a solid start to become the weed-smothering blankets we want them to be.

Consider your planting space, natural light (or lack thereof), and the needs of your yard’s microclimate and USDA hardiness zone. Most of these weed-control plants thrive in USDA zones 4-9. Give some thought to soil too. At this time of year, depending on where you are, spring rains can help roots establish before the summer heat arrives. But before planting, make time for a quick check of soil drainage and moisture levels. A soil meter like the XLUX Long Probe Soil Meter from Amazon can confirm that weed-busters won’t be sitting in a swamp or bone-dry dust. Depending on drainage, add a little coarse sand or aged compost before planting.

In the first few weeks, you’ll want to keep these plants well watered and perhaps a sprinkling of a slow-release organic feed. Also, in those first few months while they are still stretching out, a thin 2-inch (5cm) layer of Back to the Roots Organic Premium Mulch, also from Amazon, can provide that extra layer of defense. Generally, you’ll want to space your plant starts about 8–12 inches (20-30cm) apart to allow them plenty of room to knit together in a naturalistic and attractive way. By the time the summer heat arrives, they’ll have closed ranks, creating a beautiful, flowering barrier that makes traditional weeding a thing of the past.

Finally, think about invasiveness, as some of these yard weed control plants are fast-growers. The trick is strategic containment. If you plant something vigorous, keep it within a bordered bed or use it as a spiller where progress is limited. By choosing modern, well-behaved cultivars, you get the speed of growth you need to outpace weeds, without a hostile takeover of your neighbor's lawn. So, let’s meet the weed controls that save you time and hassle, and look lovely doing it.

1. Creeping Thyme

I’m deeply biased on this one, but what’s not to love about a herb with pretty flowers that keeps weeds at bay? Asking for nothing except sunshine, this fragrant mat of sensory pleasures is so accommodating, you can walk on it. Indeed, creeping thyme (Thymus serpyllum) is a stepable ground cover plant, which means it can handle light foot traffic. Unlike many sprawling plants that look messy, this thyme stays low (under 3 inches/8cm) forming a tight tapestry of tiny leaves. During late spring and summer, it erupts in a carpet of tiny, nectar-rich purple, pink, or white blooms. It’s the ultimate "plant and forget" perennial for sunny, dry spots where weeds usually have a field day.

The secret to its weed-blocking success is its growth habit. It spreads via squatting stems that knit together so tightly, weed seeds simply can’t find a patch of bare earth to call home. Ideally suited for USDA zones 4-9, creeping thyme thrives in full sun and poor soil. In fact, if you’re too kind with rich fertilizers, this perennial can get leggy. Just make sure soil is well-draining Late April/early May is the perfect time to get starts in the ground, as moderate temperatures allow the root system to anchor ahead of summer. It’s a moderate-to-fast grower, and once established, it is drought-tolerant, requiring almost no supplemental watering.

Plant about 8-12 inches (20-30cm) apart to allow for a quick fill-in. Creeping thyme makes a stunning companion for taller, drought-hardy perennials like lavender or sedum, acting as a soft skirt around their base. This creates a multi-layered defense with plants of different heights working together to leave zero room for weeds. Look for varieties like ‘Red Creeping’ for a crimson flush, or ‘Magic Carpet’ for a vibrant pink. If you have a stone path or a rockery, ‘Elfin’ is a dense choice that looks like moss but smells like a Mediterranean summer. To keep this pretty weed control looking its best, give it a light trim after the flowers fade for fresh, tight growth for the fall. You can buy Fruivity Heirloom Creeping Thyme Seeds from Amazon.

2. Hardy Geranium

If I could only plant one perennial to knit a garden together, it would be the hardy geranium (Geranium rozanne/sanguineum). This industrious weed-suppressant thrives on neglect, quickly fills gaps, flowers for months, and looks pretty anywhere it lands. The way hardy geranium (aka cranesbill) knits gaps around taller perennials looks so organic, weaving violets and hot pinks in cascading medleys that come back fuller and even more billowy the following year. They act as a soft, billowing transition between taller shrubs and path edges, cloaking the ground in unifying foliage as well as pretty pops of color. Their foliage is often deeply lobed, and when they flower (almost non-stop from late spring through frost) the sheer volume of blooms makes it impossible for weeds to find a sunlit patch of dirt.

Cranesbills aren't invasive, but they are persistent. They prefer moist, well-drained soil but are surprisingly forgiving once they’ve settled in, and they can thrive both in sunny spots and partial shade. They make the perfect bridge where a yard transitions from a sunny lawn to a shadier tree line. I have different cranesbill varieties growing both in the front and backyard, where sunlight exposure is dramatically different, and they flourish both in dappled afternoon shade and dry, sandy sunspots. April is the ideal time to get them in the ground, because the cool air encourages lush leaf growth. This leafiness is exactly what we want: a dense canopy that acts like a natural umbrella, shading out the competition.

For high-impact and low-effort, try planting them as border knitters with pompom alliums and chartreuse hued lady’s mantles (the ultimate cottage garden combo). Cranesbills grow to 12-18 inches (30-45cm) tall and spread just as wide, forming a tidy mound that requires zero staking. If they start to look floppy after their first heavy flush of flowers in mid-summer, a quick shear will reward you with fresh leaves and flowers in weeks. For “plant and forget" perfection, try long-blooming ‘Rozanne’ and native G. maculatum for woodland-style shade. You can buy shocking pink ‘Max Frei’ Hardy Geraniums from Nature Hills for a carpet of color in zones 4-8.

3. Euphorbia

Euphorbia, also known as spurge (Euphorbia amygdaloides), brings a unique texture to a border and can look a little otherworldly, but its weed control credentials are beyond question. With its glossy, often evergreen leaves, topped with frothy, acid-yellow or lime-green bracts, it glows in the spring sunshine while other plants are still waking up. Indeed, those bracts are so vibrant, they seem to glow from within. Suited to sun or shade, this plant is an impressive choice for tricky spots where you need a little bit of height (12-24 inches) along with weed-smothering density at the base. Plus, as a little bonus for rural gardeners, this magnificent perennial is deer resistant and rabbit resistant, thanks to its milky sap.

Getting euphorbia in the ground in the first weeks of early spring is a smart move, because it allows the plant to take advantage of the spring moisture. Its adaptable nature means it’s just as happy in a sunny rockery as it is in dry shade. Wherever it settles, it creates a dense, multi-stemmed clump that gets wider each year, locking out weeds with its tough, leathery foliage. Just take care when planting or handling to always wear a pair of protective or gauntlet style gloves, like the Sunny Days Garden Gloves from Uncommon Goods, because that milky sap can be an irritant to the skin. Once it's in, you can leave it to its own devices, as it’s drought-tolerant and rarely needs feeding.

If you’re looking for a little drama with your weed-control strategy, try a dark-foliage euphorbia variety to make the lime flowers pop. This neon zinger pairs beautifully with silver-leaved plants like lamb’s ear (below) or purple-flowered catmint and purple sage. For an easy-to-source winner, try Euphorbia ‘Ascot Rainbow’ from Nature Hills, with its cheerful variegated leaves that look good all year round. If you have a particularly gloomy spot, meanwhile, a bright spark like ‘Robbiae’ will luminate dry shade. Just give it a quick tidy-up after the flowers fade to keep it looking sharp, and it will guard your borders faithfully for years.

4. Creeping Phlox

With its evocative, rolling mass of flowering lushness, creeping phlox (Phlox subulata) is a must-have for effective weed control. Its intricate interlocking of flowers spills hither and yon with visual electricity, but there is a method underpinning the hijinx. This perennial grows in a dense, moss-like carpet, hence why it’s so effective as a weed-control champ. One day, you have a rocky, weed-prone garden slope, and the next, it’s a solid sheet of neon pink, lavender-blue, or snowy white flowers. By the time the dandelions are thinking about popping up, your phlox will have already claimed every inch of territory, weaving a carpet so thick that sunlight can't reach the soil. Even when the spring fireworks fade in June, you’re left with a neat, evergreen moss that stays green and handsome through the winter.

Whenever a friend talks about a difficult sunny spot in the yard, I namedrop a little cheeky phlox. This fast-growing easy perennial loves to tumble over the edges of stone walls or sunny banks. But while playful in its spread, it’s a tough cookie that thrives in frost and poor soil, ideally suited for zones 3-9. If you’re looking for a hard-working plant you can set and forget, get it in the ground now while the spring soil is still moist. It needs full sun to bloom at its best, but it isn’t fussy about soil as long as it isn't a swamp. After establishing quickly, creeping phlox is reassuringly drought-tolerant. It’s a lively counterpoint for spring bulbs like tulips, as they poke through for their moment of glory, while generously concealing dying foliage once bulbs fade. It also works well with candytuft (iberis), as they bloom together and share the same habit, creating a visually stunning patchwork.

To ensure your living carpet stays lush for years, you just need to give it a little trim after the flowers fade (the top inch or so is fine). This encourages the plant to stay tight and prevents it getting leggy in the center where weeds might try to sneak in. Vibrant showstoppers include dreamy lavender ‘Emerald Blue’ and lively ‘Drummond Pink’ Creeping Phlox, available from Nature Hills, for a dense and intense hot pink clumping queen to keep those weeds at bay. Or for a real crowd-pleaser that can be seen from the next block, try award-winning ‘Red Wings’ with its vivid crimson blooms. Just remember to space your phlox about 15-18 inches (38-46cm) apart, and they’ll be shaking hands and closing those weed gaps before you know it.

5. Ajuga (Bugleweed)

Most of these weed-defying superchamps are happiest with some sun, but if you’re after support in the shadiest parts of your yard, worry not. Bugleweed (Ajuga reptans) is the ultimate low-profile spreader for dark, damp spots where only weeds ever seem to find traction. They don’t call it carpetweed for nothing! Fed up of that crabgrass conference in the far corner? Tuck in a few ajuga plugs now, while the spring weather is on your side. Within a single season, it will have knitted into a glossy chocolate-and-purple Persian rug of living weed suppressant. This perennial spreads via runners, in much the same way as strawberries, so it marches across the soil, sealing off every square inch from invaders. As a bonus, in late spring, this shade-dweller sends up gorgeous 6-inch (15cm) spikes of cobalt blue flowers that bees adore.

Oh, and when I say this perennial superstar thrives in shade, I’m talking about continued resilience in full shade. While many weed-suppressors need at least a little dappled light, this shade-loving plant thrives in corners where light forgets to fall. It is hardy in zones 3-9 and exceptional as erosion control on shady slopes. Early spring is the golden time for planting, while the soil is moist enough to help runners take root quickly and efficiently. Yes, this is a fast grower (some might say aggressive), but in a weed war, that’s exactly the ally you want. Just plant it where you don’t mind it spreading, or keep it contained with simple garden edging.

Because bugleweed stays so low to the ground, usually just 2-3 inches (5-8cm) high for the foliage, it is the perfect companion for taller, shade-lovers like hostas or bleeding hearts. It fills in around their ankles, ensuring there’s no bare dirt for weeds to colonize. Ajuga also works well with Japanese forest grass, as the flowing texture of the grass creates a gorgeous contrast with its deeper purple foliage. To keep it at its best, just give the soil a quick moisture check in the first few weeks, to ensure your new starts are settling in happily. For high-drama in your dreariest yard spot, go for ‘Black Scallop’ with its crinkled leaves, or ‘Burgundy Glow’ for pink and green foliage to brighten the deepest shade. Alternatively, try lush ‘Chocolate Chip’ Ajuga from Fast Growing Trees for a shock of ultraviolet blooms in the gloom.

6. Bergenia

Don’t be fooled by those dainty, bell-style blooms (lovely as they are): bergenia (Bergenia cordifolia) is a tough-as-old-boots border defender with massive, leathery leaves that hold no truck with uninvited guests. Elephant ears, as it is also known, may look like it belongs in a high-end botanical garden, but its moniker is no idle boast – those huge, waxy leaves are so large and thick, they act like a heavy-duty tarp across the soil. And once established, they really do cover a mass of ground. I love how the foliage turns a gorgeous burnished bronze or burgundy in winter, only for the plant to erupt in clusters of rosy pink bells on thick red stalks as spring comes whispering in. This perennial doesn't just fill a gap, it claims it – with an architectural impact that weeds simply can’t squeeze around.

Bergenia is a swing plant, which means it can settle in sun, shade, or somewhere in between. It copes just as well as a plant-and-forget shade plant along a north-facing wall as it does a sun-soaker in a bright mixed border. It’s a slow-to-moderate spreader, but once those rosettes overlap, you’ve created a weed-proof seal. Early spring is the perfect time to get these dainty-looking beasties in the ground, so they can enjoy the spring soak before the summer heat. They are hardy in zones 3-8, and won't complain if your soil is a bit heavy or clay-based. To give these heavy feeders the best start, I’d just suggest mixing a bit of organic matter into the planting hole, or a sprinkling of worm castings, like Wiggle Worm Pure Organic Earthworm Castings from Walmart to boost leaf size.

For an effective weed-covering strategy you can plant and forget, try bergenia as a bold edging plant alongside daintier textures like ferns, ethereal bleeding hearts, or similarly boisterous hardy geraniums. For a classic look, grow ‘Bressingham Ruby’ for its deep pink blooms and intense winter color. For something even more substantial, ‘Solar Flare’ offers stunning variegated leaves, or you can buy Early Brilliance ‘Magenta’ Bergenia from Nature Hills for vivid magenta flowers and glossy deep green foliage. Once the older leaves start to look a bit tattered after winter, just snap them off at the base to let the new spring growth shine.

7. Lady’s Mantle

If you are a fan of that dreamy, elegant English cottage look, then lady’s mantle (Alchemilla mollis) is an absolute essential. I have a real soft spot for this plant because of the way its pleated, scalloped leaves catch the morning dew; the water beads up in tiny sparkles on the surface. But don't let its delicate appearance fool you, for this is a truly hardworking weed-suppressor. It forms a dense, mounded canopy that grows 12-18 inches (30-45cm) tall and wide. By early summer, it is covered in a frothy cloud of tiny, chartreuse-yellow flowers. It’s the ultimate garden blender, softening the edges of paths and hiding the bare legs of taller plants.

I always tell people that chartreuse is a powerful ally when planning borders, livening up a dull corner, but also bringing out the best in nearby tones, whether your tastes run to classic white or silver, playful pinks, or ocean-color blues. If in doubt, you can max your space very easily with the neon shimmers of lady’s mantle (and our other weed-smotherer, euphorbia), while keeping weeds at bay. Plant alongside the vibrant violets or hot pinks of hardy geraniums or fluffy violet catmint, and the colors will pop with fizzy fluorescents. Lady’s mantle is another great swing perennial, as it thrives in full sun or partial shade, and is hardy in zones 3-8. It’s a very easygoing perennial that isn't picky about soil. Now is the perfect time to tuck it into your borders because it loves the cool, moist spring air. Once established, it’s very self-sufficient, though it does appreciate a bit of afternoon shade in very hot southern climates.

As sweet as those scalloped leaves appear, they are emphatic in preventing sunlight from reaching serious weed intruders. Lady’s mantle will self-seed gently, though, filling in any tiny cracks or gaps where weeds otherwise take hold. If you want to keep it spreading too far, just snip off the flower heads once they start to turn tan. Compare this two-minute job with the hours you’ll save hunched over the dandelions. For a reliable variety, try Alchemilla mollis ‘Select’ for its robust size and flower power. You can also buy ‘Thriller’ Lady’s Mantle Plants from Nature Hills for frothy lime clouds. This timeless perennial brings a sense of dreamy peace to any yard, while calmly squaring off against any unwelcome invaders.

8. Lamb’s Ear

For a perennial weed-buster that provides a literal hug for borders, fuzzy lamb’s ear (Stachys byzantina) is something very lovely indeed. I’m not ashamed to say it’s one of the plants I touch the most on my morning trundles around the yard, and I adore its highly tactile, silver-gray foliage. But beneath that soft, cozy exterior lies a formidable weed-fighter. This perennial forms a dense, low-growing mat of foliage that spreads steadily to create a felt-like velvet rug. Because the leaves are so densely covered in silver hairs, they reflect the sun and act as a thermal blanket for the soil, keeping it cool and dark: a death sentence for weed seeds.

In my garden, I use these sun-loving beauties as silencers for any louder tones in the vicinity. If you’re growing multiple weed-busting perennials, rest assured this one plays well. Its soft, metallic sheen is the perfect neutral backdrop for the electric pinks of a creeping phlox or the architectural mass of euphorbia. It is a true sun-lover, thriving in USDA zones 4-9. Its silver coat isn't just for show. It’s a drought-tolerant superpower, making it one of the most water-wise plants on our list. April or early May is the ideal time to plant these fuzzy friends, as it gives them chance to settle their roots before high summer. This fast-grower fills gaps easily, with a satisfying density few plants can rival. Its fuzzy rugs look lovely against the upright purples of Russian sage and violet salvia varieties. To keep those silvers looking bright, just avoid overhead watering.

To set and forget with confidence, try non-flowering cultivars. While traditional purple flower spikes do attract bees, they can sometimes make the plant floppy after a rainstorm. If you want a pristine, weed-proof carpet all summer long, look for ‘Silver Carpet’ which stays low and compact. Buy ‘Silver Carpet’ Plants from Walmart for a pretty silver tarp against sun-loving weeds. For a jumbo fuzzy leaf, ‘Helene von Stein’ (aka Big Ears) is also fab. While density is a key strength when fighting off weeds, the leaves of ‘Big Ears’ are powerful in a different way, creating a heavy, light-blocking mass to crush high-reaching weeds trying to push through. Just make sure yours aren’t planted too tightly against a wall, as they need breathing room. Otherwise, the sensory delights of lamb’s ear turn weed control into a genuine joy.

Weed-Busting Superstars

Lay the groundwork now with the right ground cover perennials and you can save yourself hours of weeding time – with gorgeous flowering plants and textural beauties that quickly fill gaps, knit together border plants, and keep out the plants you don’t want! These curated ground controls are excellent weed-suppressing plants and easily help you create lush schemes with easy color, all while knowing that your living mulch is doing the heavy lifting for you. Plant these perennials for a high-impact, low-maintenance yard and a summer of weed-free delights.

Need more ideas for timely gardening jobs and seasonal expert advice delivered straight to your inbox? Sign up for the free Gardening Know How Newsletter!

Few things trigger plant parent anxiety quite like watching the lush, vibrant green of a prize hydrangea or azalea begin to drain away. It usually starts subtly, with a slight paling of the newest leaves, but it can quickly turn grim, with veins remaining dark green while the rest of the leaf turns a ghostly yellow. This is interveinal chlorosis, and it’s essentially your plant’s way of hollering for help. It’s a common sight in gardens, especially where soil leans toward alkaline, and the frustration is real.

If you see azalea or hydrangea leaves turning yellow like this, it points to an iron shortage. Iron is what the plant uses to build chlorophyll, and when it’s running low, photosynthesis starts breaking down in ways that show up fast. Iron deficiency means the plant cannot feed itself through photosynthesis. It’s a high-stakes hunger strike, and it’s why many gardeners who are growing hydrangeas and azaleas reach for something they may have heard from a neighbor or a viral TikTok: the rusty nail.

The rusty nail remedy is a piece of garden folklore that has persisted for generations. The logic feels sound: rust is iron, plants need iron, so why not put them together? So panicked gardeners drop a few old nails in a watering can and wait for their plants to perk up again. However, while the intention is pure, the reality is more complicated. To truly save your yellow hydrangea and azalea displays, there is a better way to restore your plants to health and get them back on track for a summer of joyous blooms. So if your hydrangeas look pale and ghostly, here’s how to restore their vibrant green foliage and prime them for the fullest, biggest blooms.

One Thing The Rusty Nail Gets Right

Before I get into what you should be using to sort out azalea and hydrangea yellow leaves, let’s give some credit to this folksy rusty nail legend – it isn't built on nothing. Iron really is what these plants are missing, and the intuition to reach for a source of iron to counter an iron deficiency is directionally correct, hence why gardeners of yore may have turned to the nails. In a world before specialized bottled nutrients, a handful of rusty nails probably felt like a logical supplement to bury near the roots or drop in the watering can.

The problem isn't so much in the diagnosis, but in the delivery. Rust is the wrong form, released too slowly, in a way that soil pH will largely neutralize before roots ever see it. The iron is there, but the plant’s root system isn't designed to process it in that raw, solid form. The rusty water myth is a reasonable guess made without the benefit of modern soil science, but for a plant in distress, it’s a distraction from what works. Acid-loving plants are demanding about the form their nutrients come in. Give them iron they can actually use, and they’ll usually show it fairly quickly.

If you've already put nails in your soil, don't panic! They won't hurt the plant, but they won't help it this season, either. But before rushing into fixing underlying issues, make sure you have a good handle on existing soil conditions. If you haven’t already got a soil pH tester, this is a great time to kit up. You can use a precision tool like the Sonkir 3-in-1 Soil pH Tester, available from Amazon, to see exactly what you're up against before adding anything else. This tool tells you if your soil is too alkaline, and hence why those leaves are turning yellow.

Why Iron Matters to These Plants

Understanding what these plants actually need, and why rust doesn’t reliably deliver it, starts with the basics of soil nutrients and how roots take them up. Hydrangeas and azaleas are acid-loving plants that are happiest when the soil pH sits between 4.5-6. This isn't just about flower color, but basic survival. Soil pH acts as a gatekeeper for nutrients, and has a direct say in which nutrients the roots can pull in, and iron is one of the most sensitive to it. In acidic soil, iron remains in a liquid-friendly state, readily available, and moving easily into the roots.

However, once the pH drifts above 7 (and leans alkaline), a chemical reaction occurs. The iron in the soil turns into a solid form that roots cannot grab and cannot access, despite the ground having plenty of it. That’s the reason chlorosis tends to show up in specific situations: alkaline soils, beds that have had lime added, spots near concrete foundations where lime bleeds into the surrounding ground over time. The iron is physically present, it’s just in a form the roots can’t do anything about.

If you’re worried hydrangea leaves are turning yellow, you may be wondering if certain hydrangea varieties are more susceptible. Well, bigleaf hydrangeas (H. macrophylla) are sensitive to iron lockout. Their sensitivity makes sense, since they can change color based on pH (blue in acid, pink in alkaline). If a bigleaf is turning yellow, it’s a problem, because their large, lush leaves require massive amounts of chlorophyll to stay healthy.

Panicles (H. paniculata) are forgiving of slightly alkaline soil. If you see yellowing on these, it usually means your soil pH is extremely high (above 7.5) or the plant is suffering from overwatering, which mimics iron deficiency by rotting the fine root hairs that absorb nutrients. Smooth varieties (H. arborescens) are naturally adapted to a wider range of soil types. They rarely show chlorosis, unless they are planted too close to a new concrete driveway or foundation where lime is leaching heavily.

So What’s the Problem with Rust?

Well, here’s the thing. Iron oxide (the reddish-brown rust on that rusty nail) is almost completely insoluble in water. If you drop a handful of nails into a watering can, you might get orange water, as a small amount of iron is released. But the quantity is minimal and the form it takes isn’t one the plant roots can absorb. You aren't creating a nutrient-rich tonic. You’re moving tiny, unusable particles of metal around.

Even if those particles make it to the soil, they face the same ph-driven lockout problem as the iron in the ground. If your soil pH is high enough (alkaline enough) to cause yellowing in the first place, it will lock up that rust, too. So a trickle of iron oxide from old nails won't change anything. There’s also a timing problem. Rust releases far too slowly to help a plant that is failing. A hydrangea doesn't have months to wait for a nail to decompose. It needs a bypass to that chemical lock, and it needs it now!

What You Should Use Instead

So what should you use instead of a rusty nail? What you need is chelated iron. This is iron that has been wrapped in an organic molecule (a chelate) that acts like a protective suit. This coating prevents the iron from bonding with the soil and turning into an unusable solid. It essentially smuggles the iron directly to the plant roots in a form they can absorb instantly, even if the soil pH is far from perfect. You can get it as granules, liquid concentrate, or foliar spray.

For the fastest results, look for a foliar spray. Foliar application bypasses root uptake entirely, getting iron directly into the leaves. A chelated liquid iron supplement like Southern AG’s Chelated Liquid Iron from Amazon is the most direct fix for active chlorosis. Just remember if using as a foliar spray that you need to dilute the contents, following the instructions on the packaging. Apply chelated iron as a foliar spray by misting the leaves directly. The plant absorbs the iron through its pores (stomata), and you can often see the leaves begin to green up within 48-72 hours.

While a foliar spray is your emergency button option, you can also apply this fix as a standard soil drench or granular application for more of a steady recovery. This usually takes 1-4 weeks, depending on hydrangea type. If you’re in a warmer USDA zone where the plant is growing rapidly, you’ll likely see that green color return much faster than you would in a cooler, northern climate. Also, bigleaf hydrangeas, which have large leaves and high water needs, often show the green-up faster than the woodier, slower-growing oakleaf or panicle hydrangea varieties.

Shop Iron Essentials

Giving your yellowing hydrangeas (and azaleas) a helping hand doesn't require a chemistry degree. With these targeted iron and soil-correcting essentials, you can bypass the rusty nail hassles and give your plants the exact nutrients they crave. Act now to get your favorite shrubs back on track for a bumper blooming season:

Fix the Soil, Not Just the Symptom

Chelated iron handles what’s happening right now, but it won’t stop chlorosis from coming back if the soil pH is still off. Sulfur is the go-to amendment for bringing pH down. It’s slow and takes a few months to fully work through the soil, but the results stick. Acidifying fertilizers made for acid-loving plants can cover feeding and pH maintenance at once. Adding elemental sulfur, like Monterey Dr Iron Elemental Sulfur from Walmart, or acidifying mulches like pine needles or composted oak leaves, can help bring the pH down.

Hydrangeas in pots are more prone to ongoing issues. Frequent watering washes out nutrients, and hard tap water (often alkaline) can slowly turn an acidic potting mix into a high-pH environment. Use a liquid chelated iron for containers, as it distributes more evenly. Remember, gardening is a marathon, not a sprint. Use the chelated iron to save your azalea and hydrangea leaves today, and select soil amendments to ensure a vibrant, green tomorrow. And don’t forget to test the soil before making significant amendments. A basic soil test is cheap and takes the guesswork out of it. So use your soil kit or soil meter at regular intervals.

Seeing your hydrangeas struggle can be disheartening, but don't let the myths lead you astray. Skip the hardware store, and grab some chelated iron for a safe, science-backed fix. By understanding the chemistry of your soil and providing nutrients in a form your plants can absorb, you’ll be rewarded with verdant leaves and breathtaking blooms in good time, so take action, and take heart. Your hydrangeas can bounce back – they just need the right iron supplement to get ready for the season ahead.

Need more ideas for timely gardening jobs and seasonal expert advice delivered straight to your inbox? Sign up for the free Gardening Know How Newsletter!

We dahlia enthusiasts are a special kind of passionate. We don’t just want to grow flowers, we are looking to curate something unique, visually stunning, and as long lasting as possible. From the tight, geometric perfection of pompons to the wild, spiky cactus florals that bring to mind a colorful fever dream, from vibrant pinks to sultry mahoganies, dahlias are some of the treasures of our late-summer garden.

The catch is that you’ll often be at the mercy of the calendar. You’ll wait for the soil to warm, plant tubers in May, then spend all of August staring at green leaves, desperately hoping for a bloom before the first frost hits. It’s a waiting game that often ends just as the party gets started. But what if you could cheat the clock? What if you could have those head-turning blooms in July instead of September? Growing dahlias in most regions usually involves a standard cycle of digging and storing tubers each year. But by taking control of the timeline now with these pro secrets, you can effectively buy yourself a few weeks of better, stronger, bigger blooms.

These secrets for dahlia care in spring seem a little strange, maybe even subversive, but they will ensure you can move the bloom timeline forward by up to four weeks, help you get more flower heads, and lead to bigger, sturdier flowers. Read on, as I share the insider secrets that can give your tubers a wake-up call you won’t forget. Use these secrets for spring dahlia care to jumpstart dormancy and double your flower count.

3 Secrets for Dahlia Success

Many dahlia growers play a waiting game in spring. They pull out the stored tubers, put them in the ground or in the pots, cross their fingers, and wait for late summer flowers, some of which might not even bloom until September. If you’ve ever been envious of neighbors who seem to get dinner plate-sized dahlias mid-summer, just know that their results aren’t accidental. They discovered the secret to earlier, bigger, healthier flowers, and it involves taking a few extra steps this month to get your dahlias ready to go and grow.

The dahlia’s metabolic rate is tied strictly to temperature and moisture availability. By artificially manipulating these factors in April, you bypass the slow start phase that usually happens in the cold, damp ground of early May. Our three insider secrets for the perfect dahlia plant care in spring might seem a little odd or excessive, but we promise that these simple tasks are effective and worth every second of your time, even if you don’t live in USDA zones 8 and above (where dahlias are hardy).

These three dahlia secrets for April can make the difference between a nice dahlia showing and a neighborhood spectacular. Of course, the right soil temperature can help when planting. If you need clear, easy-to-understand temperature readings, the Luster Leaf Rapitest Digital Soil Thermometer, available from Amazon, takes the guesswork out of expensive tuber planting. But using these three secrets, you will be giving your dahlia tubers a headstart now so they hit their stride when they are in the garden. Here’s what you need to know for a stunning season of gorgeous blooms.

Secret 1: Giving Your Tubers a Bath

Storing dahlia tubers requires a balancing act. You need to keep tubers in a happy middle place between too much moisture (which can cause rot) and too dry (which can mean they are no longer viable). Many growers err on the side of dry because rot is permanent. But ideally, as well as keeping tubers cool (40-45°F/4.4-7.2°C), dahlia tubers need to be just barely moist.

If you wake up your tubers this year only to find they look shriveled, don’t panic. This can be fixed with a soak. Even tubers that look healthy and firm can benefit from rehydration before going back in the soil. Rehydrating isn't just about plumping the tuber. It’s also about activating the cambium layer beneath the skin. This signals to the eyes (the small bumps where growth begins) that the dormant season is over. By rehydrating before planting, you jumpstart sprouting by a few weeks.

Think of it as setting an alarm clock a little earlier, getting the tubers up and ready early for spring. To rehydrate your tubers, simply submerge them in a bucket or tub of room temperature water for 60-90 minutes. Add a weak solution of seaweed extract or a liquid kelp fertilizer to the water. Seaweed contains natural hormones (cytokinins) that further encourage the eyes to wake up. You can buy Maxicrop Liquid Seaweed with Kelp Extract from Walmart. Don’t leave tubers in water for several hours or overnight, as this can lead to rot, and only soak dry, healthy tubers.

Secret 2: Hotboxing for Early Eyes

Once your tubers are hydrated, don’t plant them outside straightaway. The ground in April is likely cold and wet, which can lead to the very tuber rot you’ve just tried to avoid. Instead, this second little trick helps you to “pre-sprout” your tubers and tricks your dahlias into thinking it’s already June. It helps break dormancy and stimulate new growth early, giving you a head start of literal weeks of seeing summer flowers.

This method is called hotboxing, and the idea is to use warmth and a little moisture to simulate the ideal growing conditions for a tuber coming out of winter dormancy, tricking the tuber into getting started early. Dahlias love warm days and cool nights. They need soil temperatures of 60-70°F (15.5-21.1C) to grow actively. By hotboxing indoors in April, you are providing that sweet spot weeks ahead of schedule.

To hotbox your tubers, use a shallow crate or tray. Place your tubers in the container and surround with a slightly damp coco coir or peat-free potting mix. The eyes of the dahlia are located on the crown, where the tuber meets the old stem. Make sure this part is slightly exposed or lightly covered, so you can monitor growth. Place on a seedling heat mat to stimulate roots. Buy Vivosun Durable Waterproof Seedling Heat Mats from Amazon to maintain that steady temperature your tubers crave.

Check your tubers every few days. The eyes should swell, change color, and eventually sprout. Once you have a sprout about an inch long, you’ve successfully woken the plant. You are now officially ahead of the game. Just take care to avoid letting the tubers get too wet. The soil or other material should be just barely damp, never soggy. Also, ensure your tubers have good airflow to avoid rot or mold.

Secret 3: Beheading Dahlias

This can feel wrong at first, but trust us when we tell you it will result in fuller growth and, ultimately, more flowers. Most gardeners know about pinching plants back. When you pinch stems, you encourage side shoots. This means fuller growth, but also more stems for more blooms. What feels so wrong is that it requires snipping back the first sprouts. Your instinct will be to let that early growth go, but pinching now means more growth and more flowers later, so go for it! It’s one of the most important ways to care for dahlias in spring, after following the other two steps.

Most dahlia tubers send up one dominant apical sprout. If left, the plant will focus all its energy on this one stem, resulting in a tall, lanky plant that needs heavy staking and produces only a few flowers at the top. By pinching this central tip, you disrupt apical dominance. When it is 6-8 inches (15-20 cm) long, snip back to just above a leaf node, removing the top 2-3 inches (5-8cm) with a clean pair of snips or shears. Team favorite Fiskars’ Micro-Tip Pruning Snips, available from Amazon, can help you make clean, precise cuts without damaging the rest of the stem.

Removing the central growing tip redirects energy into side shoots. The plant releases a burst of auxins (growth hormones) to the lower leaf nodes, forcing the plant to create 4-6 lateral branches instead of one. Always sanitize your shears with rubbing alcohol between plants. You can buy Swan Rubbing Alcohol from Walmart to dip your snips in to ensure a healthy, virus-free process. The result? A bushy, self-supporting shrub that produces 3-4 times as many flowers!

Go the Extra Mile in Spring

Since you’ve taken the time to wake up and prepare your tubers early, it’s worth putting some effort into getting the soil ready. The ideal soil for dahlias is a rich, sandy loam with a pH of 6.5-7. Use a soil meter like the Yamron 5-in-1 Soil Meter from Amazon to save yourself some work later, and make small soil pH adjustments as you see fit, using sulfur or lime to raise or lower pH accordingly.

The ideal soil for dahlias is rich and fertile. It drains well and stays moist but doesn’t get soggy. Before planting, do a quick squeeze test on your garden soil. Pick up a handful and squeeze. If it stays in a tight, muddy ball, it’s too wet. If it crumbles, you’re golden. To improve drainage, incorporate well-rotted compost. Avoid high-nitrogen fertilizers early in the season, as this can lead to weak, watery stems and fewer flowers. Instead, look for a bloom booster or a balanced organic compost. Don’t rule out raised beds or containers if you have ongoing problem soils.

Since you are planting tubers earlier, ensure the soil is warm enough to receive them. Soil temperature should be 60°F (15.5C), so use your soil thermometer to ensure you get this right. If a late April frost is predicted after you've moved your pre-sprouted tubers outside, you must protect those tender sprouts. A single frost will turn your hard-earned sprouts to black mush. Cover the soil with black plastic or landscape fabric a week before planting to absorb solar heat.

Once tubers are in the ground, keep frost blankets or old 5-gallon buckets nearby to pop over the plants if the temperature dips. You can buy plant covers to help give an extra layer of protection if there are unexpected late frosts. Buy Homeya Plant Protection Covers with Zips from Wayfair to pop over beheaded dahlias during a surprise cold snap. Knowing what to do with dahlias in spring is that easy – and ensures you get more blooms and bigger flowers, and much sooner.

Shop Dahlia Spring Essentials

Knowing these dahlia secrets should get you off to the races much faster, but you need a few care essentials to help you on your way, these curated items can give you the edge with your spring preparations. Here are our top picks for a successful dahlia wakeup call:

Need more ideas for timely gardening jobs and seasonal expert advice delivered straight to your inbox? Sign up for the free Gardening Know How Newsletter!

Many of us feel a little time stretched, and even the joys of gardening can’t always fit in around the edges of a busy life. So the thought of a perennial that can “do it all” while largely taking care of itself might sound like the stuff of dreams. But believe me, there really is a “set it and forget it” ground cover perennial that can smother weeds, thrive in a dry spell, and service pollinators while flowering prolifically for months. This glory bloomer is the hardy geranium family of plants (aka hardy cranesbill geraniums, or cranesbills), not to be confused with frost-tender pelargoniums.

First, a confession: of all the plants I’ve added to my garden (and there have been a few), the hardy geranium (Geranium spp.) is one that was growing in my yard when I moved in a couple of years ago. I made myself a promise that I would give my yard time to show me what it already had, before filling it with loads of easy perennials and fancy flowers. And honestly, growing hardy geraniums wasn't top of my wishlist back then. But it didn’t take long to get a sense of how fast-growing, reliable, and enthusiastic these plants are, and how long-lasting their flowering displays can be. For quick ground cover, extended blooms, and weed control, the hardy geranium does all this (and more) for the price of admission – and these rugged beauties will keep coming back in abundance year after year.

Carpeting front and back with medleys of violet, blue, and bubblegum pink, my hardy geraniums have become the summer stalwarts I never want to be without. As I write this, they are quietly filling empty patches of earth with lush, green mounds, ready to burst forth with color. Beyond the odd trim (which they seem to love, responding with even more prolific blooms), all I have to do is admire them. They are quite simply some of the hardest-working flowers I’ve ever grown, asking for little in return (apart from a little soil, and some sun). Here’s why April is the time to get them planted so you can enjoy your own easy, lovely, super-long lasting blooms.

Why Plant Hardy Geraniums Now?

Why this one, and why now, you ask? It’s all in the name, but let’s be honest – if it’s low maintenance, weed control, and sustained flower power you’re after, this is the perfect month to plant hardy geranium plants. For most growers in USDA zones 4-8, the soil is beginning to wake up but temperatures are still relatively cool in April. Hardy geraniums thrive when they can establish their root systems in moist, cool soil before the intense potential humidity and heat of summer kicks in. By planting now, plants have plenty of time to stock up on energy reserves for breathtaking perennial flowers that last from May through the first frosts of autumn.

April isn't just perfect for new cranesbill arrivals, though. It’s also the ideal time for dividing hardy geraniums you already have, so you can create even more easy color. If you have an established clump that is starting to look a little hollow in the center, now is the time to divide. Simply lift the clump with a garden fork and tease the root mass into smaller sections. Each new plantlet should have a healthy set of roots and a few green shoots. Replant these immediately with a little organic compost – so you’re doubling your border massive – or reposition them somewhere new.

Regardless of your zip code, just check the soil is workable when planting or replanting (it should crumble easily in your hand). This means delicate new roots won't suffocate and plants quickly become set-and-forget stalwarts. Make sure you plant in a spot with dappled shade if you live in the south. While many varieties love the sun, a little afternoon shade keeps foliage from scorching in peak summer temperatures.

Also, make sure you check the soil pH at the time of planting, as hardy geraniums are quicker to flourish where the soil is slightly acidic to neutral. Our team likes the Yamron 4-in-1 Soil Meter, which you can get from Amazon, for easy combined soil health checks such as moisture content and nutrient load as well as acidity levels.

Grab Your Hardy Geraniums

Choosing hardy geraniums is a joy, whether you are looking for something to quickly fill a gap in a border, or a pretty doorway container that can greet your visitors with a medley of late spring color. Before I show you how to plant in different parts of your yard, make sure you've got a couple of cranesbills to hand. These curated picks are a few favorite options you can purchase (as live pot plants or bare roots) for easy ground cover, pretty pots, and effortless planting wherever you need to cast some color.

1. Planting in Borders

When it comes to border planting, hardy geraniums can blend into a broad variety of ornamental themes and arrangements. They have a unique ability to knit together disparate groups of plants, softening the edges between tall, structural shrubs and smaller bedding favorites. But their true superpower in a border is as a living mulch. Cranesbill hardy geranium plants like G. macrorrhizum create a thick canopy that shades the soil, suppressing weed germination, and retaining precious moisture. Planting cranesbills now ensures that by June, you’ll have a lush green carpet that saves you hours of weeding.

If you’re planting in a sunny border, super-violet classic 'Rozanne' and pastel-pretty 'Johnson’s Blue' are lovely choices, and ‘Album’ gives your borders a shimmering mass of bright white petal power. If your border sits under the canopy of a tree, grow more shade tolerant varieties like pink ‘Biokovo’ and sultry purple ‘Raven’ hardy geraniums. When planting, aim for a naturalist approach that groups your plants in sets of three or five, and spacing them 12-18 inches (25-45cm) apart. This might look a little sparse initially, but these enthusiastic growers will quickly bridge the gaps, creating a seamless flow of foliage and flowers.

While hardy geraniums aren't fussy, they do appreciate a little organic matter at the time of planting. Mix a few handfuls of well-rotted compost into the planting hole to improve drainage. This is especially important if you’re working with heavy clay. And even though these are easygoing plants, I’d be tempted to sprinkle a handful of fish blood and bone into the planting hole to help kickstart root development. You can buy Down to Earth’s All Natural Fertilizer Organic Fish Bone Meal from Amazon for a gentle, slow-release sprinkle that supports prolific flowering. Don’t forget to give them a deep soak. Yes, they are drought-tolerant once established, but that initial drench sets the stage for a summer-long floral marathon.

2. Making Easy Containers

Hardy geraniums may boss an open border with ease, but they also make lovely flowering perennials for pots. They lend themselves to mixed palettes with annuals and other perennials, and can work very well as the solo performer in a large tub on a patio or by the door. Unlike annual pelargoniums that you need to overwinter indoors (or surrender with the frost), a potted hardy geranium can stay outside and just gets better with age. And where your garden soil is naturally heavy, containers give you a chance to fully control the growing environment.

If you’re keen for your hardy geranium plant to gently tumble over the rim of the pot in a spiller style, look for compact or mounded varieties. I’m fond of pinky lilac 'Ballerina' (G. cinereum), which produces a mass of trembling dusky petals with striking purple streaks. For a shock of blue, 'Orion' offers some of the largest petals in the geranium family. When planting in April, just make sure the pot has ample drainage holes. A potting mix blended with a little grit or perlite, such as Sta-Green Organic Perlite from Lowe’s, ensures the roots never sit in stagnant water.

Caring for potted geraniums is easy. They just rely on you a little more for nutrients. Apply a liquid fertilizer every few weeks from late spring through August to provide the energy needed for constant bud production. A fish emulsion feed or diluted seaweed is a brilliant little extra. Try a little sprinkle of Maxicrop Soluble Seaweed Powder from Amazon, which is packed with micronutrients. If your plant starts to look a little leggy midsummer, trimming it back by half will encourage a fresh flush of foliage and a second wave of color. That’s all the work that’s required, promise!

3. Adding as Pathway Edging

I’m all for a spot of whimsy (ask around), and while pathways clearly have a practical purpose, there’s nothing to say they can’t be edged in soft, pillowing mounds of purple and pink – I’m not immune, I’ll admit it. I love a garden path that feels soft, contoured and a teensy bit fluffy around the edges. By planting hardy geraniums along walkways this month, you’re creating a living fringe to edge and spill over the hard lines of stone, brick, or concrete. This doesn't just look beautiful, it's a lively landscaping trick. Using low-growing hardy geraniums as an edging plant helps to drive the flow of the garden, while protecting the soil from compaction and runoff.

When selecting varieties for pathways, you want plants that are compact enough to “stay in their lane” and tough enough to handle the occasional stray footstep. 'Biokovo' is a smashing option, not just for its white-and-pink blooms, but also because of its ginger scent, which is released when you brush past it. Or, for a denser, mat-forming look, 'Karmina' (G. x cantabrigiense) creates a rug of deep-pink flowers that stabilizes the soil, making it an excellent choice for sloped pathways. Because of their fibrous root system, hardy geraniums are great on inclines.

Planting along a path in April just requires a little bit of future-thinking. It’s tempting to plant right against the edge of the stone for immediate impact, but remember these plants will expand. Plant 6-8 inches (15-20cm) back from the line. This gives the plants room to grow into their natural mounding shape without becoming a trip hazard. Don't be afraid to mix and match. Alternating different shades of pink and purple creates a drift effect that looks far more organic (and professional) than one repeating tone, and can make your yard look a little bigger.

Despite what I just said about their resilience, avoid planting hardy geraniums in areas where they will be constantly stepped on – they can take the odd wayward step, but they aren't lawn replacements. For a creative, organic look, try tucking a few smaller divisions into the gaps between large steppers on a path. They will happily colonize the cracks and soften the whole look.

Hardy Geranium Planting Partners

For the ultimate in “set and forget” planting, hardy geraniums are both very versatile in mixed plantings and actively supportive of other plants, bringing out the best in surrounding flowers and foliage. Maybe it’s because of their natural ability to reach out, but they knit together surrounding plants in a very pleasing way. Because they have a mounded, spreading habit, they are especially beneficial when paired with plants that offer a different architecture, specifically height and structure.

For a modern garden look, contrast your soft-shaped cranesbill with spiky partners. Pairing the billowy clouds of 'Rozanne' with the architectural spikes of 'Caradonna' salvia or 'Blue Fortune' agastache or ‘Walker’s Low’ nepeta creates a clean, intentional look that thrives from June through September. You can buy ‘Walker’s Low’ Nepeta from Fast Growing Trees.

If you prefer the romantic, overflowing feel of a cottage garden, aim for a softer palette. One of the most iconic pairings is with lady’s mantle (Alchemilla mollis). The lime-green, frothy flowers act as a perfect foil for the violet tones of the geranium. You can buy Hirt’s Gardens’ Alchemilla from Walmart as live plants. You can also layer in 'Munstead' lavender or 'Becky' shasta daisies for a timeless fee. Combining plants with similar light and water requirements keeps everything suitably low-maintenance while looking high-effort. Try these palettes for easy color:

• Purple & Gold: Pair blue-toned purple geraniums like 'Johnson’s Blue' with bright yellow 'Moonshine' yarrow. These are complementary colors on the wheel, making each look more vibrant, creating a real power dynamic and visual movement.
• Purple & Orange: For a high-energy look, tuck 'Orange Rocket' berberis or Asclepias tuberosa behind a purple geranium. The contrast is deeply satisfying and energizing.
• Purple & Silver: Combine pale purple cranesbills with the silvery foliage of 'Silver Mound' artemisia or lamb’s ears (Stachys byzantina). This palette practically glows at dusk and looks lovely as part of a moon garden planting.
• Purple & Purple: For a regal drench, create a monochromatic look by layering different shades of violet. Combine 'Raven' geraniums with deep purple 'May Night' salvia and dark-leaved coral bells like ‘Forever Purple’ Heuchera from Nature Hills for a sophisticated, moody vibe.

Need more ideas for timely gardening jobs and seasonal expert advice delivered straight to your inbox? Sign up for the free Gardening Know How Newsletter!

Most beginner gardeners hesitate at the mere thought of cutting their plants, viewing their favorites as delicate beauties. But what if I told you that making a calculated cut is actually a sneaky win? Certain spring cuttings are the ultimate boost for borders – with the promise of fast-tracking new growth, bringing extra beauty to your growing spaces, and saving you a packet in the process. Talk about high reward!

Being able to fast-track growing plants to maturity is an underrated win for border beauties. Taking these plant cuttings in April, these border clones will take root and reach flowering size significantly faster than any seed ever could. April is the perfect time for this garden heist. As the soil warms and the first flush of spring energy surges through the roots, these plants are practically begging to be multiplied. So why not claim the free flowers your borders deserve?

Cutting the “bottoms and toes” of key border plants means you can potentially double your plant count without spending more on plugs and seeds. By targeting the fresh basal shoots (the bottoms) or the vigorous root fragments (the toes), you are catching your plant at its most regenerative phase. It’s the perfect way to turn a few expensive nursery finds into a drifting colony of color.

You can quickly propagate these 6 plants by their bottoms or toes. Take the basal cuttings from new growth that will be quick to root, and specific root cuttings flush with nutrients and primed to grow into new plants. It couldn’t be simpler, so why not give it a try? Learn the easy way to multiply your border flowers this spring, because the best things in life really can be free.

Why These Cuttings Work So Well

Growing from seed is satisfying and rewarding, but let’s be honest, it can be a test of patience. Between the stratification, the damp-off risks, and the agonizing wait for that first bloom (which can take years for some perennials), seeds can feel like a full-time job. Cutting plant propagation, specifically the basal and root methods we’re focusing on here, can be a real shortcut to spectacular borders. Because these cuttings are taken from established, mature plants, they carry the memory of adulthood. This means they spend less time growing up and more time growing out, often resulting in flowers in the very first season. Yes, you read that right!

We are focusing on easy perennials here. These sturdy, reliable border plants will thrive in a range of USDA zones. Unlike annuals that burn out in a season, these plants are long-term investments. Several of these perennial cuttings allow you to capitalize on basal growth. This is those chunky, solid new shoots that emerge from the crown. These shoots are packed with auxins (natural growth hormones) that are primed to trigger root development the moment they touch the soil. It’s a low-risk, high-reward strategy: even if a cutting doesn't take, the parent plant is usually so vigorous in spring that it will simply grow another shoot to replace it.

To grow these cuttings, you just need some well-draining potting mix, consistent moisture, and a bit of insider timing. A nice choice for basal and root cuttings is Rosy Soil Cactus and Succulent Organic Potting Soil Mix, available from Amazon, which offers excellent drainage and aeration. For most of the US, April offers that perfect balance of rising temperatures and high humidity that keeps cuttings from wilting before they root. So let’s get into growing our free flowers, with 6 of the easiest plants to propagate from cuttings now for speedy extra plants!

1. Delphiniums

When it comes to classics, delphiniums are the undisputed royalty of the cottage garden, and they offer that soaring vertical drama every border and fence line needs, often reaching six feet (1.8m) in height. These short-term perennials (often surviving 3-5 years) can be expensive to replace, which makes propagation essential for keeping your flowering display constant.

While many gardeners try to grow these multi-hued charmers from seed, you'll often end up with muddy, off-type colors. While delphiniums do reseed, you can get more growth more quickly with basal cuttings. These also give you an exact genetic clone of that perfect sky-blue or deep-purple spike you love. When you see new shoots about 3 inches (8cm) tall and solid, this is your cue to snip. If the stem is hollow in the center, it’s too late and the cutting likely won't root. Use a sharp, sterilized knife to slice the shoot from the crown, taking a tiny heel of the woody base with it.

This heel contains concentrated rooting cells, but you can dip the cutting in rooting hormone, such as Hormex Rooting Powder No3 from Walmart for an added boost. Expect roots to form in 3-4 weeks. Keep them out of direct afternoon sun during this period. For best results in zones 3-7, keep your pots in a sheltered cold frame or a bright windowsill.

2. Lupines

Lupines (aka bluebonnets) are the vibrant, spire-shaped stars of the spring border. They are beloved for their native aesthetic and vivid purple-blues. However, they have a deep taproot, which means they hate being moved once established. This makes taking basal cuttings the most effective way to spread lupines around your garden without killing the parent plant. They grow quickly, so the cuttings you take will soon give you new plants to fill in empty spaces along your borders.

Look for the pups at the base of the plant in early April. You want shoots that have just unfurled their first set of signature palm leaves. Because lupines are prone to rot if kept too soggy, use a gritty compost mix or add some perlite, such as Sta-Green Organic Perlite from Lowe’s, to assist with drainage. If you’re in a warmer zone (8-9), ensure you take your cuttings before May, as lupines prefer the cool moisture of early spring for rooting. Be sure to take a cutting of new growth and part of the crown to replant. Continue to do this every few years for continuous lupine blooms.

3. Garden Phlox

Garden phlox (Phlox paniculata) is the scent of summer and a popular addition to colorful borders. These native perennials can reach 4 feet (1.2 m) tall, topped with enchanting mops of purple, pink, white, red, and salmon flowers. These pretty clusters of small flowers bloom in summer and attract beneficial pollinators. But while they are easy-going, they are prone to powdery mildew. By taking cuttings from your healthiest clumps, you can ensure your future plants are as robust as parents.

Phlox is generous, so you can take a 3-inch (8cm) basal cutting in April, and it will often grow fast enough to produce a small flower head by August of the same year. To ensure success, remove the lower leaves of the cutting so you have a clean stem to insert into the soil. Once rooted and growing new leaves, give your phlox a boost with a little diluted Miracle-Gro Water Soluble Plant Food, available from Amazon.

Don’t be afraid to pinch the top of the cutting once it starts growing to encourage a bushier, multi-stemmed plant. If you have a favorite heirloom variety that you can't find anymore, spring basal cuttings are the ultimate insurance policy for phlox. Propagate two or three backups every April to keep the line going.

4. Oriental Poppies

Now we’re trying toe cuttings (in other words, stealing from the roots). Oriental poppies are famous for their crepe-paper blooms on sturdy stems as tall as three feet (0.9m). They are also famous for disappearing (going dormant) in the heat of summer. This means April (while they are in active, leafy growth) is a great time to find the roots and take your toes.

Root cuttings can feel like performing magic, truly. You're looking for a pencil-thick piece of root to grow. Gently move some soil from the side of the parent plant clump, and snip or slice a 3-inch (8cm) section of root. A hori-hori knife can be useful for clean slicing. If you don’t have one, and want something you can’t lose in the soil, try the Pink Hori-Hori Knife from Burpee. Just remember to bury the parent root again.

To help you keep track of which end is up on your root cutting, use a slanted cut at the bottom and a straight cut at the top. Root cuttings take a bit longer than basal cuttings. You might not see green shoots for 6-8 weeks, and you likely won't get flowers until next year. However, the resulting plant will be much stronger and more drought-tolerant than poppies grown from seed.

5. Chrysanthemums

The hardy mum is often grown as a cool-season annual, but with the right care it is a perennial marvel. Even tiny flowering stalks can root in water with the right encouragement. Chrysanthemums grow vigorously and beautifully as perennial border plants. So if you have a clump that survived the winter, April is the time to turn that one mound into a dozen. Basal cuttings are the best way to multiply your mums because these plants root super fast, sometimes in as little as 10 days.

If you let mums grow naturally, they get leggy and flop over. By taking basal cuttings in April, you’re pruning the parent plant to be more compact while creating vigorous offspring. Aim for shoots 2-4 inches (2.5-5cm) long. If you take cuttings early enough in April, you will have full-sized blooming mounds by October. No, really! It’s a great way of safeguarding some late summer and fall color as other flowers begin to fade.

In northern USDA zones (4-6), keep cuttings indoors or in a greenhouse until the risk of frost has passed. In the south, you can often pot them up and leave them in a shady spot outdoors. Use a seedling heat mat to encourage lightning-fast rooting in chilly Aprils. You can buy Heat Mats from Burpee to accelerate healthy root development.

6. Sea Holly

Sea holly (Eryngium) is a bit like the cool kid of the pack and something of an anomaly (but a beautiful one) in a border, with its metallic blue, thistle-like bracts. However, this particular border beauty has a long taproot (or big toe, as it were), which makes it very drought-tolerant but difficult to divide in the traditional way. And growing from seed is tricky and hit-or-miss. Root cuttings are a simple and reliable way to propagate this plant without disturbing the main taproot. You probably won’t get flowers this year, but you will be boosting your border for the long run.

Similar to poppies, you want to find a lateral root (a side root) rather than cutting the main central taproot. The best part? Even a tiny inch (2.5cm) fragment of sea holly root can regenerate into a full plant. Lay these toes horizontally in a tray of sandy compost and cover with a thin layer of grit. Sea holly roots are prone to rotting if kept too wet, though, so use a soil meter like the XLUX Long Probe from Amazon to ensure you aren't overwatering sensitive toes. Use a hands-off approach once they are potted. Place them in a cold frame, and you can forget about them until you see the first silvery-green leaves emerge.

Shop Cutting Essentials

Ready to make the cut? Take your bottoms and toes from vulnerable snips to sturdy border staples with some dedicated kit to nurture and protect new clones. These key propagation essentials will give your basal and root cuttings the edge, and best of all they won’t break the bank.

How to Make Your Cuttings

Making that first cut might feel stressful, but the rewards are significant, whether you’re working with the plant’s bottoms or toes! For basal cuttings, the goal is to get solid growth. If the stem feels like a straw, move to a younger shoot. You need strong, fresh shoots emerging from the base of the plant. Cut as close to the plant crown as possible, and include that little heel (piece of the crown) if you can to help the cutting root faster. Once removed, remove the bottom 50% of foliage before placing in moist potting mix. Removing leaves will reduce the workload for the stem, allowing it to focus all its energy on growing roots rather than foliage.

For root cuttings, the key is orientation. If you are planting them vertically, the end that was closest to the plant (the top) must stay at the top. This is why the slant-cut method is so effective, with a straight cut on the top, and slanted on the bottom. If you’re nervous, just lay them horizontally in potting mix. The plant is smart enough to figure out which way is up! Cover with about half an inch (around 1cm) of gritty soil. Keep your cuttings watered and the soil or potting mix moist, and check on them regularly. Before long, you’ll see new growth to add to your garden.

Use a clear plastic humidity dome or even a simple Ziploc bag over your pots to create a mini-greenhouse effect. This keeps the air humid so the leaves don't wilt while the roots are still developing. Check them once a week. If you see new green growth, congratulations! You’ve just multiplied your border darlings for free.

Need more ideas for timely gardening jobs and seasonal expert advice delivered straight to your inbox? Sign up for the free Gardening Know How Newsletter!

​​One of my definitive spring moments has arrived: my 'Woo Long Peng Sheng' has burst forth with vibrant, fluffy color. By which I mean, of course, that my beloved tree peony has picked this week to flower, and as usual, I’m feeling humbled, delighted, and a little baffled. I'm always amazed at how those last few weeks of waiting can stretch endlessly, only to feel caught short when those buds explode into life. Suddenly, I’m staring at 16 pillowy magenta fluffballs (yes, I counted), looking for all the world like they landed on the branches in concert overnight.

While my tree peony is the early star of the show, my growing focus now needs to shift to the herbaceous varieties of peonies in spring that are waking up. Tree peonies are different to herbaceous types, as they keep their shape year round and don’t involve anxiously peering into mulchy bases, wondering and waiting, searching for those pinky asparagus-style shoots of rebirth. Herbaceous peony care requires a special kind of vigilance. And if I’ve learned anything from years of trial and error, it’s that the spring waiting game is when the most damage can be done in the gap between nascent growth and eagerly anticipated blooming symphonies.

Although peonies do need love and attention in order to reach their full flowering potential, they need a certain kind of love. April is a critical window for peony care, but it’s also the time when many gardeners, armed with the best intentions, can accidentally sabotage those precious summer displays. Sometimes, the more you fuss, the less they can bloom. And you truly can kill future blooms with kindness. To ensure you aren't trading a season of voluminous flowers for lush, flowerless leaves, here’s what you need to check. Arm yourself with these 3 common peony pitfalls to prevent calamity and big up those blousy blooms!

Peony Pitfalls to Dodge This Spring

April is a month of dramatic contrasts for peony growing, depending on where you are based. While gardeners in USDA zone 8 may already be seeing lush foliage, those in zones 4 and 5 might still be clearing the last remnants of snow from beds. Regardless of your zip code, though, the moment you spy those first pink eyes pushing through the warming soil, the clock has already started ticking. This is the critical window for herbaceous peonies. They are waking up from a long winter slumber, and like anyone jolted awake, they are feeling pretty sensitive.

The danger of killing with kindness stems from the natural impulse to pamper our plants. When we see those tender shoots, our instinct is to protect and nourish. We might worry they’re too cold, too hungry, or in danger of being too floppy. However, herbaceous peony types are surprisingly stoic. They thrive on a bit of tough love and minimal interference. Panic-driven peony care in spring, such as piling on extra mulch to combat a late frost or adding heavy fertilizer to speed things up, can trigger fungal rots or crown damage that will abort this year’s flower buds before they ever have a chance to become pillowy pink blooms.

Think of April as an invisible deadline for your summer display. It may seem counterintuitive, but because peonies are relatively slow-growing perennial flowers, they lock in their success stories relatively early. They basically decide whether to bloom based on your actions now, so an accident or oversight now can’t always be corrected later. And environmental factors like spring rain can increase the risk of peony problems like botrytis if your kind actions have restricted airflow or buried the plant too deep. To keep your peonies on track for that symphonic bloom, we need to transition from fussy over-parenting to devoted vigilance. Avoid these spring goofs so your peonies have the space and health they need to perform.

Pitfall 1. Incorrect Feeding

This is such an understandable mistake to make. We see those reddish-pink shoots emerging and we reach for the nearest fertilizer, eager to give them a boost to help them along. However, when it comes to peonies, April is a time for a very specific diet. The pitfall here is reaching for a high-nitrogen fertilizer (the kind used for lawns or lush green shrubs). Nitrogen is the fuel for foliage, and while it will certainly give you a massive, leafy plant, it often does so at the direct expense of the flowers. The resulting lush and leafy growth can be a huge misdirect, where the peony looks incredibly healthy but fails to produce a single bud.

To avoid this, look for a balanced fertilizer (10-10-10) if you don't want to overthink it. Highly rated GardenWise 10-10-10 Slow Release Fertilizer, available from Amazon, is great for peace of mind in spring. Alternatively, try a bloom-focused fertilizer with a lower first number (nitrogen) and higher middle and last numbers (phosphorus and potassium). A ratio like 5-10-10 or 3-4-5 is ideal for emerging herbaceous peonies in April. These nutrients support strong root development and, crucially, the formation of those heavy flower heads. Espoma is a tried-and-true tonic for bloom support in spring, and Espoma Organic Flower-tone 3-4-5 Fertilizer, available from Walmart, gives you that double-pronged nutrient fix without the excess nitrogen worry.

If you want to give your peonies an extra edge without risking the nitrogen trap, I love to add a little splash of seaweed. Try a little spring sprinkle of Maxicrop Soluble Seaweed Powder from Amazon. While not a traditional fertilizer, seaweed acts as a plant tonic. It strengthens the cell walls of fast-growing stems, making them more resilient to unpredictable spring weather and provides the micronutrients needed for those intense blooming colors. Seaweed doesn't have much N-P-K, but it’s packed with micronutrients. You could say it’s like giving your peony a multivitamin.

The beauty of the right spring peony feed is that once you have the right fuel, you only need to apply it once as the shoots reach about 6- 8 inches (15-20cm) high. Just remember, in the peony patch, less is often more. If you’ve already been a bit heavy-handed with the nitrogen, though, don't panic. You can help rebalance the soil by scratch-feeding a little bone meal or a phosphorus-rich bloom booster around the drip line of the plant to encourage bud set.

Pitfall 2. Deep Mulching

This mulching mistake is perhaps the most common reason peonies fail to bloom. Seems innocent enough to add a layer of cozy mulching, right? Unfortunately, there is a fine line between a cozy blanket and a suffocating weight. In April, you might see peonies sprout and decide to refresh the mulch “just in case” there’s more frost. But piling mulch directly over the crown of an herbaceous peony is the most effective way to ensure it never flowers. Peonies need those pinkish buds (the eyes) on the crown to be just below the soil surface (no more than 2 inches or 5cm deep). If you bury them under an additional layer, the plant will instinctively decide it’s too deep to bloom, leading to a season of lovely leaves but zero buds.

The secret to the best mulching is to apply your mulch in a wide ring around the plant, but leave 3-4 inches (8-10cm) around the emerging stems (known as the donut method). This keeps the soil cool and moist (which peonies love) without risking crown rot or blindness. For the best results, use nutrient-rich fines or a high-quality organic mulch like Back to the Roots Organic Premium, available from Amazon, which provides excellent drainage. If you’re worried about weeds popping up in that bare center, a light dusting of fine compost is fine, but steer clear of heavy bark or dense shredded wood in the immediate center.

If you suspect you’ve already been a little too generous with the mulch, don't wait for summer to fix it! Grab a small hand tool like the Fiskars Ergo Trowel, available from Walmart. and gently pull the mulch back until you can see the base of the stems and the very top of the crown. It’s a 5-minute job that can save your flowering season. Remember, peonies don't want to be tucked in too tightly – they want to breathe!

Pitfall 3. The Wrong Support

It’s that classic moment where you try to be helpful with a little careful stem adjustment and rearranging, only to hear a sickening snap – and just like that, a flower buys it before it even hits its stride. I understand that snapping sound all too well from personal experience. It’s unthinkable to imagine a beautiful, heavy peony head snapped clean off due to trying to help. And this isn’t meant to scare you into not lending your pink flowering friend any sort of support. The problem lies in trying to help it into a support too late in the season. It’s heartbreaking, but this very common pitfall is totally avoidable in April.

When it comes to supporting peonies, we often hold off on installing cages or stakes because we want to enjoy the natural, unobstructed view of the emerging foliage for as long as possible. However, trying to corral a peony once it has reached its full height is a recipe for disaster. Peony stems are surprisingly brittle at the base. Forcing a tall, leafy plant through a narrow metal ring can force the stems to bend and snap under the pressure of the support. This aspect of peonies care in spring needs to happen when you are dealing with less of that brittle volume. To avoid this, don’t try forcing taller stems into moorings several weeks into growth. The trick is to let the plant grow into a support that has been placed when spring growth is very young, rather than forcing the support onto the plant later.

By placing your cages or grids into position when the shoots are 6-10 inches (15-25cm) tall, the stems can naturally find their way through the gaps. Look for peony-specific cages, such as Gardener’s Supply Titan Peony Supports from Amazon, which allow plenty of room for peonies to naturally nudge their way through. Or for something a little more rustic, try the Willow Round Wood Obelisk from Wayfair which provides an organic structure that disappears into the foliage as it grows naturally into position.

This approach doesn't just prevent snapping, it ensures better airflow. If we bundle tall peonies with twine at the last minute as they start to flop, we create a dense, humid suffocation trap in the center of the plant, the perfect breeding ground for fungal diseases like botrytis. If you realize you’ve missed the boat and your peonies are already getting tall, don't try to force a cage over them. Instead, use individual plant support stakes with clips to gently tether individual heavy stems to a central cane. It’s a slower process, but it’s far kinder than risking a total break.

Shop Peony Care Essentials

After all these warnings, you might want to give yourself permission to indulge in a bit of retail therapy. That being the case, make sure you have the right peony care kit to hand as you help it wake up from its winter snooze. Investing in a few key items now will save you from the heartbreak of snapped stems or flower-free plants later in June. From specialized low-nitrogen fuels to the right structural supports, these curated picks will help you pivot from fretting to positive spring care.

Need more ideas for timely gardening jobs and seasonal expert advice delivered straight to your inbox? Sign up for the free Gardening Know How Newsletter!

There’s a version of spring hydrangea feeding that goes: buy a bag of fertilizer, scatter some around the base, and done. And do you know what? Something nice may probably come of it, since hydrangeas are not fragile. But while hydrangeas are hardy enough to handle this approach, they won't thrive. We need to avoid a “one size fits all” approach, since different hydrangea types in different growing regions have unique needs.

To care for hydrangeas in spring for the biggest, brightest blooms, you need to think less about a single product and more about a meal of essentials. This is how you produce the kind of display that stops people on the sidewalk. So rather than one magic feed that covers all the bases, it helps to think about our essential nutrient boost as a three-course meal of goodies that your hydrangeas are craving – goodies that work together to boost future blooms (as well as the plants that produce them).

Caring for hydrangeas in the spring requires a soil-first mindset, and April is the month that sets these plants up for a flourishing display. Good hydrangea care is about nourishing soil layers organically – we want to layer our nutrients for sustained energy. These three April feeding essentials take a nuanced approach, each addressing a different aspect of what the root zone needs. One feeds it, one builds it, and one protects it. Oh, and there’s a fourth thing you need to keep on the shelf until summer! So, read on to discover this brilliant recipe for summer success…

Why April Feeding is Critical

Most gardeners underestimate how early hydrangeas get moving in spring. While the branches might still look like dry sticks, the roots are already active well before the first leaf buds break. They are rebuilding reserves lost over winter in preparation for leafing out. This early stretch is the window that matters most for fertilizing hydrangeas in spring. If you wait until you see flower buds in June, you’ve already missed the chance to influence the size and vigor of those flower heads.

Timing is everything with hydrangea fertilizing. If you feed too early in a cold climate, you might trigger tender new growth that gets zapped by frost. April is ideal for most US hardiness zones – it’s warm enough that the soil is alive, yet early enough that the plant is still building. It’s about being proactive rather than reactive. The goal is to have everything in place before real growth starts, not scrambling to catch up after.

If you're in the south, your hydrangeas might be leafed out by mid-April, requiring a steady hand with moisture. In the north, you're likely just seeing mouse ear leaves. Regardless of your zone, though, the principle remains the same. You need to provide the nutrients now, so they are available when the plant reaches for them.

When you have container-based hydrangeas, April feeding is also vital. Because container gardens leach nutrients every time you water, these plants are relying on you for a focused April feed. Let’s get to our three-course meal for hydrangeas, both in the ground and in containers, ensuring those in every zip code can feel the love.

Shop Hydrangea Feeding Essentials

Giving your hydrangeas the best start in spring doesn't require a degree in chemistry. With these fertilizing and soil conditioning essentials, you can nourish both your soil and your hydrangeas, work at the root level, and prime your plants for growth as they prepare for the big summer show. Try these curated picks for April feeding:

1. Foundation: Balanced Feed

A balanced granular fertilizer is the best place to start. April is still early enough that balance matters more than a targeted push. Look for an NPK ratio of 10-10-10 or 4-4-4, and a slow-release fertilizer option if you can. For a gentle, healthy balance, try GardenWise 10-10-10 Slow Release Plant Fertilizer from Amazon. The even spread across nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium gives the plant what it needs for root growth, foliage, and bud development without skewing toward any single priority.

For panicle hydrangeas, in particular, which are heavy feeders and bloom on new wood, this April dose is their primary fuel source for the entire year. If you are growing in containers, look for a controlled-release granule like Osmocote Smart Release Plant Food Plus from Walmart. Since pots are closed systems, a slow-release formula prevents the feast-or-famine cycle that can stress out the roots.

For in-ground plants, remember to scatter the granules at the drip line (the circle directly under the outermost leaves) rather than piling it against the main trunk. This encourages the roots to spread out and find the food. Also, remember to water in after to help hydrangea’s shallow root systems. If you have smooth hydrangeas like ‘Annabelle’, they are often happy with just a light dusting. Over-fertilizing can lead to stems that are too weak to hold up their massive flower heads, causing them to flop after a rain. A light, balanced touch is all they need in April.

2. Soil Booster: Mushroom Compost

Alongside the right granular fertilizer for hydrangeas in spring, give some thought to the soil itself. Mushroom compost is one of the best soil amendments you can give around the base of hydrangeas in April. Mushroom compost doesn’t have much of a marketing pitch: it’s dark, smells like earth, and the bag makes no big claims. What it does is work on the soil itself, loosening compacted areas, adding organic matter, and supporting the microbial activity that determines how well the hydrangea’s roots can access whatever else you’ve put in the ground.

Care of hydrangeas in spring is just as much about care of the soil they’re sitting in, and this is the amendment that addresses that most directly. A great option for this deep nourishment aspect of your hydrangea three-course meal is Hapi Gro Organic Mushroom Compost from Walmart, which is also excellent for container-based hydrangeas. This ability to improve soil structure applies to a range of soil types. It helps sandy soils hold water and helps heavy clay soils breathe, both of which are critical for water-loving hydrangeas.

Mushroom compost tends to run slightly alkaline. For pink hydrangeas like bigleaf types, that’s a helpful nudge. Higher pH pulls bloom color toward warmer tones. However, if you are aiming for vibrant blues, you’ll want to balance this compost with a soil acidifier like Espoma Organic Iron-Tone from Walmart to ensure the pH doesn't climb too high.

3. Protective Blanket: Pine Mulch

While mulch isn't technically food, it is a critical element of the feeding environment. The hydrangea’s relatively shallow root systems can dry out quickly. A thick layer of pine bark nuggets or pine needles (or pine straw) acts as an insulator. It keeps the soil cool and moist, so the roots continue absorbing the fertilizer you just applied.

This mulch layer feeds soil microbes as it breaks down, cycling that organic matter into the ground well into summer. So caring for hydrangeas in the spring with a good mulching means that your good work in April keeps getting protected (along with the roots). For nuggets, try Rio Hamza Natural Pink Bark Nuggets from Amazon which will keep breaking down well into summer if applied in April.

Pine-based mulch can slightly influence surface acidity over time, which is useful for blue hydrangeas and for anyone dealing with naturally alkaline ground. Lay it 2-3 inches (5-8cm) deep. Leave a 3-inch (8cm) gap around the base. If mulch is piled against the wood, it can trap moisture and cause crown rot. For container plants, a thin layer of miniature pine bark nuggets can still do the job.

The 1 to Skip: High Nitrogen Feed

High-nitrogen fertilizers (where that first number in the NPK ratio is considerably higher than the other two) cause a specific problem in spring. Nitrogen is what drives leafy growth. Give a hydrangea a heavy nitrogen charge in April, and it redirects energy that would have gone toward buds and flower heads into producing more foliage instead. The plant looks lush, but the bloom count drops. It’s a bad trade.

This is especially true for bigleaf and oakleaf hydrangea varieties. These plants have already decided how many flowers they will have based on last year’s growth. Forcing a sudden burst of leafy growth with high nitrogen can cause the plant to abort its flower buds in favor of survival.

Fertilizer for hydrangeas in spring needs to support the whole plant, buds included. High-nitrogen products have their place; lawns want them, leafy vegetables want them, and fast-growing hedges definitely want them. But a flowering shrub like hydrangea trying to set blooms in April really can do without. Keep it on the shelf until the blooms are already open and the risk of redirecting that energy has passed.

Check Soil pH for Color Amendments

If you’re growing bigleaf hydrangeas and the bloom color matters to you, then soil pH is the lever, and April is a critical month for changing things up if that is needed. Acidic soil in the 5.5-6 range produces blue flowers. Soil above 6.5 pushes toward pink. Alkaline soil above 7 produces pink reliably, sometimes with a muddy quality.

April is a good time to test, since you’re already amending. A basic soil test kit like the Luster Leaf Rapitest Soil Test Kit from Amazon gives you a baseline before you add anything. If you’re layering in mushroom compost and pine mulch together, those two inputs will partly cancel each other out (the compost nudges alkaline, the pine nudges acidic) which can be a convenient way to maintain a stable middle range without much effort.

For blue hydrangeas where you need acidic soil, add some aluminum sulfate. For pink, where you need alkaline soil, you may need to add some garden lime. If you apply these amendments in April, the plant has enough time to absorb them before the flower pigments are formed in late spring.

April Feed Troubleshooting

If you see yellow leaves with green veins in April, don't reach for more fertilizer. That yellowing foliage may be a sign of iron deficiency or high pH, which means the plant can’t unlock the iron already in the ground. Be sure to test the soil. A dose of chelated iron will likely fix things faster than a standard fertilizer.

Where new growth looks healthy but last year’s plant produced very few blooms, the issue is more likely pruning timing than feeding. Cutting back in fall or early spring removes the buds on old wood varieties. Feed as normal this April, and leave the stems alone until after bloom. Wilting in warm weather right after fertilizing sometimes means the granules went in too close to the stem or weren’t watered in properly. Scratch the granules out from the stem area and water deeply, and your plant should recover.

If your hydrangea is wilting after you’ve fed it, you may have fertilizer burn. This happens if the salts in the fertilizer get too concentrated near the roots. To fix it, flush the area with plenty of plain water to dilute the nutrients. Always remember the golden rule of April feeding: It is better to under-feed than to over-feed.

More Hydrangea Spring Treats

Beyond the basic meal, these extra treats and amendments will help you manage your garden with precision and style. From color-changing minerals to the perfect delivery system, these are the tools every hydrangea lover needs.

April is critical in determining hydrangea flower power, so don’t delay if you want to give them the best chance of hitting their full potential. By taking these simple steps to feed, boost, and protect your soil now, you're giving your shrubs the foundation they need for a breathtaking summer display. Massive, vibrant blooms can be yours – so feed smart, feed with confidence, and let the spring magic begin!

Need more ideas for timely gardening jobs and seasonal expert advice delivered straight to your inbox? Sign up for the free Gardening Know How Newsletter!

When hydrangea displays fall sideways, refuse to stay upright, or fail to bloom properly in the first place, it’s a crushing disappointment. It might all have seemed fine going into the season (with decent foliage and buds forming) but then at a critical moment, the stems suddenly seem to buckle under the weight of those voluminous flower heads, or the blooms showed up at half the size you were expecting.

If this has happened to you with a hydrangea and you’re keen to avoid a repeat performance, your instinct may be to feed them more of something in the hopes that quantity equals strength and flower size. But the issue often isn’t with the amount of fertilizer, it’s that key nutrients are lacking. What’s more, if you want to stop the flop and find out how to revive a hydrangea that’s been underperforming, the key to stronger stems and massive, vibrant blooms could be lurking in your kitchen bin.

Of course, good hydrangea care includes timely feeds, but high-nitrogen fertilizers push leafy growth at the expense of flowers and do nothing for stem strength. In fact, it’s calcium and potassium where most gardeners come up short. Calcium is what gives stems rigidity, while potassium drives bud set and pushes color intensity. And both are available in two things most households throw away: eggshells and banana peels. Here’s how an unlikely dream team can revive hydrangea shrubs, and transform the structural integrity, scale and beauty of your blooms.

Meet the Kitchen Scrap Superheroes

For anyone who’s ever felt the frustration of a floppy hydrangea first hand, or winced at the sight of a few spindly stems tilting with meagre flowerheads, this kitchen scrap secret could be the makings of your shrub. Sure, it’s understandable to reach for specialized fertilizer, but these simple kitchen throwaways contain key goodness that can transform both their foundational strength and flowering potential. And they’re better for rescuing the main nutrients that can often go missing in action.

So before you toss your breakfast remains into the compost pile, consider them as targeted supplements for your hydrangeas: one provides the structure, while the other provides the stamina and beauty. While a general NPK fertilizer covers the basics, these two kitchen basics provide a concentrated boost exactly where hydrangeas struggle most. And applied now, they have plenty of time to get to work.

Using them together creates a synergistic effect. If you only provide calcium, you’ll have strong stems but potentially lackluster flowers. If you only provide potassium, you might get huge blooms that snap the stems after a downpour. Together, they set the scene for greatness. They are free, organic, and easy to process. Let's get them to work.

1. Eggshells for Structural Integrity

Eggshells are 95% calcium carbonate. It is the same compound used in agricultural lime, just in a slower-release, organic form. If you are looking to find out how to revive hydrangea plants, adding eggshells goes to the bones of the matter. The calcium in the shells is a structural nutrient that reinforces cell walls, and determines whether a stem can hold itself upright and support a heavy flowering mass.

A hydrangea with adequate calcium produces stems that are visibly thicker and stiffer. Conversely, a plant running low produces the drooping, flopping growth that prompts a rush for bamboo stakes in summer. This deficiency is particularly common in sandy soils or gardens that have been heavily watered over time, since calcium leaches steadily with irrigation. By adding eggshells in late winter, you ensure the nutrient is ready and available when your hydrangea enters active growth.

2. Banana Peels for Bloom Power

Banana peels are the potassium-rich half of this dynamic duo. Potassium is what determines how a hydrangea blooms. It triggers the initial bud formation, sustains development all the way through to the opening of the flower, and has a direct effect on color intensity. It even helps the plant regulate water, which is why potassium-rich hydrangeas often hold up better during hot spells and dry summer afternoons.

The tricky part about potassium is its mobility. Unlike phosphorus, which stays put in the soil for a long time, potassium moves through the soil profile quickly – every time you water. This is why a hydrangea can look well-fed on paper and still come up short on blooms. The potassium simply isn't sticking around long enough to be useful during the flowering stage. Adding banana peels on a regular basis provides a consistent, slow-release source of this vital element throughout the season.

Prepare and Apply Your Scraps

Now you know the benefits of these two kitchen scraps, it’s time to find out how to best extract the useful stuff that can benefit your hydrangea, in a way that is efficient and safe to the soil and neighboring plants. Here’s how to optimize your scraps so the nutrients can get to where they are needed most, as quickly as possible.

1. Prepping Eggshells

To get the most out of your eggshells, they must be bone dry before they go near the garden. Fresh shells break down far too slowly and can attract unwanted pests. The best method for prepping eggshells is to rinse them thoroughly, spread them on a baking sheet, and pop them in a low oven for a few minutes, or leave them on a sunny windowsill until they are brittle. Once dry, you need to maximize the surface area. A whole eggshell could take years to decompose; a fine powder takes weeks.

So crush the shells. You can use a rolling pin, but a dedicated coffee grinder or spice/herb grinder like the Beixifo Spice Grinder from Amazon is a great primer for uniform powder. It turns the shells into a calcium flour that the soil can absorb much faster. Additionally, add some lemon juice to your shells to help your hydrangea absorb the calcium. Then work this powder into the top two inches (5cm) of soil around the drip line, rather than right against the main woody stem.

2. Prepping Banana Peels

For the peels, you have two main options. The slow-burn method involves chopping the peels into very small, half-inch (1.3cm) pieces and burying them in the soil around the base of the plant. These will break down within a few weeks, releasing potassium directly into the root zone. However, if you want a faster boost, banana peel tea is the way to go.

To make the tea, soak two or three peels in a quart (a liter) of water for 48 hours. Strain the liquid and pour it at the base of the plant. This form is readily bioavailable, which means the roots can take it in quickly. Optionally, you might prefer a mix of both, burying peel for long-term health and using the tea for a quick pick-me-up ahead of the budding stage.

Must They Be Used Together?

A natural question is whether you should stagger the treatments. While you can apply them a few days apart, there's no harm adding them together. It's recommended! Think of it as a multivitamin. Your hydrangea needs a balanced diet. Adding banana peel and eggshell at the same time ensures it has both the structural bricks (calcium) and fuel (potassium) it needs to start working on that floral masterpiece.

Using only one of these scraps is like trying to build a house with only bricks but no mortar, or vice versa. The synergy between the two is what creates that cohesive shape and visual effect for epic flowering shrubs. By applying both treatments in early March, you are setting the stage for the entire growing season. One treatment provides the foundation, and the other brings the finish.

Timing and Realistic Expectations

Neither of these kitchen scraps can work overnight, which is why timing is everything and a late winter application is so beneficial for hydrangea health. This is when the plant is slowly waking from dormancy, and roots begin actively searching for minerals to fuel the spring surge. If you wait until the plant is already in full leaf, you’ve missed the window where the plant is deciding how thick its stems will be. You want that eggshell’s calcium in the soil before the growth spurt begins.

Banana peel tea moves faster and can be applied every two to three weeks through the growing season as a supplement. It’s important to remember that these are meant to be supplements, not a total replacement for a balanced organic mulch or fertilizer if your soil is truly depleted. However, as a targeted top-up for a plant that is already reasonably well-tended, it can really bolster bud count and bloom quality.

Used together (eggshells for structure, peels for flowering) this kitchen scrap dream team addresses two big reasons hydrangeas underperform. Just remember, calcium needs water to move through the soil. If yours is dry, you need to water the eggshells in thoroughly. Use a generous watering can, like Giftsfaloy Watering Can with Long Spout from Amazon, to apply liquid feeds to the base without splashing foliage.

Essential Pre-Spring Care

While these superhero scraps provide the vitamins, your hydrangeas still need their main meals and a clean environment to thrive. Late winter is a good time to remove any dead, damaged, or diseased wood. For bigleaf (H. macrophylla) and oakleaf (H. quercifolia) varieties, be careful not to prune too aggressively, as they bloom on old wood. If you cut them back now, you’ll be cutting off your summer flowers.

Mulching is key. Add a thick 2-3-inch layer of organic mulch to retain moisture and keep roots cool. A pine-bark mulch like Oldcastle Pine Bark Mulch from Amazon can help acid-loving shrubs maintain a lower soil pH. For H. paniculata (panicles), a good layer of compost-rich mulch provides the steady nutrients they need to produce massive, heavy heads.

A handful of a granular, slow-release, balanced feed like Espoma 10-10-10 Garden Food from Amazon is also a smart option ahead of spring. Finally, ensure your hydration strategy is ready. Hydrangeas have shallow root systems that dry out quickly. A deep soaking once a week will help those new roots establish.

Shop Hydrangea Care Treats

Reusing kitchen scraps is a beautiful, eco-friendly way to boost your hydrangea blooms, but a few key care essentials can help to make the process more effective. From grinding your eggshells into a fine, absorbable dust to ensuring your mulch is the right acidity, these items give your precious ornamentals some extra whoomph.

Frequently Asked Questions

Need more ideas for timely gardening jobs and seasonal expert advice delivered straight to your inbox? Sign up for the free Gardening Know How Newsletter!

Shade gardening often feels like a consolation prize to beginners, but as any seasoned gardener knows, it can be where some of the most uplifting, enduring textures and tones come to life. Of course, most plants benefit from some sun, and for several key ornamentals that means six or more hours of direct sunlight a day. But if you have a shady corner, you still have some stunning options. And for those of you who might be a little time-poor or forgetful as well as sun-starved, certain shade garden plants thrive with minimal care, making them genuine backyard heroes.

These dedicated shade-dwelling perennials have evolved to find their rhythm in the shadows. So don’t be afraid of those gloomy spots – these lovely low-maintenance plants that grow in shade can help you celebrate them. If you get comfortable with the level of shade in your yard, you’ll be surprised how visually impressive you can make those trickier corners with minimal effort. Even a lazy gardener can create a lush and pretty ornamental spectacle that thrives with little effort.

Understanding your yard’s light (or lack of) is the first step toward a successful high-impact, low-care garden. Full shade typically means less than three hours of direct sun a day. Partial shade is generally two-four hours of sunlight a day, while dappled sunlight (the kind that flickers through the leaves of a tree) is ideal for low-growing woodland beauties. These 6 easygoing plants for shade will flourish in lower light or partial shade, depending on variety and other conditions. Here are the backyard beauties every time-stretched, sun-challenged gardener needs.

Shade Options to Plant and Forget

While shade-loving annuals do well in summer, they require regular watering and yearly replanting. If you truly want to plant and forget, perennials are your best friends in full shade, partial shade, or areas with morning sun and afternoon shade. These key perennials are hardy survivors that often grow stronger and more resilient with age.

The secret to a neglect-friendly garden isn't just the plant, it's the preparation. Most shade-dwellers are forest-floor natives and thrive in humus-rich soil. When prepping for your shade plants, you should also consider your growing region. Most of the plants in this roundup are stalwarts in USDA hardiness zones 3-9. In cooler northern climates, these plants can handle a little bit more morning sun.

Group plants by moisture need. Planting ferns in the dampest spot and hostas in the well-draining areas creates a self-regulating ecosystem. Soil type also matters. Shady spots under large trees are often dry, since the canopy acts as an umbrella. Meanwhile, shade next to a building can stay damp for longer. Make sure you test your soil before planting. Use the Yamron 5-in-1 Soil Meter from Amazon to save work later.

1. Hosta

The hosta is the undisputed heavyweight champion of the shade garden and thrives in USDA zones 3-9. While hostas do produce lovely lily-like stalks in midsummer, they are primarily grown for their architectural foliage. If you have a dark corner that looks a little empty, a colorful hosta variety will make it look dynamic and lush. Choose deeper, blueish varieties for full shade spots, and lighter tones for partial shade.

For a plant-and-forget strategy, variety selection is key. 'Guacamole' is a fan favorite for its huge, fragrant flowers and chartreuse centers, while 'Blue Angel' offers massive, silver-blue leaves that slugs find less appetizing. If you're working with a small balcony or a tight nook, look for 'Blue Mouse Ears', a tiny, rubbery-leaved variety that stays perfectly petite. For those with a bit more light, 'Patriot' provides a crisp white-and-green variegation that pops in the shadows. You can buy ‘Patriot’ and ‘Blue Mouse Ears’ Hostas from Nature Hills, though they tend to sell out fast!

To get the best out of these shade tolerant plants with the least work, focus on soil. Adding Burpee’s Organic Premium Potting Mix or a rich compost means you won't need to fertilize for years. Hostas are great companions for spring bulbs. As the bulb foliage dies back, hosta leaves unfurl to hide the ugly transition. Once established, they are incredibly drought-tolerant, though a quick layer of mulch in the spring will help retain moisture so you don't have to haul the hose out during dry spells.

2. Astilbe

If hostas provide structure, astilbe plants (aka false spirea) add floral fireworks from late spring to summer. These perennial plants for shade are loved for their fern-like foliage and stiff, feathery plumes. They are particularly effective when planted in drifts, groups of three or five plants, to create a wash of color. Most types grow no taller than 24 inches (0.6 m), so they do well in beds or under trees and tall shrubs.

Try 'Bridal Veil' (pure white) for a ghost-garden effect at night, or 'Fanal' for a deep, sultry red. The 'Vision' series is of astilbe varieties known for being drought-tolerant, making it the ultimate plant-and-forget choice for busier gardeners. Because of their height, they make perfect options for the middle of a garden bed. Buy ‘Amethyst’ Astilbe as bare root plants from Amazon for luminescent lilac plumes.

Astilbes prefer partial shade and a slightly acidic soil profile. If your soil is alkaline, a quick sprinkle of Espoma Organic Holly-Tone Fertilizer from Lowe’s once a year keeps colors vibrant. They love moisture, so they are the perfect neighbors for a leaky outdoor faucet or a rain garden. You can pair them with ferns or Japanese Forest Grass for a texture-rich, low-maintenance look. Alternatively, grow with coral bells or bugleweed for a pretty, low-key and densely carpeted range of textures.

3. Bleeding Heart

There is something genuinely magical about the bleeding heart plant (Lamprocapnos spectabilis). Its arching stems, reaching three feet (0.9 m) tall, drip with perfectly formed heart-shaped blossoms, making it a nostalgic favorite. This low-maintenance shade plant is a kind of spring ephemeral, as it does its heavy lifting early in the year and then gracefully goes dormant before the summer heat hits.

'Old Fashioned Pink', available from Nature Hills, is lovely for that classic pink flower, but 'Alba' offers a bright white look for moon gardens. If you want something that lingers longer into the summer, the 'Luxuriant' variety is a fringed-leaf type that is more heat-resistant. For a modern twist, 'Gold Heart' features brilliant yellow-gold foliage that illuminates dark corners even when the flowers are gone.

Their stems are a little brittle, so plant bleeding hearts in a spot protected from heavy winds, nestled against a fence or the side of the house is ideal. Ensure the planting site has good drainage. Use a soil meter like the XLUX Long Probe Soil Meter from Amazon to check if your site is too soggy before planting. Plant the crown just below the surface of the soil to prevent rot. Once in the ground, bleeding hearts are remarkably self-sufficient. They are unbothered by deer and rabbits, and because they disappear in late summer, they self-prune by retreating underground.

4. Ferns

Ferns are a bit like the elder statesmen of the shade, having survived since the dinosaurs. They are the go-to solution for deep shade, where almost nothing else will grow, but their varied greens and fringed textures also liven up partial shady corners. Common ferns may not have flowers, but their intricate fronds provide a sophisticated, generous aesthetic.

The ostrich fern is a tall showstopper, reaching up to five feet (1.5 m). The Japanese painted fern ('Pictum') offers silvery-purple hues that look like a watercolor painting. If you live in an area with dry shade, Autumn Fern 'Brilliance', available from Fast Growing Trees, is your best bet. It emerges with a coppery-orange tint and is surprisingly drought-resistant. Meanwhile, lady ferns can tolerate a little sunlight.

Ferns are really low-maintenance and just need good drainage to prevent crown rot. Mix in some coarse sand or perlite, such as Sta-Green Organic Perlite from Lowe’s, to air out clay soils. Plant with coral bells for bright purple or caramel contrasts. For the ultimate lazy tip, leave the fallen autumn leaves on top of your ferns. They act as a natural mulch and nutrient source, exactly as they would on a forest floor.

5. Foamflower

Foamflowers (Tiarella spp.) are often overlooked, but can be a powerhouse for the low-effort gardener in partial or even full shade. A cousin to the widely adored heuchera, these easy perennials are generally hardier and more shade-tolerant. They are colorful shade plants that produce a foam of tiny pink or white flowers in the spring that hover above beautifully lobed leaves, which often feature dark veining.

Look for varieties like 'Running Tapestry', which is available from Nature Hills, if you want a groundcover that fills in gaps quickly, or 'Sugar and Spice' for symmetrical, frosted leaves. 'Oakleaf' is another winner, with gorgeous bronze-colored new growth and an excellent clump-forming habit. Most varieties are hardy in zones 3-8 and stay relatively compact, rarely exceeding a few feet in height.

Foamflowers are native to US woodlands, and rarely bothered by disease. Just make sure soil is rich and moist, but not soggy. Make sure it drains well, as this plant won’t tolerate standing water. If your soil is rich, you don’t need fertilizer. While they don't require deadheading, a quick snip after spring blooming will encourage the plant to focus its energy on its gorgeous variegated leaves. These plants are perfect fillers around the base of larger shrubs like azaleas or rhododendrons.

6. Spotted Dead Nettle

It might not have the nicest name, but this plant doesn't sting. Spotted dead nettle (Lamium maculatum) is one of the most decorative, rugged groundcovers available. It features silver-washed leaves that seem to glow in the dark, topped with clusters of snapdragon-like flowers in spring and summer. In many US zones (especially 6 and higher), it remains evergreen, providing color even in winter.

'Beacon Silver' is a classic with pink flowers, while 'White Nancy' offers a crisp look with white blooms that gleam in deep shade. For a bit of drama, 'Purple Dragon' has exceptionally large, deep purple flowers. It’s an excellent choice for stabilizing a shady slope or carpeting the bare ground under a large tree, where grass has given up the ghost. You can buy Perennial Farm ‘Beacon Silver’ Spotted Dead Nettle Plants from Amazon. Dead nettle plants tend to reach 9 inches (23 cm) high.

While it is easy to grow, it can spread fast. To manage its spread, pull up wandering stems in spring; they have shallow roots and come out easily. This shade-lover prefers moist, loamy soil, but is famous for its ability to survive dry shade once established. If you're planting it in a container, it will trail elegantly over the edges. Pair with dark bugleweed for a spectacular display with zero maintenance.

Basic Care (If You Remember)

The beauty of a shade garden is that the sun isn't constantly baking the moisture out of the soil, which immediately cuts your workload in half. However, even these plants will appreciate a little love. The lazy gardener’s secret weapon is mulch. A 2-inch (5 cm) layer of shredded bark, leaf mold or an organic blend like Back to the Roots Organic Premium Mulch from Amazon keeps weeds down and moisture locked in.

To give some of these plants a real treat with minimal effort, add a slow-release granular fertilizer like Osmocote Plus Smart Release from Lowe’s. You only have to apply it once in spring, and it feeds the plants every time it rains. For pruning, don't overthink it. Most of these plants only need a clean up once a year to remove dead foliage. Using bypass pruners like the Fiskars Softgrip Bypass Pruning Shears from Amazon on a regular basis makes this a five-minute job rather than a weekend chore. Low maintenance shade garden care really can be this simple.

Colorful Shade Plant Heroes

Even the quietest, shadiest corners of your yard can become the focal point for dazzling bursts of color. Plant this trio of low-maintenance loveliness for full-blown perennial beauty in partial shade.

Need more ideas for timely gardening jobs and seasonal expert advice delivered straight to your inbox? Sign up for the free Gardening Know How Newsletter!

Want to get ahead and plump up your borders for months of summer color, but worried that if you plant too early, a late frost will scupper your plan? There’s a really easy solution to working out what you can plant in early spring, and it will bring abundant blooms for years to come, for very little effort. The trick is to see which hardy perennials are sold as bare root plants – because if plants are easy-going enough to survive with their roots out of soil for a week, they’ll be forgiving in your garden, too.

Any plant that tolerates this treatment is also naturally straightforward to grow, too. It’s a surefire way to get a border full of hardy, low maintenance plants that don’t need too much molly-coddling, as well as steal a head start on summer color.

What are Bare Root Plants?

Bare roots are simply plants that are sold without soil. Think of them as hibernating plants that won’t wake up until they have all three magic ingredients of moisture, warmth and nutrients. Now, it doesn’t matter whether you buy hardy perennials as bare roots or not – the point is that they can be sold soil-less, so they’re super-tough!

Luckily, lots of our most popular perennials fall into this category, as you can see from all our lovely recommendations below.

Can I Plant Before My Last Frost Date?

Planting before your last frost date is always a gamble. Some years, winter ends with a chilly blast; other years, it melts meekly into a mild spring. And last frost dates vary widely across the country, depending on your USDA zone. But these hardy perennials are tougher than most, mitigating the risk somewhat. Do judge for yourself when is the best time to plant, though, as some gardens are far more exposed than others.

The optimum time is once your soil has warmed up, so your plants can get growing straight away. Some bare roots, such as roses, can go into the ground at any point, as long as it's not frozen or waterlogged. For others, if it's still frosty or your ground is wet and cold when you buy them, simply start them off in pots in a sheltered spot of your garden, until that prime moment arrives (details of how to plant bare root are below).

Then, if an unexpected late, hard frost is forecast, you can protect any top growth by throwing over a cozy duvet of horticultural fleece, like this from Amazon.

What’s the Benefit of Planting Early?

Aside from getting a long summer of colorful flowers, it’s often cheaper to plant early. Potted perennial plant prices tend to shoot up as soon as we hit growing season. And if you buy these hardy perennials as bare roots, that’s often cheaper again, as they cost less to transport.

All these fabulous flowering plants can be bought as bare roots and, being perennials, will bounce back every year.

1. Geums

Once you’ve got these little darlings in your garden, you’ll never want to be without them! Avens typically flower from late spring into summer, filling an often bare between-seasons gap in the garden, and are hardy in zones 4–9. Though they only grow 1–2 feet tall, geums are members of the rose family and bring that quiet grace to any garden space in sun or partial shade.

Geum ‘Mai Tai' is a delightful blend of apricot and soft yellow tones, made all the more beautiful by their red stems. Geum ‘Tequila Sunrise’ brings yellow petals tipped with a brush of rosy pink; and Geum ‘Flames of Passion’ has dramatic red blooms set off by dark green leaves. All are available bare root from Dutch Grown.

2. Astrantia

How adorable are these dainty bursts of color, each surrounded by a papery ruff of almost translucent petals? Hardy perennials, Astrantia thrive in sun and part shade in zones 4–7, with some cultivars able to cope with warmer climates. They mingle happily with other plants and there are varieties with stems varying from 1–3 feet tall, so you can grow them through grasses or under a bigger perennial such as a rose.

Astrantia ‘Major Shaggy’ is a reliable perennial prized by many gardeners, just 18 inches high with white flowers perfect for lighting up the front of a border. Cultivars mostly have muted tones, but there are punchy exceptions. Astrantia ‘Major Venice’ has flowers in a strong but stylish shade of pink, while Astrantia ‘Major Claret’, as its name suggests, has blooms in a deep red-wine hue. All are available from Dutch Grown.

3. Rudbeckia

No garden should be without these easy-to-grow perennial daisies which are typically hardy in zones 3–9. Give Black-Eyed Susan a sunny spot and they’ll bloom from summer into fall, feeding pollinators with a rich supply of nectar.

Rudbeckia fulgida ‘Goldsturm’ (available potted from Burpee) is a classic, for good reason, as it flowers prolifically and, once established, is virtually maintenance-free, making it a great option for a front yard. Shorter at two feet high but with larger flowers, Rudbeckia fulgida ‘Pot of Gold’ (available bare root from Burpee) is fab in a container. Or, if you like to stand out from the crowd, what about Rudbeckia occidentalis ‘Black Beauty’ (available bare root from Dutch Grown)? It doesn’t have petals at all, but sculptural central cones with a ring of golden pollen, surrounded by a shapely green ruff.

4. Roses

March is your last chance to get a bare root rose into the ground, and this is such a good, cost-effective way to add this garden favorite to your backyard. Plenty of varieties grow well in partial shade as well as sun, so there’s sure to be one that suits your space. Shrub roses are widely regarded as the hardiest, and plenty are heat tolerant, so there’s something for every zone, too.

If you want to add fragrance, then the pale peach-pink blooms of Rosa ‘Desdemona’ have an irresistible intense myrrh fragrance – grow it in your front yard and it’ll stop neighbors in their tracks! It’s available bareroot from Burpee. Want color? Rosa ‘Lady of Shalott’, also available from Burpee, has glorious orange-red blooms that open to salmon-pink petals backed in golden yellow – and even if this is your first time growing a rose, it’s super-easy to look after. Or how about growing a rose as groundcover? Rosa ‘Meiswetdom’, commonly known as Sweet Drift, is available potted from Perfect Plants Nursery and is very cold-hardy, drought-tolerant, spreading to 3 feet but only growing 1–2 feet high.

5. Hardy Geraniums

These cheery easy-to-grow cranesbill geraniums add cottage-garden charm to any backyard and are a great filler around taller perennial plants, happily growing through other foliage. They bloom for months and, if you cut them back hard once the first flowers fade, you’ll often be rewarded with a second flush. And they pretty much look after themselves, with some varieties hardy down to Zone 4.

My favourites are those with artful petals. Geranium pratense ‘Double Jewel’ has flurries of white petals with purple-pink hearts, while Geranium cinereum ‘Jolly Jewel Lilac’ brings vibrant heavy-veined blooms; Geranium pratense ‘Splish Splash’ has speckled white, lilac and purple flowers that look like they’re hand-painted. All are available bare root from Dutch Grown.

6. Coreopsis

Suitable for zones 3–9, these chipper little flowers will cheer up any garden, blooming abundantly on 10–18 inch stems for months through summer. Breeders have been busy and there are all sorts of pretty cultivars so, if you’re not a fan of the regular bright yellow tickseed, don’t write off this stress-free sun-loving flower that will bring butterflies to your backyard. Compact with an upright growth habit, these well-behaved little lovelies are a must-have.

Coreopsis ‘Moonbeam’ is a mellow, creamy yellow, while Coreopsis ‘UpTick Cream’ has ivory-petalled daisies with a golden centre; both are available potted from Burpee. Coreopsis ‘Solar Fancy', available bare root from Dutch Grown, has striking cherry-red flowers edged in yellow.

7. Echinacea

These beauties require very little looking after, and there are so many amazing coneflower cultivars now available. Typically suitable for zones 3–9, these easy-going, easy-growing daisies love a sunny spot.

This Echinacea ‘Blackberry Truffle’ brings cherry-pink pom pom blooms on distinctive dark stems, and is available bare root from Burpee. Or how about the elegant, swept-back two-tone petals of Echinacea ‘Pretty Parasols’, also available bare root from Burpee? This Echinacea ‘Strawberry and Cream’ is an absolute cracker, too, with its bouffant centre surrounded by notched white petals, and is available bare root from Dutch Grown.

8. Persicaria

Here’s something a little different! Persicaria, also known as mountain fleece, adds vertical interest from midsummer to early fall with abundant flower spikes that pollinators adore. As its name suggests, this perennial is tough, too, hardy in zones 3–9, enjoying partial shade in warmer climates and full sun in chillier temperatures. If you want to bring a cottagecore vibe to your garden, soften formal planting, or attract pollinators, it’s a stylish choice.

For showstopper spires, Persicaria amplexicaulis ‘Fat Domino’ grows to 4 feet tall with five-inch flowers in a rich red; Persicaria amplexicaulis ‘Summer Dance’ is more graceful with slender, arching spires in a pretty pink, growing up to 3½ foot high. Still too big? Try small cousin Persicaria affinis ‘Kabouter’, a dwarf fleeceflower. It only reaches a foot high with flower spikes that mature from a deep pink to paler blush tones. All are available as bare roots from Dutch Grown.

How Do I Plant Bare Root Plants?

It’s easy! First, you’ll need to soak your bare root in a bucket of water for between 30 minutes and 6 hours (the packaging will tell you the exact right time period) to rehydrate it. Dig a hole around three times the size of your bare root and mix some nutrients such as these worm castings from Amazon into the excavated soil. Position the plump bare root at the right height – you’ll often be able to see a ‘tide mark’ (where there’s a slight color-change on the stem showing the previous soil level) to guide you, without bending any roots. Backfill with the improved soil, firm the ground with your heel or hands, and water well.

You should plant your bare root as soon as possible after it arrives. If your soil is frozen or waterlogged, or if you’re worried about frosts, then plant your bare root in a temporary pot and keep it in a sheltered part of your garden until conditions improve. Once you see stems emerging from the compost, and the weather’s warmed up, move it into your border. This is a great way to plant a bare root at the optimum moment in spring anyway: a few weeks in a pot will let it wake up and start growing a stronger root system before.

As a gardener, I’ve learned that what we do in these in-between weeks of March and April sets the stage for everything that follows. When we provide high-quality nectar and pollen right out of the gate, we aren't just being kind to the bees in spring: we are bribing them to stay. And a bee that finds a reliable food source in your yard in March is more likely to stick around to pollinate your apple blossoms in May and tomatoes in June. It’s a beautiful arrangement – feed them now, and they’ll feed you later.

Bees seek pollen and nectar as soon as they emerge, and for many of them, now is the time. When selecting plants for your pollinator garden, certain well-appointed early spring-blooming plants are a lifeline for these fast-emerging pollinators, helping the likes of mining bees, queen bumble bees, mason bees and hoverflies to forage. But just as crucially, it sets up your own yard for a richer biodiversity, a more vibrant cultivation network, and hopefully a rolling supply of vibrant flowers and hearty crops.

Supporting your neighborhood’s early risers with a resilient, intentional landscape helps to bridge the gap between a sleepy winter and a long, lush summer – for both your bees and your ambitious garden hopes. By choosing these life-saver flowering varieties, your spring bees and resident pollinators are sure to thank you later by helping you cultivate a rich tapestry of ornamental borders and yummy harvests.

6 Spring Flowers for Pollinators

These early spring flowers are some of the first responders when it comes to feeding bees in spring, as well as a host of other pollinating insects. They push through the frost to offer up life-sustaining sugars and proteins. Of course, we should be making space for the big “event” plants that are just starting to stretch and slide their way back into life (and yes, we all love a fluffy peony, a flamboyant dahlia, and a voluminous hydrangea). But the 6 early flowering delights in this roundup can give just as much pleasure to us as they do to our hungry resident pollinators.

As long as you’ve checked your growing zone and soil conditions, you should be able to plant and cultivate these flowering plants so they burst forth with color while those other plants are still sleeping. These selections are curated for a tiered buffet, catering to pollinators on different levels. These trees, shrubs, perennials, and ephemerals reinforce that vibrant diversity that different pollinators crave, assisting them where (and when) they need it most. So start as you mean to go on, and keep pollinators loyal to your landscape all year long. Get these 6 special flowering plants in the ground now for early nectar and pollen foragers, as live plants or bare roots – and get ready for a lovely long season of joyous pollination wins.

1. Pussy Willow

The pussy willow is the unsung hero of the early spring landscape. Their fuzzy catkins aren't just cute, they’re furry to protect the tiny flowers inside from the cold. For honey bees and efficient mason bees, these are some of the first available sources of high-energy pollen. Pussy willow is also a host plant to several moths and butterflies, including the cecropia moth, Eastern tiger swallowtail butterfly, and mourning cloak butterfly. If you’re lucky enough to catch sight of a mourning cloak stealing goodness from these catkins while the rest of the world is still gray, you know you’re setting up your backyard for a flurry of activity.

These moisture-loving, multi-stemmed shrubs grow in full sun and reach 10-20 feet (3-6 m). Try to get male plants, as they produce the pollen-rich yellow catkins. If you have a damp spot in your yard (in USDA zones 4-8), rejoice. They can thrive in soil that stays moist where other plants might rot. If yours is looking a bit leggy, don't be afraid to coppice it (cut it back hard) every few years in late spring, after it flowers. This encourages those long, straight stems that produce the best catkins. To monitor your soil’s moisture levels, it’s worth testing it. Use the Luster Leaf Rapitest 4-In-1 Soil Meter from Amazon to make sure you aren't letting these water-loving shrubs dry out (it’s also great for gauging pH levels, fertility, and sunlight).

You can get a lovely Hirt’s Gardens Mini Weeping Pussy Willow from Amazon if you are short on space. For bigger yard spaces, buy a French Pussy Willow Trees from Nature Hills with its soft gray, pink and gray catkins. I also recommend the 'French Pink' variety for its color flush, or 'Black Knight' for a moody deep-purple bees adore. Other varieties for early bees include goat willow, prairie willow, and silky willow.

2. Hellebore (Helleborus)

Tough as nails, hellebores are often blooming while there is still a dusting of snow on the ground. Because their flowers are cup-shaped and often nod downward, they protect the nectar from being diluted by spring rains, which is a huge win for a bee that needs a concentrated energy hit. This diverse group of Hellebores (Helleborus spp.), which includes the Lenten rose, is the true royalty of the late-winter garden.

Hellebores are hardy in USDA zones 5-9 and are famously deer-resistant. They prefer dappled shade and rich, organic soil. Once they are in, leave them be, as they have sensitive roots and hate being moved. Give hellebores a good mulching with well-rotted leaf mold in late winter, though. This mimics the forest floor and keeps the soil pH slightly acidic to neutral.

Look for the 'Honeyberry' or 'Ivory Prince' varieties. You can buy green-tinted cream and rose ‘Ivory Prince’ Hellebores as live plants from Burpee, and the ‘Frost Kiss’ Lenten Rose Series from Nature Hills. You can also buy Perennial Farm Lenten Rose ‘Rose Quartz’ from Amazon.

Hellebore petals are actually sepals (leaves that look like petals). This is why the flowers feel like they last for months. While real petals fade once pollinated, these tough sepals stay on the plant to protect the developing seeds, acting like a little greenhouse that keeps the center of the flower several degrees warmer than the outside air, giving bees a warm meal on a cold day. As spring flowers for bees go, that’s pretty awesome.

3. Prunus (Early Fruit Trees)

The Prunus genus (including cherries, plums, and apricots) represents the heavy hitters of the spring garden. These aren't just pretty trees, they are workhorses of pollination. If you have a vegetable garden, having one of these trees in service nearby is like erecting a roadside diner for every bee in the county. These trees are truly generous, providing a massive volume of flowers that seems to appear all at once, which is essential for queen bees trying to build up their first brood of workers.

Cherry trees attract bumblebees, honey bees, and butterflies. The native black cherry and choke cherry are excellent choices, too. For the earliest blooms, look toward the 'Mexican Plum' (Prunus mexicana) or the 'Okame' Cherry. These trees put on a genuinely lovely show, as long as they get access to full sun and well-drained soil (USDA zones 5-9). You can buy the frothy carmine-pink ‘Okame’ Cherry from Fast Growing Trees as a live plant, but just make sure it gets at least 4-6 hours of sun daily to develop those bee-friendly blossoms.

These fruit trees can be prone to aphids and scale. Instead of reaching for a spray that might harm bees, use a high-quality hand lens like the Carson MicroBrite Plus from Amazon, to inspect the buds early in March. If you catch an infestation early, you can often manage it with a blast of water or neem oil before the flowers open. Finally, if you only have room for one of these trees, plums (like Prunus cerasifera) typically bloom 1–2 weeks earlier than most ornamental cherries. For a starving bee, that one-week head start is the difference between a feast and a famine.

4. Serviceberry (Amelanchier)

If I could convince every gardener to plant just one native tree, it would be the serviceberry (Amelanchier spp.). It’s a four-season superstar, and its bee-friendly cred is just a part of its charm. In early spring (USDA zones 2-8), it is covered in lace-like white flowers that attract hoverflies and native bees. By June, those flowers turn into delicious berries which the birds will absolutely be fighting you for.

Serviceberries are incredibly adaptable. They can handle full sun to part shade and are a fantastic native alternative to the invasive Bradford Pear. 'Autumn Brilliance' stays a manageable size and has a gorgeous fall color. If you have a small space, look for 'Standing Ovation' Serviceberry, with its narrow, upright habit for suburban lots. You can buy ‘Autumn Brilliance’ Serviceberry from Fast Growing Trees or ‘Smokey’ Serviceberry Trees from Nature Hills for cold-hardiness and happy queen bees (as well as those terrific berries to feed the birds later).

For the most blooms (and the best spring feed for bees), ensure your soil is slightly acidic. If your soil is alkaline, add a handful of Espoma Organic Holly-Tone Feed from Lowe's around the drip line in March, for that acidic boost the tree needs to produce that shimmering profusion of flowers.

5. Red Maples

Most people think of maples as fall trees, but for your hungry bee, the red maple (Acer rubrum) is a spring savior. Long before the leaves appear, these trees explode in tiny, ruby-red flowers. And because these flowers are high up in the canopy, they offer a safe, wind-protected foraging space for bees on blustery March days.

Red maples are incredibly hardy (USDA zones 3-9) and handle wet feet better than almost any other large shade tree. The key is to buy own-root trees rather than grafted ones where possible, as they tend to be more resilient to cold snaps. 'October Glory' and 'Red Sunset' are classic choices, but for a spectacular early spring show, the 'Northfire' variety is awesome. Buy the stunning ‘Autumn Blaze’ Red Maple from Fast Growing Trees to charm honeybees and bumbles.

These trees reach 50-60 feet (15-18 m) tall at maturity. Because their flowers are so high up, it’s hard to see the pollinator party happening. I recommend a good pair of binoculars, such as the Nikon Trailblazer from Amazon, to watch the activity in the upper branches. It’s a nice way to appreciate the scale of life your tree is supporting.

6. Spring Ephemerals

These early spring flowers for pollinators are "blink and you'll miss them" garden treasures. Plants like Virginia bluebells (Mertensia virginica) and trillium (Trillium grandiflorum) have evolved to bloom and go to seed before big trees leaf out and block the sun. You can also try Virginia spring beauty (Claytonia virginica) in zones 3-9, and wild hyacinth (Camassia scilloides) in zones 4-8. They all supply nectar and pollen for early native bees and honey bees. Wild hyacinth prefers more sun than the others, but part shade will do. The long, tubular flowers of Virginia bluebells are a favorite of long-tongued bees, and even early-returning hummingbirds in the south.

Native spring ephemerals need rich, moist, undisturbed soil (USDA zones 3-8). Virginia bluebells will naturalize and spread over time if they are happy. Trillium is a bit more finicky, but worth the effort for its stunning white blooms. You can find high-quality native ephemerals like White Trillium, available from Amazon, as bare roots for planting now. You can also buy Virginia Bluebells as roots from Amazon.

Since these plants disappear and go dormant by mid-summer, you need to mark their location with a decorative garden stake so you don't accidentally dig them up when planting your summer annuals. Mark your ground while you can with decorative markers like the decorative Temlum Wooden Plant Labels from Amazon.

More Pollinator Essentials

These early spring flowers for bees will keep pollinators coming back to your yard, fostering healthier plants and more productive crops. But if you want to add even more pollinator power to your yard, try these curated items. Guaranteed to support your early risers (and early returning hummers) and level up your garden's pollinator-friendly credentials.

Need more ideas for getting the most from your plants, indoors and out, and looking for the best seasonal expert advice delivered straight to your inbox? Sign up for the free Gardening Know How Newsletter!

Spring: a time of hope and renewal, when daffodils are nodding, the lilac is budding, birds start chirping a bit louder, and your neighbor's tulips look amazing (as usual). But something’s not quite right in your yard. While spring is unfolding elsewhere, your favorite plants are still looking a bit (how to say this?)… well, sort of dead.

You’re hoping for signs of life, but instead your beloved shrub or perennial looks skeletal-looking or a stump of sad-looking branches. It’s tempting to grab the shovel, assume the worst, resolve to cut your losses, and drop a few hundred dollars on replacements. But before you declare a state of mourning, take a deep breath. What appears to be a write-off might just be plants dormant for a bit longer than the norm.

Your favorite plant might not be dead, it might just be having a long nap. Extended plant dormancy is a real thing, and some plants love to hit the snooze button. Being a late sleeper is a clever survival strategy. These plants are waiting for consistently warm soil temperatures to ensure they don't get nipped by a late-season frost. So before you reach for the spade, here are 8 plants you may have caught napping – and the 3 easy ways to check they will wake up, soon(ish).

Are Your Plants Dead or Sleeping?

During winter, deciduous plants pull their energy down into their root system, shedding leaves to prevent moisture loss and entering a state of suspended animation. When spring arrives, certain dormant plants require specific cues to wake up. Some respond to the length of the day, while others (the late sleepers) wait for the perfect soil temperature to hold steady. If the ground is still cool, or your growing area has had a particularly deep freeze, that wake-up call will get delayed.

So when plants are slow to break dormancy, how can you tell if they are dead or alive? Before you panic, first perform these 3 simple checks:

• Scratch Test: Use your thumbnail or a clean pruning blade to gently scrape a small sliver of bark off a stem. If you see a layer of moist, vibrant green (the cambium), the plant is alive and well. If it’s brown and brittle all the way through, that specific branch may be dead, but the crown could still be alive. Try a few different stems to be sure.
• Snap Test: Gently bend a small twig. A living (dormant) branch will be flexible and supple, but a dead one will snap with a clean, dry break.
• Bud Vitality Test: Slice a bud in half, making a crosswise cut. A living bud will be green and fleshy, while a dead one will be dry and hollow.

For the slicing and scraping tests, use a clean, sharp blade to prevent tearing plant tissue. I recommend the Felco F-2 Classic Pruning Shears from Amazon, or a high-quality hori hori knife like the Full Tang Walnut Handle Hori Hori from Wayfair for precise scraping.

It’s also wise to check soil warmth (often the reason for the delay). You can buy the Luster Leaf Rapitest Soil Thermometer from Amazon to ascertain when healthy late sleepers are finally likely to stir.

8 Late-Sleeping Plants in Spring

It also helps to have a sense of predictably late risers. Just keep in mind that local micro-climates matter, as does your hardiness zone and region. A plant in a sun-drenched, south-facing bed has a better chance of waking up weeks before the same variety planted in a shaded, damp corner. And it would be reductive to compare your garden’s growing situation to that of a friend three towns over. Every yard has its own idiosyncratic alarm settings.

Age plays a role, too; younger plants with shallower root systems often feel the warmth sooner, while established granddaddy shrubs have more thermal mass to warm up. That said, there are a few famously late sleepers that always seem to keep people waiting as spring arrives. Here are 8 common plants that are slow to break dormancy. Don’t be too quick to give these garden favorites up for dead!

1. Amsonia (Blue Star)

Amsonia (A. tabernaemontana) is a bit of a tease as spring ventures close. Known for its ethereal blue flowers and stunning gold fall foliage, it is notorious for staying underground while its neighbors rise 6 inches (15 cm) high. Native to the eastern US (in USDA zones 3-9), it waits for the soil to hit a consistent 60F (15.5C) before it decides to poke through, which can often be delayed until mid-late May in northern climates.

Because the shoots emerge as dark, pointed spears, amsonia can be mistaken for weeds or ignored until May. The reason for the delay is its deep root system that focuses on stability before upward growth. If you’re worried, don't dig. Just gently brush away the mulch to look for those purple-tipped noses. To help it along, ensure the soil is well-draining. Heavy, cold clay can keep amsonia snoring even longer.

2. Butterfly Weed

If there were an award for Most Likely to be Accidentally Dug Up, it would have to go to butterfly weed (Asclepias tuberosa). This vital host for monarch butterflies (USDA zones 3-9) is a bona fide heat-seeker. It rarely shows its face until the ground is truly warm, and even then maybe not until May in northern climates. To avoid planting on top of your sleeping asclepias, mark the spot with decorative markers, like these sweet rustic Temlum Decorative Wooden Plant Markers from Amazon.

The long dormancy is a defense mechanism for its fleshy taproot, which is sensitive to rot in cold, wet spring soil. If you suspect this native milkweed might be dead, look for the remains of last year's stems. If they are still firmly attached to the crown and haven't mushed out, the plant is likely fine. Test the soil to ensure the dormant roots aren't sitting in a puddle, which is the only thing that will truly kill this resilient native.

3. Crape Myrtle

In the south, the crape myrtle (Lagerstroemia) is royalty, but in USDA zones 6-7, it’s a source of annual anxiety. These heat-loving shrubs are tropical at heart and hate cold feet, so it’s hardly surprising that they don't wake up until the ground is warm. It is normal to see a skeleton of grey bark well into spring, maybe June. Even cultivars like 'Natchez' or 'Muskogee' which are bred for vigor follow the "late start" rule.

The danger here is winterkill, where upper branches die back but roots survive. Use our scratch test on the trunk. If the top is brown but the base is green, the plant is still alive. You might just need to prune it to the living wood. These plants thrive in pH-neutral soil, so give the ground a spring top-dress with aged organic compost to provide the nutrients it needs.

4. Hardy Hibiscus

Do not (I repeat, do not) remove rose mallow or hardy hibiscus (H. moscheutos) until you have given it until mid-June, at the earliest. These perennials (which thrive in USDA zones 4-9) are champions of the late-morning lie-in. While the rest of the garden is in full swing, naptime-loving hibiscus still looks like dead sticks. Coveted for its blooms, it languishes under ground, waiting for high humidity and warm nights.

Its dormancy is deep because it produces massive amounts of leaves (the size of dinner plates) in a short window. So it saves all its energy until the conditions are perfect for a sprint. If you're nervous, check the base for tiny, red-colored buds near the soil line. A light application of slow-release fertilizer like Scotts Continuous Release Fertilizer from Amazon in late May can encourage it to break cover. It is one of the last perennials to emerge in spring, so don’t give up on it. Once it emerges, it grows quickly, producing a mass of joyous blooms for the rest of summer.

5. Rose of Sharon

Unlike its perennial cousin above, Rose of Sharon (Hibiscus syriacus) is a woody shrub, but it shares the same snooze-worthy DNA. Rose of Sharon (which thrives in USDA zones 5-9) is often one of the very last shrubs in the neighborhood to break dormancy and leaf out. It can look dead in May, only to explode with green foliage in June.

Because it blooms on new wood, there is no rush for it to wake up early. It’s a long-day plant by nature, and its biological clock is tuned to late-summer flowering where it can reliably get more than 12 hours a day. So to ensure it has the best wake-up call, ensure it's in full sun. Plants languishing in partial shade are likely to sleep even longer.

6. Balloon Flower

The balloon flower (Platycodon) is a delightful perennial (USDA zones 3-8) that gets its name from its swellable, air-filled buds. However, in April, it is basically invisible. It sleeps until late spring, and is often one of the last perennials to wake up. The balloon flower has a thick, white, carrot-like taproot that stays tucked deep underground until the threat of frost is gone.

Because the new growth is often a dark, inconspicuous maroon, it’s easy to step on or hoe over, so be sure to place some markers gently in the soil. Instead of worrying, give it a light dressing of pine bark mulch such as Brut Aspen Mulch from Amazon to keep root temperature stable, which can sometimes lead to an earlier emergence.

7. False Indigo (Baptisia)

Baptisia is a tough-as-nails North American native (hardy in USDA zones 3-9) that produces gorgeous pea-like blooms in vibrant violet-blue hues. It is also pretty stubborn when it comes to rising and shining. It waits for consistently warm soil because its initial growth spurt is extremely rapid. It can grow several feet in a matter of weeks, and it cannot afford to have that succulent new growth frozen.

If your baptisia hasn't appeared by Mother's Day, don't worry. It’s likely just building its nitrogen-fixing root nodules underground. This plant is a long-term investment and it should stir from its slumbers by late spring. It can live for decades, so look at it this way – a few weeks of extra sleep is nothing in the grand scheme of its life. To check its health, look for the previous year's skeleton. If the crown feels solid and not mushy to a gentle toe-tap, it’s fine.

8. Bigleaf Hydrangea

In terms of visual dynamics, the bigleaf hydrangea is something of a drama queen, and likes to make its presence felt. It’s ironic that it can feel like a ghost when spring hits the backyard – and a bona fide late sleeper when many other parts of the yard come to life. It often looks like a collection of dead sticks long after other hydrangea varieties (like the panicle) have leafed out. This is because H. macrophylla buds are sensitive to yo-yo spring temperatures, especially in colder climates.

Bigleaf hydrangeas (hardy in USDA zones 5-11) often keep buds tightly closed and brown-looking as a protective shield against late frosts. Use our bud-slicing test here. If you see green inside those dead-looking scales, leave it alone. If you prune it too early, you'll cut off this year's flowers. For these late sleepers, a frost blanket like Greenscapes Spun-Bond Frost Blanket from Wayfair can be a lifesaver, especially during those deceptive April warm spells that are followed by a freeze. Hold tight, and you’ll be seeing those billowy large flower heads by summer.

Companions for Late Spring Sleepers

While you wait for your late sleepers to wake up, your garden doesn't have to look empty. Plant these early birds nearby to provide color and structure while the stars of the show are still in bed. Here are a few gorgeous spring risers you can tuck into the ground now next to your snoozing hibiscus.

Need more ideas for getting the most from your plants, indoors and out, and looking for the best seasonal expert advice delivered straight to your inbox? Sign up for the free Gardening Know How Newsletter!

Hard pruning is a gardening technique that should be used selectively. Not all plants benefit from this type of drastic cutting. However, some that do include certain summer flowering shrubs which gardeners rate highly for ornamental displays. Giving these shrubs a winter prune for summer sets the stage for healthy, spectacular growth later – and ultimately dazzling displays, floral or foliage based.

But it can be tough to take to the shears even when you know it’s for the best. Panic can set in when you think about the displays at stake, and that’s understandable enough. So before you dive into this February gardening chore, it helps to understand the pruning basics, which tools to use, and how to make those cuts. Get this right, and your shrubs will bounce back in spectacular fashion.

Here, we explore the transformative power of a hard prune in February and how it can be so important for key flowering shrubs in summer. Appreciating why it is the secret to explosive growth, generous blooms, and vibrant foliage can make these timely cuts less daunting – and more of a show of love for your shrubs. Here’s why you need to be a little heartless with your pruning shears right now…

Why Tough Love Pruning is Essential

A hard prune means cutting back most of a plant, most of the way to the ground. This can be tough for gardeners to do initially, as it feels like you’re destroying your beloved flowering shrubs. Indeed, some gardeners are so intimidated, they put it off, cross their fingers, and hope for the best - but not pruning at all would be a mistake.

If you read up on pruning, you know that you’re often told not to remove more than one-third of a plant at once. A hard prune is an exception to this rule, and is the right move for certain plants at specific times. So when is this pruning the right thing to do, and with what?

The types of plants that benefit from a “tough love” winter prune for summer growth are specific summer-flowering shrubs. These shrubs bloom on new growth, so cutting back old growth now won’t reduce flowering. In fact, it will rejuvenate the entire shrub, ensuring healthy growth and even more flowers.

A hard prune now stimulates new growth, which helps your shrub put out more flowers later. February is the right time for this pruning in many growing zones, because the shrubs are still dormant. Pruning in dormancy reduces stress on the plant. Just avoid cutting in very cold weather. Pruning frozen stems may cause the wood to shatter or crack, leaving the plant vulnerable to rot.

Tough Love Cuts to Try Now

There are a few factors to consider for late winter pruning to create stunning flowering shrubs in summer. The more technical term for this type of pruning is coppicing, sometimes called stumping, because what you’re left with is essentially a stump of the plant.

The two main options for this type of pruning are a hard prune and a total rejuvenation. The latter is more severe, cutting all of the plant back to inches from the ground. Rejuvenation is best done every few years and on shrubs that have become overgrown.

A slightly less severe hard prune is similar, but allows you to keep more of the existing shrub. You can do this every year. Completely cut out any branches that are diseased, damaged, or dead (also known as the 3 Ds). Cut the rest of the branches back close to the base of the plant, leaving two or three buds on each. This will leave you with a much smaller shrub, but more than just a stump.

Before you start cutting, sanitize your pruning tools with a quick wipe of isopropyl alcohol. You can buy Epic Medical 70% Isopropyl Alcohol from Amazon. Wiping blades before and after use ensures you don’t spread pathogens. Right, without further ado, let’s start snipping…

1. American Beautyberry

For bright, nearly neon color and native credentials, the American beautyberry (Callicarpa americana) is a special shrub to cultivate. The bright purple color of beautyberry actually comes from the berries, not the flowers. But, to enjoy multiple clusters of the fall berries, you’ll need a good flush of summer flowers so you must prune this shrub before winter ends.

Beautyberry shrubs grow up to 6 feet (1.8 m) tall and wide and are hardy in USDA zones 6-10. They prefer full sun or partial shade and are low-maintenance. You can cut beautyberry shrubs back to about a foot (30 cm) from the ground in late winter, setting the stage for plenty of summer flowers that transform into showy berries later. Use a strong set of shears, and loppers on branches over an inch in thickness. You can buy the highly rated Fiskars PowerGear 32-Inch Bypass Loppers from Amazon.

For the most dramatic berry display, aim for a staggered cut where some stems are slightly shorter than others. This creates a fuller, more tiered look rather than a flat-topped crew cut when the foliage returns.

2. Annabelle Hydrangea

For spectacularly large summer flowers, hydrangeas rate highly. And for voluminous impact, it’s hard to beat ‘Annabelle’ which is a variety of smooth hydrangea (Hydrangea arborescens ‘Annabelle’). Other types of hydrangeas have different pruning times, based on how they flower. But smooth hydrangea varieties flower on new growth, so you can cut back old growth in late winter to stimulate new growth and more stunning blooms.

You can give your ‘Annabelle’ hydrangea a pretty severe cut every couple of years. Cut all stems most of the way to the ground. In alternate years, remove damaged or weak stems. Annabelle is a large shrub, growing up to six feet (1.8 m) wide. It’s hardy in zones 3-8, it can tolerate some shade, and it needs regular watering throughout the growing season.

While hard pruning is popular, avoid cutting all the way to the soil every year. Leaving 18–24 inches (45-61 cm) of old, woody framework helps support the massive flower heads, preventing them from flopping over after a summer rainstorm. Always aim for precision cuts. For that surgical edge that won’t damage your precious hydrangea stems, the highly rated Okatsune 103 Bypass Pruners from Amazon are satisfyingly efficient.

3. Smoke Bush (aka Smoke Tree)

Smoke bush (or smoke tree) is aptly named for the delicate texture of its flower clusters, which make the shrub appear as if it’s surrounded by clouds of smoke. Smoke bush (Cotinus coggygria) is a popular choice for flowers, but also its foliage, which can often be purple. All varieties have spectacular fall color. They are hardy in zones 4-9, can grow as tall as 15 feet (4.6 m), and thrive in full sun.

Smoke bush is better suited to a hard pruning than a total rejuvenation, unless it has become overgrown. If you are pruning your smoke bush specifically for those smoky flowers, be gentler. However, if you want massive, oversized purple leaves, go for the stumping method. This coppicing results in foliage that can be double the size of unpruned leaves, though you may sacrifice some of the airy blooms.

In this case, prune back about two-thirds of the stems, leaving the rest. For the tallest branches, don’t struggle – grab an extendable tree pruner like the Fiskars XtendControl Tree Pruner from Amazon, a smart high-reach option for oversized plants (and it comes with a free saw). You can also prune your smoke bush to grow like a small tree. Find a strong, central, and upright branch and prune away lower stems. Continue this yearly.

Support Shrubs After a Hard Prune

Even when you time it right and follow good practices for hard pruning, this type of cut can be a little stressful for a plant. Good aftercare is essential for keeping your shrub healthy and promoting new growth that will give you plenty of flowers later.

Water your stumpy shrub regularly until you start getting consistent spring rains. The soil should be moist but not waterlogged. Apply a good mulch around the shrub if you don’t already have some in place. Try well rotted aged manure or wood chips, or add Brut Organic Aspen Mulch from Amazon for an organic option. Make the layer 2-4 (5-10 cm) inches thick, leaving a space around the trunk to avoid bark rot.

If you expect a late freeze or frost, cover the pruned shrub with burlap, like Burloptuous High Density Burlap Jute from Amazon, to prevent cold damage and insulate the roots. This is especially important if the cold snap comes after the shrub has started to develop tender new growth.

Once you see some new growth, start fertilizing your shrub. Choose a fertilizer suitable for the particular plant, but generally, stay away from high-nitrogen products. These will promote fast but weak growth and foliage over flowers. A great slow-release option for shrubs is Arber Granular Fertilizer from Amazon.

Hard pruning these and other summer bloomers is a February chore that will bring big rewards later. Just be sure to know what’s best for the specific shrubs you have. Don’t prune your spring bloomers now. Wait to do those after they’ve flowered.

Shop Tough Love Essentials

When you need to make smooth, clean cuts, you need the right tools. To get the job done without tearing the bark, always work with sharp, professional-grade steel. Here are some of the best-in-class options:

Need more ideas for timely gardening jobs and seasonal expert advice delivered straight to your inbox? Sign up for the free Gardening Know How Newsletter!

Plant spacing guidelines exist to prevent disease and competition, but they're designed for in-ground row gardens with paths between—raised beds, containers, and intensive planting methods let you space plants way closer together without problems, though you'll need to water and feed more often.

Seed packets and plant tags list specific spacing. Tomatoes want 24-36 inches (60-90cm) apart. Lettuce asks for 8-12 inches (20-30cm). Follow those and the garden looks half-empty for weeks, bare soil everywhere while seedlings grow. Those numbers aren't wrong, but they're not the only way. They're based on traditional row gardening with space for walking and working. Raised beds or containers change everything—plants share the space better without paths eating real estate.

Vegetable spacing and flower spacing guidelines assume more room than many setups need. A healthy garden doesn't have to follow rules blindly. Tight spacing works fine in many cases, especially when soil stays rich and moisture steady. Bare soil dries fast, and weeds move in. Closer planting shades ground, holds water longer, and blocks weeds naturally.

Why Spacing Guidelines Exist

Proper spacing cuts disease risk. Plants too close together trap moisture, block air flow, or invite fungal trouble like powdery mildew or blight. Leaves touching in humid weather spreads problems fast. Roots compete for nutrients and water too—stunted growth, and lower yields follow.

Spacing shapes plant size as well. A tomato plant spaced with 36 inches (90cm) grows bigger, and produces more than one squeezed into 18 inches (45cm). Bigger isn't always better though. Smaller plants mature quicker sometimes, or more plants mean steady harvest instead of giant fruits all at once.

When Vegetables Actually Need Space

Big plants like tomatoes, squash, or melons need room—their roots spread wide, leaves shade large areas. Cram them and they fight for resources. These plants follow traditional spacing pretty closely for the best results.

Small fast crops handle tight spacing better. Lettuce, radishes, carrots, beets, herbs—they don't mind close neighbors. Plant dense and harvest young. Guidelines assume full size, but most pick lettuce and herbs continuously anyway. Closer means more food from the same bed.

Problems Traditional Spacing Creates

Wide spacing leaves soil exposed. Bare ground dries quicker, needs more mulch to stay moist, and gives weeds open invitation. Constant watering and weeding take over instead of harvesting.

Traditional spacing wastes space too. A 4x8 raised bed with tomatoes fits maybe four plants. Drop the spacing to 24 inches (60cm) between plants and six or seven grow. That's a real difference in limited areas. You can get tags like these reusable garden markers from Home Depot to help track dense plantings without confusion.

Intensive Planting Methods

Intensive planting spaces crops so that mature leaves just barely touch. This creates living mulch that shades the soil, holds moisture, and blocks weeds. Plants are arranged in offset, intercropping patterns instead of rows, which maximizes every inch. Companion planting within a square foot garden is a good example of this method.

The catch is higher demands on soil. More plants pull more nutrients and water. Amend the soil heavily with compost and feed regularly to offset this. This drip irrigation kit from Amazon delivers water right to roots in crowded beds without waste.

Spacing for Flowers

Ornamental annual flowers forgive tight spacing more. Plant close for an instant full look, or wider if patient. Annuals like marigolds and zinnias fill gardens quickly.

Perennials flowers differ. Space perennials to their mature size or you will have to divide them constantly. A hosta at 12 inches (30cm) crowds its neighbors in two years. The same happens for daylilies and coneflowers. Follow guidelines for perennials unless dividing yearly appeals to you.

Climate Affects Spacing

Humid climates need wider spacing. Moisture-loving fungi thrive when plants sit close in humidity. Add 25-50% more room than suggested, and it improves airflow and cuts disease.

Dry climates handle tighter spacing since fungal risk stays low. Hot areas benefit from close planting too—plants shade each other and soil, staying cooler and retaining moisture. Irrigation must keep up with extra demand though.

Container Growing

Container gardening forces close spacing. A 12-inch (30cm) pot won't fit three tomatoes at 24 inches (60cm). Container spacing depends on pot size and care willingness. Grow one big tomato in a 5-gallon bucket, or three smaller with heavy feeding and watering.

The rule for containers is simple: follow guideline numbers for plants, not physical distance. 12 inches (30cm) apart means one per square foot soil surface.

Seed packet spacing isn't law. It's a starting point. Adjust for your specific situation, climate, and goals. Do what works best for you.

Walk past your garden beds on a winter morning and you might notice plants that were snug in the soil last fall are now sitting an inch or two higher, their crowns exposed, roots visible. This isn't your imagination—it's frost heave, and it can kill perennials if you don't fix it.

Frost heave happens when repeated freezing and thawing cycles push plants right out of the ground, exposing roots to cold and wind—catch it early by checking for lifted crowns and mounded mulch, then gently backfill with soil and add protective mulch to save your perennials.

Frost heave shows up most often after those back-and-forth temperature swings that create the perfect conditions. Preventing frost heave in your garden starts with understanding what causes it.

Why Are My Plants Popping Out of the Ground?

Water in soil freezes and expands, which pushes everything upward—soil, plants, roots. Then temps warm up, things thaw and settle. The next cold snap freezes another layer, creating what's basically an ice lens under your plants. This happens over and over, uprooting plants a little higher each time.

The real damage happens when roots break or get fully exposed. Broken roots can't take up water or nutrients. Exposed roots dry out in the winter wind and freeze solid. The plant's crown sits there naked instead of protected by soil. Most perennials won't survive this for long.

Spot Frost Heave Early

Check your beds when temperatures fluctuate. Look for plants that seem taller than they should be, or mulch that's mounded up instead of flat. Pull back mulch and look at the crown—if you can see the top of the root system or there's a gap between crown and soil, that's frost heave.

Shallow-rooted perennials show it first. Coral bells, strawberries, mums, blanket flowers—they have roots that don't go deep, so they lift easily. Anything planted late fall is vulnerable too since roots haven't had time to anchor. Check low spots in your garden, since these hold more moisture and get hit harder by freeze-thaw cycles.

How to Replant Heaved Perennials Safely

Don't try jamming the plant back down into frozen soil. That compresses and damages roots. Instead, wait for a day when soil isn't frozen solid. Remove mulch carefully from around the plant. Add loose soil around the exposed roots and crown—just gently pat it enough to fill gaps and cover roots.

If the plant is leaning or loose, you might need to support it temporarily. These bamboo stakes from Amazon work well. Don't pull the plant tight against the stake; give it some slack. The goal is stability, not rigidity.

Dealing With Severe Cases

Sometimes plants are too far gone to fix midwinter. If roots are completely out of the ground and dried out, or the plant's flopping sideways, cover exposed roots with soil and mark the spot for spring. Pile on three to four inches (8-10cm) of mulch—heavier wood chips work better than straw.

These plants probably won't make it through winter, but at least the roots stay protected until you can dig them up in spring and replant at the right depth.

Mulching to Prevent Further Damage

Once you've fixed heaved plants, add a few inches of mulch to prevent it happening again. This recycled hardwood mulch from the Home Depot, shredded leaves, or pine needles all work for insulating soil and preventing heave.

Don't pile mulch directly on plant crowns though. Leave an inch or two of space around stems. Mulch sitting against crowns traps moisture and causes rot. The weight of mulch also helps keep from heaving as much.

Why This Keeps Happening

Clay and loam soils hold tons of moisture, which means more water available to freeze and expand. Sandy soil drains better and heaves less. If your beds keep having heave problems, working compost into soil improves drainage and reduces the issue.

Late planting causes heave too. Perennials need at least six weeks before first frost to establish roots. Plant in late September and roots don't have time to anchor before freeze-thaw cycles start.

How to Fix Frost Heave Long-Term

Spring planting gives perennials a full growing season to develop deep root systems that resist heaving. If you plant in fall, stick to early fall—late August or early September. Any later and you’ll need to baby plants through winter with heavy mulch and checks.

Improve drainage in problem areas. Raised beds heave less than low-lying spots. Working compost into clay soil helps water drain instead of sitting there ready to freeze. Choose deeper-rooted perennials for heave-prone areas. Peonies, daylilies, and hostas establish stronger root systems.

Check your beds regularly through winter. Catching heave early means you can fix it before roots die. A quick walk through the garden every few weeks during freeze-thaw weather saves plants.

Hydrangeas bloom in June and July, depending on location. But the chemistry which determines hydrangea colors gets set in February, when the root systems are waking up and start absorbing nutrients. So adjusting soil now can affect flowers that won't appear for another 4 months.

Most people add amendments right before flowering, as part of their hydrangea care routine. Sadly, this is unlikely to help. Roots aren't actively going to take up aluminum (the element controlling blue versus pink) unless soil amendments happen while plants are dormant or just starting spring growth.

Manipulating hydrangea color through hydrangea soil pH requires understanding of how aluminum availability works – months before anyone will see the results. The good news is that it only requires a simple shift in your soil chemistry now to turn a muddy hued hydrangea into a hot pink or vibrant, electric blue. Here’s how you can become a color alchemist with simple soil amendments.

Why February Matters

Before we find out how to change hydrangea color, it will help to understand the “why” of the process. Hydrangea roots will absorb aluminum from soil during active growth from late winter into early spring. That aluminum binds with pigments in developing flower buds, creating blue color. Low aluminum absorption means pink flowers using the same pigments differently.

So soil pH controls aluminum availability in the ground. Acidic soil (below pH 6.0) dissolves aluminum so roots can grab it more easily. Alkaline soil (above pH 7.0) locks aluminum in compounds plants can’t access. Adjusting pH in February gives any amendments time to move through the soil and reach the plant roots before the critical uptake period ends. Wait until May, and you’ll have missed it. At that point, the flower’s color destiny, if you will, has already been decided.

Understanding Hydrangea Soil pH

Acidic soil (where soil pH is 5.0-5.5) produces lush blue hydrangea colors. The low soil pH dissolves aluminum sulfate, making it accessible to roots searching for nutrients. More aluminum absorbed equals bluer flowers. Electric blue hydrangeas come from soils around pH 5.2, where there is adequate aluminum present in the soil to begin with.

Alkaline soil (pH 6.5-7.5) produces pink flowers by keeping aluminum locked up in forms roots can't use. Roots can't absorb what isn't available, so pigments default to pink or magenta or rose shades, depending on the variety. The exact pink shade varies by cultivar genetics, but the mechanism is the same.

Neutral soil (pH 6.0-6.5) creates purple or mixed colors as aluminum is partially available. Some flowers lean blue while others lean pink, creating that in-between look. You can test pH levels with a meter like the Yamron 4-in-1 Meter from Amazon.

What to Do Now for Color

Before you start, remember you aren't just changing the soil content – you’re changing how the plant feeds. Whether you’re chasing a deep sky blue or a dusty vintage pink, this timely application will act as the primary fuel for developing buds. Grab these essentials for your specific needs.

Shop Color Essentials

If You Want Blue Flowers

Apply aluminum sulfate or elemental sulfur in February to push for blue blooms. Aluminum sulfate hits faster, dropping pH while delivering aluminum straight to roots. Mix 1 tablespoon per gallon of water and pour around the drip line monthly from February into May, keeping levels steady during spring uptake.

Avoid high-phosphorus fertilizers (the middle number on the bag) during this time. Excess phosphorus can bind with aluminum and prevent it reaching the plant. Go with balanced or low-phosphorus options instead.

Scatter your soil treatment and work it into the top few inches in late winter. Soil microbes turn the soil more acidic gradually, so savvy timing really counts. If you’re looking for a faster-acting “blue-friendly” treatment, try Bonide Aluminum Sulfate from Amazon, water thoroughly, and recheck the soil levels a few weeks later.

If You Want Pink Flowers

Apply garden lime in February to lift soil pH for lush pink blooms. Spread according to the instructions, applying lightly into the top few inches around the base of the plant. Lime shifts the soil chemistry slowly, so early work lets it settle in before spring growth kicks off.

Watch amounts, though. Too much locks up iron and manganese, turning leaves yellow. Aim for a soil pH around 6.5-7.0. Dolomitic lime brings magnesium along too, which is handy where sandy or rained-out soils run short. Retest after a season to dial in the next year's dose.

Also, think about watering. If you have naturally acidic soil, try watering with tap water rather than rainwater. The slight alkalinity in many municipal water sources can help nudge your plants toward the pink spectrum over time. Keep checking soil levels at regular intervals over the next few months, using a combi soil meter like the Sonkir 3-in-1 Soil Meter from Amazon, which also checks light and moisture levels.

Which Hydrangeas Change Color

Adjusting hydrangea soil levels is a great way to influence bloom color – but it only applies to certain hydrangea varieties. You will find that bigleaf hydrangeas (Hydrangea macrophylla) respond most reliably to these changes. Mountain hydrangeas (H. serrata) follow suit. Although their flowers stay smaller, the color mechanism runs the same way.

Other types will hold steady, no matter what soil tweaks you try to make. Oakleaf hydrangeas keep their white blooms regardless of soil pH. Smooth varieties like 'Annabelle' stay white as well. Panicle hydrangeas open white and shift to pink or red naturally over the season, but that’s down to age, not soil chemistry. Climbing hydrangeas remain white through and through.

Even in bigleaf lines, a few cultivars may push strongly in one direction genetically. If you've amended for 2 full seasons without observing a real shift, your cultivar may simply be genetically stubborn. But it’s still worth giving this a try with bigleaf types.

Regional Differences

Acidic regions (like the Pacific northwest, and parts of the northeast) naturally lean toward blue hydrangeas, since the soil is already a low pH. Adding lime requires consistent application year after year to overcome naturally low pH that keeps reasserting itself. Sandy soils in these regions shift pH easier than clay soils.

Alkaline regions (southwest, parts of the Great Plains) favor pink flowers. Making soil acidic enough for blues takes aggressive sulfur or aluminum sulfate application annually, since soil chemistry fights back toward alkaline as amendments wear off.

Coastal areas with neutral soils are the most responsive when swinging the color in either direction. Using a home soil test kit in early February helps you identify your true starting point before amending so you know how much work you’re facing.

What Happens Next

Test soil pH in early February. This gives time to apply amendments before roots wake up from dormancy. Apply in mid-late February in most regions. Warmer USDA zones (8-9) start in late January. Colder zones (4-5) wait until early March if the ground is still frozen in February. The goal is to apply amendments before active root growth begins.

Retest soil pH in late April or early May, to see if you need a booster dose. Adjust application rates for the following year, based on the results. Plan on making annual amendments. Soil pH doesn't permanently shift from one application and will drift back toward natural levels over time.

Frequently Asked Questions

Need more ideas for timely gardening jobs and seasonal expert advice delivered straight to your inbox? Sign up for the free Gardening Know How Newsletter!

January can feel quiet in the garden, but it’s actually prime time to multiply several favorite perennials indoors or under cover. Propagating perennials in January gives roots weeks to establish before outdoor planting season hits – and strong new plants mean bigger displays come summer.

Many perennial garden plants root reliably from divisions, stem cuttings, or saved seed while dormant or just waking up. And you can see the results as quickly as spring. The work is simple, mostly down to sharp tools and patience, and setup takes an afternoon at most. Cold frames, bright windowsills, and unheated greenhouses can all be used as propagation stations this month. Just line starter pots on benches and work surfaces with adequate lighting, and squeeze trays onto available shelves.

Key perennials thrive for years once settled, so time spent propagating in January will pay off handsomely with plenty more free plants ready for beds or pots. What’s more, dormancy makes handling easier for key perennial plants, as there is no active growth to damage. Snow outside doesn’t stop the process, and new growth pushes green against gray days. So perennial propagation in January turns a quiet month into a productive one very quickly. Here are some of the easiest perennials to grow from cuttings and division in January.

1. Hostas

Hostas divide most easily in winter, so they are some of the easiest perennials to grow from propagation in January. To divide plants, dig established clumps or lift potted specimens, then slice the crowns into sections, ensuring each has several eyes. A sharp knife should pass through the fleshy crowns smoothly. If you need a good gardening knife, the WorkPro Hori Hori from Amazon is a versatile slicer for multiple garden jobs. Shake off excess old dirt gently.

Water thoroughly, and place them in a cool, bright location out of direct afternoon sun. Leaves emerge slowly but reliably by March. Hosta varieties such as ‘June’ or ‘Sum and Substance’ multiply rapidly this way. Smaller eyes catch up quickly. Keep the soil moist, but not soggy, and roots should soon fill the pots. Established plants tolerate deep shade well.

2. Heucheras

Heucheras (aka coral bells) root well from stem cuttings taken in January. Snip the woody bases of your coral bells just above the soil line, strip the lower leaves, and dip the ends in a rooting hormone such as my favorite, Garden Safe TakeRoot Rooting Hormone, available from Amazon. Insert the stalks into gritty compost, trimming them straight across. Place on a bright windowsill or a greenhouse bench, where they can receive at least 6 hours of indirect light daily. Several cuttings should fit in one tray.

Heucheras are some of the easiest perennials to propagate in January. Simply maintain trays in a humid environment under plastic covers or in propagators. Roots typically form within 4-6 weeks. New leaves develop tint rapidly, and pots stay cool for optimal strikes. The evergreen mounds provide year-round color.

3. Sedums

Upright sedum varieties such as ‘Autumn Joy’, root readily from stem cuttings snapped from dormant plants. Lay the pieces horizontally on moist sand or bury them halfway, allowing sections to dry slightly before planting. These sun-lovers need the brightest spot possible, so aim for a south-facing windowsill to prevent new shoots becoming leggy. A callus forms quickly on the ends.

New shoots should emerge along stems rapidly. Keep pots barely moist, as excess water leads to rot quickly. By April, the chunky rooted sections are ready for outdoor transplanting. For good starter pots allowing for easy transplanting, try MixC Clear Nursery Pots for Easy Transplants from Amazon. Stonecrop sedums tolerate dry spells exceptionally well, and sunlight accelerates the process.

4. Daylilies

Daylilies divide cleanly in January. To grow more daylilies from propagation now, pull the fans apart, trim long roots, and replant singles or triples shallowly, with crowns just below the surface. Roots often tangle thickly, requiring gentle untangling. Keep the newly potted fans in a sheltered, bright spot like a cold frame or unheated porch.

Water lightly until growth resumes. Named cultivars remain true through this method. Prolific types yield dozens of new plants from one clump. Trim dead leaves first. Fans establish strongly, making these potentially some of the longest living perennials you can grow. Scapes rise tall later will rise tall once moved to full sun in spring, and blooms open daily in summer.

5. Astilbes

Astilbe crowns split effectively when plants are dormant. Cut thick rhizomes into chunks, each with buds and roots attached. The pieces feel firm, almost woody, and you should find that a knife slides through easily. Plant shallowly in an acidic potting mix, keeping conditions cool and moist. Because astilbes prefer dappled light, keep divisions in a cool, shaded part of the greenhouse or a north-facing window while they establish.

Feathery plumes reward the effort the following summer. Shade lovers establish strongly before heat arrives, and peat helps maintain the proper pH. Don’t be afraid to use a soil tester like the Yamron 4-in-1 Tester from Amazon to keep an eye on the ground around your young plants so you can make adjustments if necessary.

6. Penstemons

Penstemons root successfully from basal cuttings taken in January. Choose non-flowering shoots on your penstemon plants. Trim below a node and insert cuttings into a sharp, free-draining mix. Keep your cuts short for plant stability.

Place these in a spot with plenty of overhead light, as they need long days to trigger root growth. Choose a grow light to help boost light levels if needed. Go for a full spectrum option with an adjustable height option for tier-based and vertical tray growing, such as the Barrina T10 Full Spectrum Standing Grow Light from Amazon.

Consistent warmth speeds up root development even in unheated greenhouses, so consider bottom heat via a propagator mat like the BN-Link Seedling Heatmat from Amazon. Tubular blooms appear on new plants by late summer. Spikes stand tall quickly, and humidity domes assist. Leaves remain narrow and neat.

7. Salvia

Hardy perennial salvia types root effectively from heel cuttings, which are pulled with a small sliver of the crown. Dip the ends in rooting hormone, pot them up, and mist frequently. These heels include valuable cambial tissue that promotes successful rooting. Ensure they get at least 6–8 hours of bright light to prevent the stems from softening.

Varieties such as ‘May Night’ and ‘Caradonna’ strike reliably, and the pots fill out bushily by planting time. Roots branch quickly, and the stems are characteristically square. Their aromatic leaves release their scent when handled, adding fragrance to garden borders, and purple spikes attract bees for pollination.

8. Echinacea

Purple coneflowers divide in a similar manner to daylilies. Tease their thick taproots apart carefully, ensuring that each section has fibrous roots and eyes. The centers tend to remain woody. Replant deeply in gritty soil, and water sparingly. Keep your starts in a bright, frost-free environment like a cool conservatory. Drought-tolerant roots establish early.

Any echinacea seeds harvested in fall can also be sown now in a bright propagator for additional seedlings. You can buy propagators with adjustable or high humidity screens, such as Soligt Propagation Trays with Humidity Trays with Amazon.

9. Shasta Daisy

Shasta daisies propagate readily through basal cuttings or division. Young shoots around the crowns snip cleanly and root quickly in a light mix. Maintain these in a bright, airy position to avoid damping off. Cuttings generally achieve high success rates.

Keep the soil barely damp. White blooms cover sturdy new plants in the first year, and ‘Becky’ performs especially well through division. Plant stems will thicken fast, providing they aren’t kept in deep shade, and centers mound neatly.

10. Lamb’s Ears

Stachys (commonly known as lamb’s ear) roots easily from rosettes pulled off the crowns. Lay the fuzzy leaves with crown tissue flat on soil, pin them down, and mist gently. Rosettes detach easily, and contact with soil triggers rooting. Grow in a bright, dry spot. Too much shade and humidity causes the velvet leaves to rot.

Roots creep out fast. This perennial’s silver foliage will very likely carpet new areas by midsummer, and the spikes will flower in the second year. The spread stays low, and this soft groundcover edges paths nicely.

Propagation Essentials

When taking cuttings or making divisions, sharp tools, shears and pruners make all the difference. Clean pruners by wiping them with alcohol. Choose healthy sections that are free of pests, trim at a modest angle, and use rooting hormone on varieties that appreciate the nudge.

Slip your perennial cuttings into a sterile, airy medium, adjusting with some coarse or sharp sand, perlite or vermiculite. You can add a little grit or perlite, such as Espoma Organic Perlite from Amazon, to enhance the drainage of your chosen potting soil mix. Water gently and cover pots to maintain a steady, mild humidity until true leaves emerge. Check your cuttings and divisions on a weekly basis. Good signs are new growth and extra weight when you lift your pots and trays. Once they establish, harden off the plants to get them used to the outdoors, and plant them once the last frost date is behind you.

January Propagation Checklist

Transforming your garden doesn't require a huge budget – just a few essentials are all you need for timely new growth. This propagation toolkit is cash well spent – and just think of all the money you’ll be saving on gorgeous perennials, giving you a massive head start on spring.

Need more ideas for getting the most from your plants, indoors and out, and looking for the best seasonal expert advice delivered straight to your inbox? Sign up for the free Gardening Know How Newsletter!

When it comes to perennials, I have a simple rule: easy to maintain is easy to love. There may be gardeners out there who have the time to fuss and fret over dainty perennials but I’m not one of them. If you aren’t one of them either, you’ll appreciate this list of the easiest perennials to grow.

Perennial plants are plants that keep coming back, as opposed to one-and-done annuals. That automatically makes them easier over the long haul than other choices. But when you filter them out and find the easiest perennials to grow - there’s hardly any reason to look further.

Are these plants good for beginners? You bet they are! They aren’t fussy or frail, but rather robust, tough, tolerant, long-lived, and adaptable. They don’t need staking, pinching, or division, but produce lovely, healthy flowers, year after year. Any of these plants could become an appreciated member of your perennial garden.

1. Black-Eyed Susans

Who can resist the simple beauty of daisies? Add drama and you have incredible flowers. Black-eyed Susans are giant daisies all glammed up in canary-colored finery with the black cone-like center. Each one has its own tall, upright stem.

Black-eyed Susans attract pollinators galore - from bees to butterflies and beyond. But the plant provides enough flowers for all. Cut a vase-full of these native flowers today for more blooms tomorrow. Drought-tolerant? Yup. All they ask is a full sun location and well-drained soil. Order your black-eyed Susan seeds from Ferry-Morse and get ready for a golden flush of flowers in the late summer.

2. Peony

Everybody’s got a favorite perennial and mine is peonies, with their huge, romantic blowsy blooms and glossy emerald leaves, right out of a gardener’s dream. They look like the show-girls of the perennial clan but don’t think this means you have to work hard to grow them. These are reliable, low-maintenance plants that offer masses of fragrant spring blooms in pinks and whites and reds. They also need full sun and well-drained soil. Find a deeply colored 'Purple Black Beauty' peony bareroot from Lowe's.

3. Yarrow

Yarrow flowers are unusual and striking. The many mini blooms on slender stems form a flattened, umbrella-shaped canopy - in yellow, lavender, white or rose pink. Come rain, come drought, you can rely on yarrow. And the pretty foliage is part of the show. In the southwest, the plant is called plumajillo, meaning little feather, because of the feather-like shape of the plant’s fragrant leaves.

Common yarrow will astound you with its rapid growth when you plant it in a full-sun location in well-drained soil. Find a vibrant mix of yarrow seeds from Walmart and get ready for this to become your favorite perennial!

4. Salvia

Salvia plants, also called sage, is another of my personal favorites with its bold, bright spikes of flowers. I like the indigo and the purple best, but you can also pick pink varieties, and all have that subtle, gray-green foliage.

Give salvia sun and it will be happy, to hell with soil type. (But well-draining is best.) And when the flower spikes wilt? Snip them off to usher in yet another wave of blooms - to the joy of bees and butterflies and hummingbirds in the garden. Plant salvia ' Blue Bedder' seeds from Ferry-Morse and watch your garden become a pollinator magnet.

5. Catmint

Catmint might be the very best perennial for a beginning gardener to install. It has everything to please - graceful upright stalks of fragrant spring flowers (in lavender blues and pinks) and aromatic gray-green foliage - and absolutely thrives on neglect. Fast growing, reliable, and long-lived, catmint plant this rugged bloomer in large drifts or clumps.

A reliable long-lived perennial, catmint is a member of the mint family. It produces aromatic gray-green foliage and upright flower spikes in shades of lavender-blue, pink or white. When does it bloom? Easier to ask when it doesn’t, since the flowers start in spring and keep right on going until fall, attracting hummingbirds, bees, butterflies and other insect pollinators. But no insect pests! These perennial plants are virtually pest and disease-free. Purchase nepeta 'Purrsian Blue' catmint seeds from Park Seed to get growing.

6. False Indigo

I happen to love flowers that grow in spikes, and that’s the case for so many of these easy-care perennials, including false indigo. The spikes of pea-like flowers appear reliably every spring - yellow, blue, purple, or white!) and can do so for decades.

Like most of these perennials, false indigo prefers full sun and well-draining soil. Buy large starts to get a quicker start. Purchase an established blue false indigo start from Nature Hills online nursery.

7. Hosta

All the easy-care perennials on the list so far want the sunniest place in the garden. But every garden has a shady side too, and for these we look to hosta plants. These are incredible foliage plants - coming in an astonishing variety of shapes, colors and sizes. Pick a dwarf variety that seems to hug the ground or upright hostas almost as tall as you are (and much wider!) They are grown for their huge leaves with contrasting veining and gorgeous variegation, but the plant will also produce graceful spikes of lilac or ivory flowers that will be the joy of neighborhood hummingbirds.

And we weren’t kidding. They require shade to thrive, either full shade or partial shade. When you are out shopping, do yourself a favor and buy one of the slug-resistant varieties like 'Empress Wu' which can be found at the Home Depot.

8. Daylilies

When I learned that each daylily blossom only lasts one day, I was ready to knock this species off my personal perennial list. That would have been a big mistake since there are dozens of stems and every daylily stem produces dozens of flowers. Daylilies are rightly called the workhorses of the garden since they don’t need much fussing yet keep the flowers coming in waves.

Just install daylilies in a sunny spot and watch them go. The trumpet shaped flowers come in all sizes, colors and bloom types, from huge flowers to dwarfs, in yellow, orange, red, purple, pink and cream, often with a stylish, contrasting eye. Some bloom in early spring, others in fall. All have arching, grass-like foliage. Find a gorgeous blush pink 'Mini Pearl' daylily from Park Seed.

9. Lenten Rose

Lenten rose is sometimes called hellebore. It begins its bloom season in late winter and keeps on going through spring, producing flowers that look like cupped roses with prominent stamens in the center. This is another perennial for the shade garden, since it thrives in part or full shade. This perennial also tolerates drought well but needs well-draining soil. Find a beautiful hellebore from Park Seed to add color to your winter garden.

10. Sedum

Sedums charm with their unusual foliage even before the flowers appear, looking good all through the growing season. The showy, nectar-rich blossoms are lovely in the garden, where they attract butterflies and bees, but also make an impact as long-lasting cut flowers.

These plants may win top prizes for their low-maintenance ways. Do you need to deadhead? No you don’t. Divide them? Nope. Fertilizer? Not needed. Yet these perennials can stay vibrant even into winter. They will laugh off both extreme heat and a lack of sunlight, but either of these conditions can make sedum leggy. Just cut them back when they are done flowering and you’ll have your old plants back again. can cause sedum plants to get a bit leggy.

Sedums can thrive anywhere from a full sun location to partial shade. They do require well-drained soil. Find a pink stonecrop sedum from the Home Depot.

There are so many great perennial plants that are easy to care for and look fabulous in any landscape. Try one of these this year and see how easy they truly are!

One truism we all learn and relearn over the holidays is that the best gifts don't always come in the prettiest wrapping. (Remember those yellow suspenders that Aunt Betsy wrapped so magnificently?) Indeed, some of the most important planting surprises can come in the most unassuming forms. Quite often, the real garden winners are those that come dressed in the simplest packaging. Certain plants that become the dearest over time may start off shrinking into the background behind showier, frothier (and sometimes more fickle) ornamentals.

So it goes with the humble evergreen sarcococca shrub. Also known as sweet box, the sarcococca or Christmas box (Sarcococca orientalis, S. confusa, S. ruscifolia) isn’t exactly the showiest number and is often dismissed as being a little boring. This small, evergreen shrub with its suckering ways is no towering beauty – but its glossy foliage, fragrant white flowers and dainty berries are sure to inspire devotion over time. Here’s why the sarcococca plant (also known as winter box) is such a gift for your garden, and how to make the most of your Christmas box plant.

How Festive is Christmas Box?

You aren’t likely to confuse the sweet box plant or Christmas box with a Christmassy tree. Yes, this shrub is an evergreen, but it’s a broadleaf evergreen, not a conifer. It has lush, glossy foliage rather than needles or tight green branches. And it generally only grows to 3-5 feet (1-1.5m) tall. It can get wide fast, however, since it uses suckers to form colonies.

If this description is not enticing, let’s consider some more impressive features of sarcococca sweet box, like its drought tolerance, deer resistance, pollution tolerance, and cold hardy character. It can thrive in sites where winter temperatures drop to -10 degrees F (-23°C), and thrives in USDA zones 6-8. The shrub is also long lived, and tolerates (indeed, prefers) shady sites.

Best of all, the Christmas box is a winter flowering shrub, with fragrant small white blooms covering its branches from January to March. Tiny creamy white flowers exude an intoxicating scent in late winter. These fragrant evergreen shrubs then produce tight clusters of berries, usually dark, but ranging from black to deep purple to red berrying varieties. You can buy ‘Fragrant Mountain’ Sweet Box from Nature Hills, for a gorgeous container-friendly evergreen that flowers late winter and early spring.

The Allure of Sweet Box

I volunteer as a docent in the San Francisco Botanical Garden, which happens to have the largest collection of endangered magnolia trees outside of China. It hosts more than 200 magnolias (many rare and historic) with a bloom period in January and February. People come from all over the world to smell their intoxicating fragrance.

Of course, magnolia trees in bloom are just as beautiful as their fragrance suggests they might be, and often dramatically and emphatically so. With Christmas box, this is not the case. You may see them referred to as Christmas box trees, but they aren’t quite as memorable to look at as certain holiday evergreens and ornamentals. Indeed, the plants are so short, they are more accurately classified as shrubs than trees, and their flowers are termed inconspicuous.

But the Christmas box is nonetheless a lovely plant, both as a low maintenance evergreen and a fragrant flowering shrub. Each leaf is dark green, shiny and slightly rippled. And the scent of its flowers will create a romantic feel in the winter garden thanks to its sweet vanilla fragrance. Between the delightful berries, glossy foliage, and shiny berries, there are so many multi-season gifts in the humble Christmas box.

Growing a Christmas Box

If sweet-smelling garden plants appeal to you, the fragrant and hardy Christmas box is an easygoing evergreen to add to your backyard. This dense and compact shrub works equally well as an outdoor potted plant or an in-ground evergreen. You don’t even have to find a sunny location, since deep shade or partial shade is what this plant prefers. In fact, a full-sun placement turns its lovely leaves yellow.

You can plant at any time of year, as long as the ground isn’t frozen solid or waterlogged or excessively dry. Just make sure it is planted in soil with good drainage, ideally loamy, moist, acidic, and rich in humus. Use the Raintrip 4-in-1 Soil Meter from Amazon to check soil ph and moisture levels prior to planting.

Water your sarcococca shrub regularly for the first few months after planting. Once it is established, the Christmas box doesn’t need much water, Indeed, it thrives on neglect. This plant shrugs off pruning, so it’s no problem to trim it back in spring (after flowering) to keep it to your preferred height and shape. That said, you don’t need to prune it much, unless for tidying, shaping and more compact forms.

Sweet Box in the Garden

Given the shrub’s shape and sucking ways, you may not be totally sure where to use it in the garden. It’s actually remarkably adaptable to different places, from patios and doorways to border plantings. Just make sure you choose a shady spot for these low maintenance shade plants. They aren’t fond of direct sunlight and produce their glossiest, richest green notes when they are allowed to dwell in lower light situations.

Next, don’t just plant one! Christmas box shrubs should be planted in groups to get the most intense aromas from its lovely perfumed blooms. Since it suckers and forms colonies, the shrub makes a good groundcover. But you could also place it in beds and borders near the patio, or right on it in a large container. That way, you’ll be able to enjoy that fragrance as much as possible. Sprinkle some mulch around the bases of shrubs to help regulate moisture levels in the ground. You can buy Back To The Roots Organic Mulch from Amazon and add it in fall or spring.

Christmas box is related to boxwood, and you can use it much the same way. These shade-loving plants work well as low border shrubs. Try clipping your sarcococca into a low formal hedge or plant around the edges of a cottage garden. I predict this shrub will quickly grow to become one of the most loved gifts in your winter garden.

Need more ideas for gardening jobs and seasonal expert advice, delivered straight to your inbox? Sign up for the free Gardening Know How Newsletter!

Winter mornings tend to show the herb garden at its worst. Bare stems poke up where annuals stood, frost has hammered everything tender, and the whole bed feels finished for the year. But then, winter savory catches my eye. Rub a leaf, and the sharp, warm scent cuts straight through the cold air. These winter hardy herbs turn ordinary winter suppers into meals you can actually look forward to, and are glorious in cold weather cooking when other flavors are becoming more scarce. But it’s such a quiet, overlooked herb, it’s possible you don’t have it, which is a pity.

This hardy, peppery plant earns its keep with hardly any effort at all. Give it full sun and soil that doesn’t stay wet, and it will happily settle in for the long haul. Growing winter savory (Satureja montana) starts with the right placement, and ends with years of reliable harvests. Delightfully, cold only makes the leaves of the winter savory herb taste stronger. Here’s how to get the most from this little-known yet flavorful cold-hardy perennial for exquisite kitchen garden concoctions.

Why Grow Winter Savory

As winter herbs go, this industrious little plant really holds its own at this nippy time of year. Basil turns to black mush, and parsley flops over the minute real frost hits. Winter savory is the stubborn exception, still pushing flavor when the garden looks like a graveyard. It isn’t just a herb that survives winter, it actively leans into it, packing more punch as nights drop below freezing. This evergreen herb elevates winter cooking, turning those long, dark stretches into something well worth sitting down for.

These perennial herbs are great for pots and for growing in the ground. Winter savory grows into a tidy dome, rarely more than a foot (30.5cm) high, each piece of glossy foliage toughened just enough to handle bitter cold. Brush a leaf and its scent snaps awake – exuding a peppery warmth up front, that faint pine note right behind it, then a flavor that hangs around longer than expected. It’s the kind of aroma that makes you imagine a roasting pan already in the oven.

Garden bees find their small white or pale blush summer blooms without fail, and once they fade the plant shifts its attention fully to winter survival. Even when every basil and marjoram has melted into the soil, this little herb stands strong, leaves still bright and ready to use. You can buy these winter hardy herbs as live plants, or you can grow winter savory seeds. Get Winter Savory Live Plants from Burpee or buy seeds such as Seed Needs’ Winter Savory Seeds from Amazon.

This fragrant evergreen winter plant is hardy through USDA zone 5 (and zone 4 with a little straw tucked around the base), and it thickens and improves every year. Older stems pick up a woody backbone, giving the plant the look of a miniature evergreen in the herb bed. Honestly, a winter savory plant looks good even when you’ve forgotten about it for weeks. Snip sprigs whenever the kitchen calls, and fresh growth springs back fast. Dry small bunches somewhere dark and airy, and even months later the leaves pack a serious punch. Many cooks prefer winter savory over summer savory, specifically because that strength keeps up during long, bubbling braises.

How to Grow Winter Savory

Cultivating these plucky winter herbs is delightfully simple. Place your winter savory herb in full sun on soil that drains freely. If you have amended your soil in fall, you should not have to make elaborate adjustments for winter savory. Wet roots spell trouble, much more than cold. Ordinary garden soil works fine. Indeed, extra fertility might create weak, sprawling growth that suffers in the winter wet. Set plants a foot (30.5cm) apart and let them slowly fill the space, forming a low, tidy row that’s easy to reach during icy weather.

A light sprinkle of gravel or fine bark like Fine Pine Bark Nuggets, available from Amazon, around the base keeps this savory winter herb tidy without trapping moisture. In the coldest climates, toss a little loose straw on once the ground freezes and peel it away as spring returns. This container-friendly herb also thrives in wide, shallow pots like Laergin Terracotta Pots from Amazon which drain fast. Slide containers near a warm wall when temperatures plummet. The flavor gets bolder after a real frost. Clip entire sprigs whenever you want them, and the plant hardly notices. Regular light trims actually encourage a thicker, more productive mound.

Healthy starter plants will get your kitchen garden patch going fast. You can start living winter savory in small pots like these 4-Inch Terracotta Pots from Amazon. They will transplant easily and grow vigorously. Winter savory seeds are slower, but if started early indoors under lights, they’ll settle in once warm weather arrives. Winter savory is a great choice for beginner herb gardeners, because this easy herb asks so little and returns so much.

To make even more of this herb winter savory can be divided to create new plants. Divide established clumps every few years if the center starts looking bare. New pieces root without complaint and keep the planting productive. Divisions make lovely gifts for fellow gardeners who may think winter means the end of fresh herbs.

Culinary Uses for Winter Savory

Winter savory belongs in any edible herb garden and with anything that cooks for hours. Drop whole sprigs into bean soups, lentil stews, or pork shoulder early on. The flavor spreads, softens, and deepens. Fish the stems out at the end, the way you do bay leaves. Cabbage, root vegetables, and legumes all welcome the sharp warmth. This unusual culinary herb also stands up beautifully to fatty meats, cutting through richness without overpowering the dish.

Just before dough hits the oven, fold in a handful of minced leaves, so the herbal heat rises with the bread. Dried savory swaps perfectly for fresh. If you can’t wait to grow yours before that first culinary rush, you can grab bags of Spice Way Dried Winter Savory Herbs from Amazon. Crumble it right over the pot to wake up the oils. Stir chopped leaves into softened butter with lemon zest, roll into a log, freeze it tight, and slice pieces onto hot vegetables for instant comfort. The aroma alone can turn a simple dinner into something that feels a little more deliberate.

A jar of dried winter savory waits fragrantly for nights too cold to step outside. These 12-Pack Amber Jars from Amazon are a lovely choice. A pinch wakes up mushroom soup or split-pea potage in seconds. Blend savory with garlic and coarse salt for a quick seasoning that works on everything from roast carrots to pan-seared fish.

Scatter minced leaves over polenta, or stir them into goat cheese for an instant spread on dark bread. The same leaves folded into biscuit dough give a quiet pepper note that makes winter breakfast feel special. Even a basic omelet becomes a small celebration when you add a sprig or two from this plant that never quits on you.

Winter Savory Essentials

These cold-hardy herbs are undemanding and reassuringly resilient during the winter months. You only need a few cultivation essentials to keep winter savory at its best.

Need more ideas for gardening jobs and seasonal expert advice, delivered straight to your inbox? Sign up for the free Gardening Know How Newsletter!

Although it’s technically a vegetable, rhubarb (Rheum rhabarbarum) is widely consumed as a fruit in desserts such as crumbles and pies, as well as a preserve. Strawberry rhubarb pie is a particular summer favorite. You can grow rhubarb in USDA zones 3-8, and enjoy a spring harvest of these tart, tasty stalks in the second year after starting plants from crowns.

Once these perennial vegetable crops are established, rhubarb care is delightfully straightforward. But have you ever tried the sweetened stalks of forced rhubarb? Indeed, did you even know you can enjoy earlier spring harvests with this clever cheat, designed to fool the plant into early stalk production? Forced rhubarb is the most flavorful and tender rhubarb you can enjoy, and it’s utterly perfect for pies. What’s more, it’s so simple. Here’s how to master forcing rhubarb in 3 easy steps.

Why Force Rhubarb?

The obvious benefit of rhubarb forcing is getting an earlier rhubarb harvest. You can expect to be able to pull out tasty stalks 3-6 weeks earlier than if left to develop and mature naturally. Forcing these tart-and-tasty perennial vegetables might sound like a pro gardening move, but it’s oh-so-easy, and you can try it on several rhubarb varieties. It’s also cost-effective. You can use whatever you have to hand to cover your plants. There’s no need to buy any costly additional tools or materials.

What not all gardeners realize is that these early stalks also taste better after forcing. The exclusion of light means they grow pale and tender, which impacts flavor. Rather than the tartness of traditional rhubarb harvests, forced rhubarb stalks have a delectable sweetness that trumps stalks harvested at the usual time. This makes them perfect for pies, crisps, crumbles and a host of spring and summer desserts.

How to Force Rhubarb

Rhubarb forced for earlier harvesting is not something veggie growers tackle in the first few years. Forcing rhubarb may seem a little ‘out there’ but it isn’t a complicated process if you follow some simple steps. The only warning is not to try forcing very young rhubarb, so never attempt to harvest a rhubarb in its first year. Plants need time to grow and develop. In the second year, you can harvest lightly. By the third year, you can harvest fully and try the forcing method for earlier stalks.

For established plants, this is a great hack for faster harvests. Rhubarb is often one of those perennial crops you plant and forget, but this hack could change the way you harvest rhubarb and will certainly elevate your taste expectations! So just follow these easy steps.

1. Ensure a Good Winter Sleep

Resist the urge to start forcing your rhubarb too early. Rhubarb is a cool-season crop, and it needs a period of cold temperatures to eventually break the dormancy phase and begin to grow. Rhubarb will only grow successfully when it has a continuous period of temperatures below about 40 degrees Fahrenheit (4°C).

This winter sleep period should last for at least 6-8 weeks, so don’t start force the process too early. The ThermoPro TP60 Hygrometer Outdoor Thermometer, available from Amazon, is a useful way of gauging outside temperatures as well as humidity.

2. Provide Darkness

When it’s time, begin forcing your rhubarb by placing an opaque container over the crowns to create darkness. Make sure you do this after chilling first. People often use dedicated forcer pots, but you don’t have to use one of these. A bucket, garbage can, old chimney pot, or large clay pot will work. Just make sure the container is opaque (preferably dark if made of plastic) and held in place so it doesn’t blow over. You can get Heavy Duty 45 Gallon Plastic Trash Cans from Walmart.

The darkness forces the rhubarb stalks to grow as they search out light. The energy stored in the plants’ rhizomes is adequate to promote this growth. The result is taller, thinner stalks that are ready to harvest. They’ll also have less oxalic acid, making them taste sweeter and less sour.

3. Give Plants a Thermal Boost

The container placed over rhubarb crowns may be enough to force early, sweet stalks, but you can improve the odds by increasing the temperature around them. Pile up leaves or mulch around the covering container to trap heat in the soil and around the crown.

Use an organic mulch like Back to the Roots Premium Organic Mulch from Amazon, or organic material, aged manure, or straw from your garden. Add around the base of the container to trap soil heat. This extra layer acts as a thermal boost, and will help to mimic warmer spring temperatures sooner, resulting in even earlier growth.

Golden Rules for Forced Rhubarb

Forcing rhubarb is easy and effective, so once you’ve done it you will want to try again and again. However, resist the urge to force each rhubarb plant every year. The process is a little stressful for plants, so you need to adapt a ‘year off’ approach and alternate the process for each plant every two years. Force one crown this year, but next year let it rest and force a different rhubarb plant. If the stalks are growing too thin and weak, you’re overdoing it. Let the plant grow stronger and replenish its energy reserves before you try forcing again.

Another golden rule applies to harvesting. Don’t make mistakes which can damage the plant. The best way to harvest rhubarb stalks is by twisting and pulling. Don’t cut the stalks, as this leaves the plants vulnerable to disease. Remove leaves right away, as these are toxic. Add leaves to your composting area or dispose of them as you would any other yard waste.

Rhubarb Care Essentials

Just a few gadgets and conditioning treatments can help you maintain optimal forcing conditions and guarantee the tastiest rhubarb.

Need more ideas for gardening jobs and seasonal expert advice, delivered straight to your inbox? Sign up for the free Gardening Know How Newsletter!

If only plants could talk and tell you how they feel. Of course, the more you spend time caring for your favorites, the more you will get a sense of when plants are happy or not. But if you spot a plant suddenly surrounded in dropped leaves or multiple sightings of yellow or drooping foliage, it’s understandable to panic. This is a common worry in fall, especially, and can come as a shock after the vibrancy and vitality of earlier months. But before you wonder if your buddies are on their way out of the eternal sliding door and turning up their toes forever – take a breath, as they may just be putting their feet up (figuratively speaking) and taking a little siesta.

It can be tough to tell if plants are dying, or just entering a phase of dormancy. Indeed, what is dormancy in plants? Put simply, it is the natural resting phase where growth slows or pauses. It often coincides with plants overwintering, and is definitely something you’ll see a lot as fall kicks in. The whole idea of dormancy can seem strange to the uninitiated. It doesn’t always affect all plants the exact same way. Indeed, some plants might not even go dormant at all. But if your plant pals are looking a little peaky, what you mistake as decline or illness may just be your plant’s way of telling you that it’s tired and needs to recharge ahead of the new year.

So if you’re not sure if your plant is dying or just having a snooze, this guide can help you decide if dormancy is happening for your overwintering plants. Here’s how to read the signs and listen to your plant with a more relaxed approach to seasonal slumbers, how to tell the difference between dormancy and decline, and what to do next.

Key Signs Your Plant Is Dormant and Not Dead

Seeing your plant outside of its normal celebratory phase or glory days can be deeply unsettling, so it’s understandable why you would suspect the worst. But at this time of year, the chances are that plants (at least, perennials, exotics, and common houseplants) are not preparing to meet their maker. So having a better understanding of dormancy is good not only for your plants, but also your nerves. Dormancy does not equate with fall distress for plants – it’s just nature’s way of slowing down.

So what is a dormant plant, as opposed to one that is struggling or declining? Think of plant dormancy as your plant pressing the pause button on growth. It is responding to cooler temperatures, shifts and drops in daylight, and possibly soil changes, and deciding to conserve energy until things pick up again. It’s the plant’s version of hibernation – a survival strategy that keeps things ticking over with the minimum of effort until growing conditions improve. In other words, it’s rest not ruin.

All that big growth that we associate with spring and summer inevitably stops for key perennial staples. Active photosynthesis and new leaf growth will dwindle and your plant will divert energy into storage rather than new shoots, foliage, and blooms. With the onset of fall, chances are you will have moved key tender perennials, exotics and houseplants indoors for winter. Where you haven’t brought plants indoors, perennials left outdoors will similarly prepare for the cold season. Shorter days, chillier days and nights, and periods of drought will all signal that it’s time for plants to rest.

Plants that snuggle up and hit ‘snooze’ include many outdoor perennials, bulbs, and deciduous shrubs and trees. Houseplants may not go fully dormant and might just slow right down, but you may see the same signs. However, certain tropical plants (kept indoors) may keep going strong, as long as conditions stay warm and bright.

A potted plant moved indoors for winter may exhibit signs of a mini-dormancy, which is basically less growth. While outdoors, leaves shed in profuse displays, branches and stems look bare, almost naked, and the dormancy phase is palpably felt, if not always clear to distinguish from plant failure. So how do you know your plant is taking a break, and that’s not a cause for alarm? Here are 5 ways to tell – and exactly what to do next (which may well be absolutely nothing at all!).

1. Bare Stems or Leaf Drop with Flexible Growth

If your plant has dropped leaves or looks bare, don’t automatically reach for the compost bin. When your plant sheds its leaves in autumn or after flowering, that’s often a cue it’s resting. Where plants are dormant, the stems will feel firm and slightly bendy, but won’t snap. You might spot tiny buds or nodes hiding along the stem. Gently scratch a small section of bark or stem with your nail — if it’s green beneath, it’s alive and all is well, so just water sparingly until growth resumes. There’s only a problem where the stems are brittle, snap easily, look dried out or hollow.

• Common dormancy examples: Deciduous trees and shrubs such as hydrangeas, roses, and maples naturally lose leaves in autumn as temperatures fall. Indoor ficus species (like Ficus benjamina) and plumeria often shed leaves indoors when light levels fall.
• Plants that shouldn’t do this: Evergreen houseplants like snake plants, ZZ plants, and rubber plants rarely drop all their leaves. Sudden leaf loss may suggest stress, not dormancy. Low light can exaggerate leaf drop. A full-spectrum LED grow light (like the Glowrium Grow Light from Amazon) maintains steady light levels indoors.

2. No New Growth But Roots Still Healthy

It’s easy to mistake a lack of visible growth for death, but the real story is underground. Growth stopping isn’t always bad; it might just be dormancy. When the plant is dormant, the roots are pale, firm, cool to the touch and slightly moist. Remove the plant from its pot carefully (or scoop into the ground) and inspect the roots. Firm and pale means healthy roots. Dark or mushy means rot, while bone-dry and hollow indicates underwatering.

If they’re alive, keep gently watering, very sparingly. Don’t overwater in dormancy; just keep soil barely moist. Repot or trim only if roots show signs of rot. A handy tool here is a soil moisture tester such as the Raintrop 4-in-1 Soil Moisture Meter from Amazon, which can help you identify whether the soil or compost is too wet or too dry. A soil moisture meter can help prevent both extremes, telling you when to water without guessing.

• Common dormancy examples: Perennials like hostas, peonies, and daylilies go completely bare above ground in fall, but their roots stay alive underground. Bulbs such as tulips and daffodils die back to the soil line and rest until spring.
• Plants that shouldn’t go root-dormant: Tropical houseplants like pothos, monstera, or philodendron keep low-level root activity year-round indoors. If they stop growing entirely, check temperature, light, or pests. A total halt could indicate light, water, or pest issues.

3. Slowdown Matches Season or Light Conditions

Sometimes things slow down for a reason. If your plant’s slowdown aligns with shorter days and cooler nights, that’s dormancy doing its job. Slowdown happens predictably in autumn and winter or during dry spells or drought. Are the daylight hours shrinking? Is the room getting cooler? If yes, then it’s likely dormancy.

However, if growth halts unexpectedly in high summer or under ideal indoor conditions, something may be wrong, such as pests, overwatering, or nutrient issues.For indoor humidity issues (which can stress plants), try a plant humidifier like the 4L Ultrasonic Cool Mist Humidifier from Amazon to raise humidity for houseplants and indoor plants. Dry winter air can make plants appear sicker than they are. Check other environmental cues, and adjust watering, access to light, or feeding accordingly.

• Common dormancy examples: Outdoor herbs like mint, oregano, and chives naturally slow down and disappear in winter cold. Succulents and cacti (especially aloe and echeveria) often pause growth in winter if kept cool and dry, storing energy in their fleshy leaves.
• Plants that shouldn’t pause now: Winter bloomers like cyclamen or Christmas cactus wake up in fall and winter. If they’re sleepy, they might not be getting enough light or water.

4. Leaf Discoloration That’s Even, Not Patchy

Sometimes fading foliage is just a natural sign of rest. As part of dormancy, leaves may yellow or brown evenly and drop neatly – this means the plant is wrapping up a phase. So if you see a soft, uniform leaf fade to yellow or brown, that is usually harmless. You should only remove leaves that are obviously decaying. For dormancy, let nature take its course and leave any healthy faded leaves alone.

However, watch out for uneven spotting, mold, or fuzzy growth, which suggests disease or pests. Patchy spots, black patches and sticky residue all signal pests or disease. For fungal issues, try Bonide Captain Jack’s Copper Fungicide from Amazon. Good airflow can also go a long way to help reducing the risk of recurring issues.

• Common dormancy examples: Deciduous houseplants like hibiscus or coleus may yellow evenly before resting. Outdoor shrubs like spirea or clematis show even, golden autumn colouring as they shut down.
• Plants that shouldn’t show even browning: Evergreens such as jade plants, palms, and ferns shouldn’t go fully brown. Uneven or patchy marks usually mean dryness, sunburn, pests or possibly overwatering.

5. Slow Revival When Conditions Improve

Yes, this one marks the end of the presumed dormancy phase for most plants, but it still helps to get extra proof it actually was dormancy. Come spring (or better light), take this test as part of your spring checklist. When warmer weather, brighter light and longer days come back, new buds or shoots should appear. Dormancy officially ends when light and warmth return. When the revival begins, treat potted plants to some Miracle-Gro  Potting Mix from Amazon to ensure soil is fresh and well-draining. You can also apply a slow-release feed like Osmocote Smart Release Plant Food from Walmart, when new growth appears.

If after one full growing season, conditions don’t improve, your plant may have passed. Telltale signs will be no green beneath the bark or outer surface, no bud swelling, and no root activity. Try the scratch test and the root test again before giving up. Give it a full season, as some plants wake slowly. Try a gentle feed and brighter light to encourage regrowth. If you aren’t seeing signs of life within a few weeks of spring, don’t give up too early: many perennials, bulbs, and shrubs are late risers. Patience is your best gardening tool, and many plants just need a little time.

• Common dormancy examples: Hardy perennials such as coneflowers, lavender, and black-eyed Susans re-emerge once the soil warms. Bulbs like amaryllis and tulips burst back after their quiet period.
• Plants that shouldn’t take that long: Fast-growing indoor plants (like spider plants, peace lilies, and philodendrons) shouldn’t need months to restart. If there’s still no growth in spring, reassess root health and environment. You may need to repot or refresh the soil.

Don't Forget…

You’re not the only worried grower who’s hovered anxiously over a quiet looking specimen and asked, ‘Is my plant dead or dormant?’ But remember, patience is your superpower. With observation and gentle assists through the slower months, you can get a better sense of your plant’s changing and slowing rhythms. Knowing the difference between dormancy and decline can give a newfound appreciation for the hard work your plant buddies put in from one year to the next. After all, given all those months of delighting you with verdant abundance and often dazzling displays, haven’t your green darlings earned a little nap time?

Dormancy isn’t a sign of trouble, it’s nature’s reset button. So wise up to plants that look dead but are not – and please don’t bin those plants before their time! Give gentle support: correct lighting, and moderate watering. Check for the green beneath the bark, peek at the roots, and trust that sometimes, the best thing you can do for plants is simply let them sleep. They’re sure to come back stronger than ever when the growing season returns once more.

Need more ideas for getting the most from your plants, indoors and out, and looking for the best seasonal expert advice delivered straight to your inbox? Sign up for the free Gardening Know How Newsletter!

For most of the year, the process of growing peonies feels like it’s about preparation and expectation – in the hopes that come the all-too-brief flowering season, you’ll be rewarded with voluminous, fragrant blooms. At this time of year, you’ll have been staring at flower-free peony shrubs for many months. As the foliage shifts color and starts to die back in readiness for winter, the prospect of heavy, lush flowers may seem further away than ever. But that doesn’t mean you can’t take steps now to make them a beautiful reality – you absolutely should. Doing so will ensure the best peony winter care during dormancy, and mean that with the new growing season, your next peony display is suitably divine and extravagant.

Getting peonies ready for winter comes down to a few simple, yet highly effective steps – targeting plant health, protection and stronger growth potential. Doing these essential peony care jobs now gives plants chance to recover, rest and regenerate through the colder months to come. Make sure you can enjoy your peonies to their fullest expression next spring – by making time now for these simple tasks before winter sets in and plants become fully dormant. Do it right, and you’ll reduce the risk of potential peony threats such as overcrowding and disease. Here’s how to improve plant health ahead of winter, and increase bloom size and vibrancy with these simple fall jobs – to set you up for a spectacular display next year.

3 Ways to Get Your Peonies Ready for Winter

The period between fall and winter – as peonies approach and enter dormancy – is the perfect time to tend to specific tasks to boost future flowering. Doing these tasks now helps peonies in winter as well as ahead of spring. Follow these jobs, and you’ll prevent diseases like botrytis, protect the plant roots, and encourage stronger growth once spring arrives. These 3 tasks are your roadmap for knowing how to winterize peonies in the best way possible.

Your winter prep will depend on a unique combination of USDA growing zone and soil conditions, as well as peony type and age. Since peonies thrive in USDA zones 2-8, they are relatively cold hardy. Indeed, they rely on significant chill hours for continued health and vitality. These 3 simple tasks are suitable for the full range of suitable growing zones. However, it’s a good idea to check your soil moisture and pH levels before completing these jobs. Ideally, you need the soil pH to be 6.5-7. A meter like the Raintrip 4-In-1 Soil Meter from Amazon can help you determine conditions under ground in tandem with these other essential peony checks.

Knowing how to prepare peonies for winter will also depend on the age of your peony. The needs of established plants are different to those of young peonies. Plants that are less than a couple of years old require a gentler touch. Certain activities that support, protect and rejuvenate established plants can cause stress in younger peonies. You also need to adapt these tasks slightly, depending on the type of peony you grow. Herbaceous, Itoh (intersectional) and tree peonies all require different approaches to cutting back, for instance. Where relevant, these needs are outlined below. Whatever type you grow, these simple fall jobs will give you the advantage ahead of winter and the new growing year.

1. Cut Back Spent Peony Foliage

Cutting back spent peony foliage is a vital task ahead of winter. It’s definitely wise to cut back herbaceous peonies in the fall, preferably immediately after the first fall frost. Doing so reduces the risks of overwintering fungal spores and other peony diseases that could be lurking in decaying foliage, such as powdery mildew and botrytis blight. Peony pruning in fall also nudges the plant towards redirecting its energy into the roots ahead of the new growing year. Knowing when to cut back peonies may seem confusing at first, but quite often they will let you know when they are ready. After the first frost, you will probably notice the foliage turning black. This is your cue to grab your sharpest shears and secateurs.

For herbaceous peonies that are well established (3 years and older), you can cut stems to ground level, around an inch (3cm) above the soil surface. Focus on excising all dead or diseased-looking plant matter, specifically any yellow, black, soft and soggy foliage. For really young peonies (1-2 years old), you can still cut back, but do so gently as stems are still developing. For Itoh or intersectional peonies (hybrids of tree and herbaceous peonies), you need to cut back stems to the point just above their woody base, around 6 inches (15cm) above the ground. However, if your plant is a tree peony, do not cut back hard. Remove dead or damaged stems only, and do this later (in late winter or early spring).

In terms of the best cuts, opt for bypass secateurs or garden shears. Bypass blades are excellent for making clean cuts that cause the least amount of damage to the plant (and consequently also reducing the risk of plant disease). It’s worth investing in something that will last and work reliably and with precision, plus something that will feel comfortable when making mass cuts. The highly rated Fiskars P921 X-Series PowerGear Bypass Pruners, available from Amazon, have a lovely rolling handle and work well for small hands. I also really like the Corona BP 3180D Classic Bypass Pruner, also from Amazon, with its comfy grip and easy action.

When cutting back peonies in the fall, make sure your blades are as sharp and clean as possible. Always clean your shears and secateurs both during and after use with a mild disinfectant. You can pick up Pharma-C 70% Isopropyl Alcohol Wipes from Amazon. My only word of caution with this job is not to cut back your plants too early in fall, as this is a classic peony pruning mistake. You don’t want to make cuts to herbaceous and Itoh peonies while the foliage is still looking relatively healthy, since at this stage it is still feeding the roots. It’s best to wait until the leaves are yellow or blackened by frost before cutting back.

2. Mulch the Peony Root Zone

Mulching is the ultimate gift that keeps on giving as fall slowly makes way to winter, and beyond. It is both a luxury and a necessity, helping to insulate and regulate soil temperatures and protect the plant’s roots from the ravages of the freeze-thaw cycle. It also helps in moderating moisture levels, suppressing early spring weeds, freeing up nutrients, nurturing peony root development, and improving the structure of the earth if you opt for organic mulching materials. Little wonder that I’m recommending mulching as one of your essential tasks to get peonies ready for winter.

The trick here is to apply mulch around the base, but not directly on the crown of your peony plant. Smothering mulch on the crowns risks suffocating buds, delaying emerging growth, and potentially causing rots, so keep a 2 inch (5cm) gap around the crown. You also need to steer clear of just piling the mulch on. A little goes a long way, and a thoughtfully thick layer around 2-3 inches (5-8cm) thick is plenty to supercharge your soil and keep plants safe and nourished. Timing your mulching right is also important. Ideally, you need to do this after you cut back the foliage.

Mulching is something that benefits all types and ages of peonies, but again, use a little caution when applying to certain peony types. Mulching is especially beneficial for herbaceous peonies and tree peonies (which have shallow root systems). Again, just keep a gap around the base. Take particular care with Itoh peonies, as their buds develop close to the surface, so apply lightly and loosely for these plants. Where plants are very young, mulching is still beneficial as young roots are more susceptible to frost damage – just watch out for compaction around the crown.

If you can go organic, you’re giving your peony the most potential goodness over the quiet, chilly months of dormancy. Opt for mulches based on shredded bark, straw or well rotted leaf mould. It’s worth selecting something of quality and, if you’re going for bark, regular pieces that allow for good airflow while insulating roots. I love Back to the Roots Organic Premium Mulch, which is free from dyes, and carbon-rich Brut Aspen Mulch, both from Amazon. Avoid heavy mulches that don’t allow for generous airflow. You might also find it helps to loosen the earth before adding your mulch. Use a trowel or hand scoop like the Garden Weasel Heavy Duty Soil Scoop from Amazon, for breaking up clumps and compactions prior to mulching.

3. Divide Overcrowded Peony Clumps

This final fall task is dependent on the overall health and age of your peonies. For plants that have been in the ground for several years, and which you feel have not flowered very well this year, there is a good chance the root clumps may have become congested. You may actually be able to see signs of congestion if the stems are bunched very close together. Where you suspect your peony has become congested, it can help to dig up your plant and divide the peony plant’s root clump.

This may sound a little drastic, but it can be incredibly beneficial to do this in the fall, since root development takes over during the dormant period. Dividing in fall assists with airflow, revitalizes older plants, gives roots more room to grow, and can encourage more voluminous flowering. Established herbaceous peonies are the safest bets for division as the roots are fleshy. You can also divide Itoh peonies, but a little care is needed, and plants should have been in the ground at least five years.

However, there are a few caveats. Peonies are not massive fans of being disturbed, and if you move peonies it can take a little time to re-establish when moved – so division should be something you only do if you suspect that your peony clumps are, indeed, overcrowded and blooming was poor this year. And you should avoid dividing tree peonies and younger plants, which will find the process adversely stressful.

For older peonies that fit the bill, lift the root clump carefully using a garden fork. Divide the crown into regular sections, each containing 3-5 eyes (buds). Use a knife or small pruning saw, like the Corona Razor Tooth Curved Blade Folding Saw from Amazon, to make clean cuts with minimal plant damage. Once you are happy with your divided sections, dip the roots in a little mycorrhizal fungi or inoculant, like Myco Bliss Mycorrhizal Inoculant from Amazon. This will help replanted roots re-establish quicker, assisting in water and nutrient absorption, and reducing plant stress. Replant your divisions immediately and water well, and you’re all set.

Final Thoughts as You Prep for Winter…

These 3 simple tasks can make all the difference to peony health and eventual flower power. You get the satisfaction of knowing you’ve done absolutely everything you need to do in order to get your peonies ready for winter, so they pass through dormancy and emerge full of vitality as spring begins in earnest. Make a headstart on these jobs now, and caring for peonies next year will be so much easier. Your plants will greet the new year with a clean bill of health, all set to develop quickly and hit their full flowering potential.

Yes, peonies can be low maintenance for much of the year, but you won’t regret carrying out these simple tasks in the fall – before winter starts. By cutting back old foliage, carefully mulching, and dividing older plants, you’ll keep peonies healthy, productive and ready to impress with lush, evocative blooms next year. So make the most of your next crisp fall day – and set the stage for your best peony display yet!

Need more ideas for growing inspiration, timely gardening jobs and seasonal expert advice delivered straight to your inbox? Sign up for the free Gardening Know How Newsletter!

Dahlias are beautiful late-season flowers that reward the patient gardener with striking, swoonworthy blooms. Many enthusiasts are in a state of anticipation for much of summer, waiting to enjoy those delectable dahlia displays. But once the show’s over, we’ll then be wondering what to do with our dahlias in the fall. At this point, dahlia care inevitably hinges around a single question regarding tubers for the blooms we have admired and fervently wish to keep – to lift or not to lift?

Do you confidently know what to do with dahlias after flowering? They are perennials in warmer climates and annuals elsewhere. If you live where dahlias are not hardy but want to enjoy them again next year, you’ll need to lift and store the tubers. The decision to lift or not to lift is important for maintaining healthy, flowering dahlias. If you’re new to growing them, this decision can be tough. So here’s how to make that one big decision that can guarantee your dahlias flourish next year.

Deciding what to do with dahlias in the fall is a personal choice – but this article will help you make an informed one. It covers the inside scoop on whether lifting is best for your tubers, depending on your growing zone and conditions – plus, how best to store your dahlias for winter.

What Dahlias Need in Fall

With the best dahlia care, your plants are capable of blooming well into fall. Exactly when they start and stop blooming will depend on variety, growing zone, and local weather. While they are flowering, there are a few things to check before you have to worry about the question of lifting tubers. You shouldn’t lift tubers while your dahlias are still blooming – but there are a few things to check first. Whether you’ll be lifting the tubers or not, they can benefit from some fall care while they are still flowering.

While plants are blooming, maintain health by removing lower leaves on stems to improve airflow and protect against mildew, especially if you are having a damp autumn. You may also need to use a fungicide on leaves that show any signs of mildew. It’s also crucial that you keep deadheading dahlia blooms for as long as you can, to get as many flowers as possible from each plant. Snip just above a leaf node using a part of snips or shears like Scotts' Straight Tip Floral Shears from Walmart.

However, after the first frost, you can cut back the stalks and think about next steps for best dahlia care in the fall. Deciding what to do with dahlias after flowering will depend on whether you are longing to see more from these particular varieties. If you only want to treat dahlias as annuals, you don’t have to do anything except cut back the foliage in fall. But if you want to enjoy your dahlias again, this is the point where you will mull over the need for lifting tubers for winter storage.

To best answer this question, it primarily depends on where you live. In cooler climates where dahlias aren’t hardy, lifting is a popular option if you want to keep your favorites for next year. The idea is to lift and remove the tubers, store them safely for winter, and replant them in spring.

Why Not Leave Tubers in Ground?

Tubers are fleshy structures that grow underground for the purpose of storing nutrients and energy. It’s important to leave foliage on dahlias until after the first frost, or until it dies back. This is because the leaves are actively taking energy from the sun and storing it in the tubers. Although it’s not quite the same thing, tubers are also sometimes referred to as bulbs.

Dahlias need healthy tubers to grow from the following spring. At this time of year, you may already be thinking about protecting plants from fall frost. If you leave the tubers in the ground, you run the risk of losing them to the extremes of cold in your area, moisture in the ground, and any potential tuber rots that might result. Too much damage to the tubers will ruin any chance of new growth next year. You can get a good sense of moisture (and other things) by doing a soil test using a meter like the Raintrip 4-in-1 Soil Meter from Amazon.

Knowing what to do with dahlia bulbs in the fall depends mostly on your climate and growing zone. For some gardeners, this distinction is not perfectly clear, and there may be other factors to consider, like soil type. Your soil meter should also be able to give you a good read on your soil, to help you determine the degree of risk.

When it’s Safe to Leave Tubers

Allowing for variations based on specific varieties, dahlias are usually hardy in USDA zones 8-11, so if you are in these areas, you can technically keep your tubers in the ground. In these zones, the tubers should be able to survive winter and grow again in spring. In other words, they are perennial flowering plants in these zones.

Even in warmer zones, however, there are some risks to leaving bulbs in the ground. You need to make sure your soil drains well, as excess moisture in the ground can cause the tubers to rot. It’s also a good idea to mulch the ground above your dahlias for extra protection. The Gardening Know How Team recommends Back To The Roots Organic Mulch from Amazon, for its extensive blend of soil-friendly benefits. This is an especially important part of preparing your garden for winter if you’re expecting an unusually cold period.

It’s also important to remember that the soil will get colder in winter in containers or raised beds. If you grow your dahlias this way, you should definitely consider lifting and storing the tubers – or at least adding extra protection in winter.

When it’s Better to Lift

To enjoy flowers from the same plants next year, you must lift and store dahlia tubers if you live in USDA zones 7 and colder. If you leave them in the ground, it’s very likely they will be damaged by the cold and won’t survive the winter. Worrying about how to store dahlias for winter is a better worry than leaving them outside of your control and vulnerable to punishing weather extremes.

You also might want to consider lifting your dahlias for winter storage if you’re on the edge of the necessary hardiness zones, or if you live in a warmer zone but your soil is heavy or tends to get soggy in winter. In these cases, if you try leaving the tubers in the ground, you run the risk of cold or moisture damage.

Even in zones that are plenty warm, it’s worth lifting dahlia tubers if you have good storage options. Put it this way – tubers left in the ground, no matter where, are at the mercy of the weather, the soil, and any pathogens. Proper storage allows you greater control over the health of your dahlias and their ability to bloom again.

What to Remember if You Lift

Lifting and storing dahlias is a great way to keep plants for next year, but it has to be done right. Silly mistakes can ruin your tubers and waste your efforts. Here are my expert tips for successful removal and winter storage of dahlia tubers:

• The best time to dig up dahlias is after the first hard frost, when the leaves have died or blackened. Don’t wait until the ground is frozen.
• Cut back the foliage and stalks, using a sharp blade like this great-value Secateurs Set from Spear & Jackson, available at Amazon. Wait a week or two to dig up the tubers. This gives them a chance to develop eyes, which are vital for new growth later. It’s important to get them out of the ground before a freeze, though, so keep a watchful eye on the weather.
• Use a garden fork and spade to carefully dig around and lift tubers. Take care to avoid piercing them, then leave them to dry in the sun.
• Gently brush off dirt, divide tuber clumps, and dispose of any tubers that show rot. Place them in a sheltered, dry spot to cure for a few days.
• Store your dahlia tubers between 40 and 50°F (4-10°C). The ThermoPro TP50 Hygrometer, available at Amazon, is a user-friendly way of tracking temperature and humidity changes at a glance while under cover.
• Storing dahlia tubers in paper bags is one option. You can also wrap them in newspaper or store them in sawdust or vermiculite, such as Back to the Roots Organic Vermiculite, available at Amazon.
• Check on your tubers throughout winter. They should not get too dry, but they should also not get moist enough to start rotting.

Your stored dahlia tubers will be ready to go back in the ground in spring next year after the last frost and when the soil has warmed. Alternatively, you can place your dahlias in pots in spring. With good care, you should be able to enjoy your dahlias for years to come. Happy lifting!

Need more ideas for growing inspiration, timely gardening jobs and seasonal expert advice delivered straight to your inbox? Sign up for the free Gardening Know How Newsletter!

As gardeners, it’s easy to get confused in this inbetweeny phase between scorchio summer days and the mulled wine winter weekends of the holidays. The gap between more obvious growing (or lack of growing) conditions can often be laced with doubts, hesitation and second-guessing. Mulling over the best way to protect plants from frost is one such conundrum. It’s not helped by unpredictable weather patterns that maybe hint at future frosty nips, while teasing you with an Indian summer sunny spell or dowsing your beds in buckets of autumnal rain. And how can you confidently prepare for the first frost when it can be such a difficult event to predict, you may well be wondering?

Although you may care about protecting plants from frosts and freezes, mapping out an action plan for relocating favorite perennials, half-hardies, exotics and pot plants may not always be the thing you get round to well ahead of time. Depending on where you live, ‘first frost’ is something that can happen as early as September (in some northern US or high altitude areas), or as late as December or maybe not even at all (in warmer southern states). Factors like altitude and latitude have a part to play, and even whether you live in a built-up, highly populated area. So what should be the top priority?

If you’ve ever grabbed outdoor plants at random in a mild panic as weather reports announced that Jack Frost was on his way, then take a breath, take a beat, and take action now. If you’re interested in protecting plants from frost, these are some of the key plants to move now. Make some room undercover in a clean, well lit space, and follow this checklist to save your tenders, half-hardies and precious perennial pals.

Protect These Plants from First Frost

First of all, if you haven’t already, do get familiar with your likely first frost dates. When is first frost? It is possible to determine this in a way that is pertinent to your specific area, by entering your zip code into a calculator. The Old Farmer’s Almanac has a diamond resource for determining average first frost date predictions based on the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) climate data, tailored to your zip. Base my plant suggestions on your USDA hardiness zone, too – is a particular plant hardy to a zone lower than the one in which you live, or are you on the cusp? This can impact your moving strategy.

As well as having a sense of the first expected frost date, consider overall plant health before bringing plants indoors. Inspect carefully for pests and take steps to address any infections before introducing (or reintroducing) them to your indoor plant family. Also, don’t just reposition them in your plush living room – it might be cosy to you, but your plants won’t be used to it, and the dramatic change can be just as much of a shock as a frosty snap. You need to ease them back indoors, finding a place that has similar conditions, but sheltered. It’s like hardening off in reverse, and it’s just as crucial to the health and strength of plants.

Bear in mind some plants are perfectly happy outside and are plenty hardy enough. Relocating those plants abruptly will shock their growth cycles, disrupting dormancy, and causing more harm than good. Stick to plants like those mentioned here that are frost-tender or only marginally hardy for your area. With this info to hand, you can confidently relocate key plants you had out for summer, and those that require precautionary measures and protections for winter. You’ll be grateful you did this before Mr Frost makes pretty patterns on your windows. So if the thermometer has already dipped below 50°F (10°C), there’s no time to lose. Think ahead of the date of first frost, check these plants – and act fast!

1. Citrus

Citrus plants can surprise you, seemingly running on fumes when other fruiting plants have started packing up operations for the year. However, that’s contingent on the right blend of warmth and light lasting beyond the softening rays of autumn. Although some citrus varieties can cope with temperatures in the low single digits (celsius), it’s not a great idea to risk the ravages of tissue damage caused by significant exposure to frost, from which it could take months for the plant to recover, if it even makes it that far. Save yourself that grief and find a safe place indoors for your lemons and limes to dodge that first frost and see out the colder months.

Once temperatures start dropping to 50°F (10°C), reposition them indoors. After a few days of getting them used to being undercover, put them somewhere with a regular temperature of 57-63°F (14-17°C). Ideally, they need plenty of sunlight. Unlike a lot of other plants, they remain active and are likely to keep producing fruits if conditions are agreeable. However, they can’t abide overly dry living conditions, or a spot where they are going to have to grapple with overactive central heating. Keep your citrus well watered – and remember, this is one plant you can feed all year, even once you bring it indoors. Apply a citrus feed like Jack’s Classic Citrus Water-Soluble Feed from Amazon up until October. After that, switch to a general-purpose feed until March.

2. Begonia

Sensitive? You could say that. One night that wobbles around the 45°F (7°C) mark can signal bad news for quite a few begonias. Some of the Rex varieties look tough as old boots, but don’t let that gruff and crunchy exterior fool you. It only takes one brush with sharp frosty night to have these sensitive souls turning up their toes. There’s a reason they are called tender – so if you want to dodge a bad case of the winter doldrums, bring begonias indoors once the nights start dipping past 50°F (10°C). I’d be tempted to make that move once you’ve seen this happen more than twice.

Specifically, you should be transferring fibrous (wax), Angel wing and Rex begonias indoors that you have had outside over late spring and summer, along with any other predominantly foliage-based varieties. Although exact growing conditions will vary depending on variety, indoor begonias require a place that is relatively cool, free from drafts, and flooded with daylight. Aim for a daytime temperature of 65-75°F (18-24°C), and ideally a slightly lower nighttime temp. A digital thermometer like the ThermoPro TP50 Digital Thermo-Hygrometer Indoor Room Thermometer from Amazon can help you keep an eye on temperatures once begonias are moved indoors.

3. Abutilon

There’s a little variation amongst the many types of flowering maple (abutilon), but several common varieties that soak up the sun in summer are half hardy. These need a little protection on the road into winter, and definitely need to be kept away from frosts. It’s hardly surprising given abutilon’s subtropical origins. If you have a very sheltered outdoor spot like a wall, that may help with some of the more erratic weather that crashes into your neighborhood – but it’s not necessarily going to help with frost.

Yes, certain abutilon varieties are a little less fussy. For instance, Abutilon megapotamicum can handle temp drops to 23°F (-5°C). However, common abutilon varieties are going to flop if the mercury drops into single digits celsius more than a couple of times. My vigorous ‘Emperor’ is very typical here – it’s unfussy for months of summer, but starts getting narky once September chills dance around the backyard. At this point, I treat my abutilon as a houseplant, and site it accordingly.

Where you suspect yours is only hardy to 32°F (0°C), it’s best brought indoors in advance of regular sharp thermometer dips. Find a sunny west facing window with six hours light if you can (I’ve managed to keep mine going near a north west-facing window, even jostling for position with several other winter wanderers). You don’t have to worry about feeding, and can reduce watering. Use the XLUX Moisture Meter for Indoor Pot Plants from Amazon if you need to keep tabs on your pot plants.

4. Rosemary

Now I won’t lie, I’ve not always had the best luck with potted rosemary indoors. Placed in the wrong indoor location, this seasoned perennial can struggle if its needs aren’t met. But if it’s a choice between risking a severe weather snap and losing one of my favorite herbs, it’s a no-brainer. You may hear that several types can withstand temp drops as low as 14°F (-10°C) once established. But rosemary is a Mediterranean herb, and not generally the jolliest when dusted with a layer of frost. Ultimately, this woody herb is frost-tender, so it’s important to take steps to protect it from the ravages of a cold snap.

Overwintering your rosemary, done right, can help preserve your precious herbs for another sun-soaked year. I tend to approach this in a multi-pronged fashion. I’ll have already set a few rosemary cuttings off from my outdoor shrub as an insurance policy. But alongside this, I always bring my large container-based rosemary indoors as well. I try to hold off until mid-September, depending on the weather. They can tolerate a little fall-off in the weather, but for rosemary, I’d say that any hint that the temperature is on its way down to 40°F (4°C) is your cue to intervene.

Beyond that, you really don’t want to push your luck and find out exactly how tough your rosemary is, especially if you are based in USDA zone 7 or lower. So to protect plants from first frost, transition your rosemary indoors in the fall, using a garage or shed to acclimate it to the indoors gradually. Keep it somewhere sunny, with average humidity and away from heat vents, and try to maintain a steady temperature between 60-80°F (15.5-26°C). Definitely don’t feed, and reduce watering to prevent root stress. I like to use wiggle worm water sensors like the Worm Water Sensor Hygrometer from Amazon to help me check that water levels in my indoor plants are optimal and well maintained.

5. Caladium

There are a couple of ways to protect frost-sensitive caladiums as fall starts dropping hints about the slides in temperature. You can simply lift the bulbs, let them dry out for a few days, and store them in a warm, dry place until spring arrives. However, once outdoor temperatures start sliding below 54-60°F (12-15°C), it’s also possible to bring them in and treat them as houseplants to extend their color and beauty for longer. If you aren’t in USDA zones 9 or above, you will need to move them one way or another.

Outdoor caladiums that are brought inside will need to be kept out of direct light while you cultivate them as indoor guests. Above all, make sure the indoor spot you choose is warm and humid. Caladiums will need temperatures kept around 65-75°F (18-24°C). They will eventually need a period of dormancy, and even with utmost care, you may see leaves on outdoor leaves turning yellow and dying back. Reduce watering and respect that resting phase so they come back strong next year. To store tubers safely, enfold them in wood shavings or sawdust. Store in a dry carrier like a paper bag or natural fabric pouches like Lucky Monet Hessian Jute Bags from Amazon.

6. Kalanchoe

While they are tropical succulents by nature, kalanchoe plants are also very adaptable to indoor living. These colorful beauties can be grown as perennials. Just ensure their scalloped fleshy leaves are not exposed to frosts, and observe a few simple cultural rituals between fall and spring so they perk up again. The warning sign that they need to be brought indoors is slightly higher than for certain other plants – they will start getting grumpy if left outside when nighttime temps drop below 55°F (13°C).

These pretty succulent perennials will be happy enough indoors if you place them in a place with indirect light, preferably near a west-facing window (but not actually placed on the windowsill). They won’t require high humidity levels and they certainly won’t need much water, but they will need to be kept at a regular temperature of 55-80°F (13-27°C). One word of caution if you want your kalanchoe to flower again: they will need at least 12-14 hours of complete darkness for around 6-8 weeks. You can achieve this by placing the plant in a box each night. As a little treat to your kalanchoe chums, cheer things up with some new outer pots like the ArtKetty Succulent Planters from Amazon.

7. Birds of Paradise

Unless you live in a tropical area, cultivating a happy strelitzia will involve an element of relocation over a typical year. My bird of paradise flourishes outdoors during summer months, nestled happily against a sheltered wall and basking in the afternoon sunshine. Come fall, it’s a different story – and my well behaved birdie needs a change of scene. For anyone who isn’t based in USDA zones 10-12, autumn is a time to start making plans to move most of these frost-sensitive beauties indoors.

If there’s a chance that the mercury is going to drop below 50°F (10°C) in your area, this in itself is a reason to bring your plant indoors. Their tender nature won’t abide prolonged exposure to anything below that level – at best, the cold will stunt or damage flower production. At worst, they could sustain severe tissue damage and give up the ghost. So to protect outdoor plants from frost, bring your container-based strelitzia indoors in the fall and treat them as fancy houseplants until spring is well underway.

A conservatory or greenhouse is ideal, but they can also do well near a sunny window indoors, somewhere you can keep the temperature above 57°F (14°C). I would also take advantage of this move indoors by carefully wiping those sumptuous leaves, which may be dusty after months outdoors. Use dedicated wipes like The Green Alcove Leaf Cleaner & Shine Wipes from Amazon, to restore a lustrous sheen ahead of winter.

8. Passion Flower

You can get hardy passifloras, like the blue passion flower and the maypop. Indeed, I know of someone growing a blue passion flower a few houses down from me, which stubbornly clings to its wrought iron fence moorings all year round, seemingly oblivious to what the weather throws at it (I once thought it was fake, but it turns out it is real). However, just because some passion flower varieties are hardy, that doesn’t mean you should leave yours to chance as the temperatures drop.

Certain varieties are more frost-sensitive – and if you don’t live in USDA zones 7 or above, you should definitely make plans to relocate yours indoors before the first frost. Choose a bright spot indoors with high levels of humidity and a regular daytime temperature of 70-85°F (16-29°C), dropping no colder than 60°F (16°C) at night. It’s a good idea to trim stems to 2ft (60cm) to encourage robust growth in spring.

If you are based in USDA zones 7 or above, and you can get away with keeping your passion flowers outside over winter, it’s still worth giving the root systems of hardy varieties a little extra protection. Where this applies to you, be sure to add a layer of mulch around your passion flower plants. I love Back to the Roots Organic Premium Mulch from Amazon, with a thoughtful blend of yucca extract and gypsum to help balance water levels as well as provide insulation to roots.

9. Pelargonium

If there’s one plant group that seems to fill more corners of my house every winter, it’s the pretty (and often delectably scented) pelargonium family. These plants are the quintessential half-hardy perennials, and being frost-tender puts them high on the list of priorities for relocation ahead of first frost. Put simply, pelargoniums will die if exposed to frost. Considering their many months of service and their potential for years more of the same, it’s unthinkable to leave them to the whims of the elements as long as you have a spot indoors to accommodate them.

To protect potted plants from frost, keep an eye out for outdoor night temperatures starting to nudge down towards 48-50°F (8-10°C). I tend to make cuttings towards the end of summer, and a greenhouse is also fine for potted pelargoniums (if you have one) – but moving them into the home is a highly agreeable way to keep adult plants going. Ideally, keep a steady temperature between 64-72°F (18-22°C). Don’t forget to get plants used to the indoors by keeping them somewhere like a garage for a few days first.

While you don’t have to worry about feeding or regular watering over winter, the one thing that can guarantee happier pels in the new year is a strong and steady supply of light. If natural light sources are going to be a struggle, it’s well worth investing in a grow light to keep your sun-thirsty pels happy (they’re going to need at least 6 hours a day in order to thrive). Try an adjustable model like the AeroGarden Trio Grow Light from Amazon to ensure they are in the best form come spring.

Need more ideas for timely gardening jobs and seasonal expert advice delivered straight to your inbox? Sign up for the free Gardening Know How Newsletter!

Beloved for their longevity, the beauty of peonies is something we are understandably keen to protect and enjoy for as long as possible, year after year. If you’ve been growing one for the first time this year, you may have been surprised by its ease of care, thriving with little to no seasonal maintenance. However, you will also know that some of the best perennials rely on careful pruning. By the same token, if you have had your peony for a few years and you are worried that it isn’t looking quite as good as it used to, or maybe didn’t flower all that well this year, you’ll be wanting to get a feel for how to give it a helping hand ahead of the coming year.

Plenty of ornamental plants benefit from routine pruning, boosting overall growth and the production of flowers. Learning to properly prune your peony shrubs at the appropriate time is essential. A few careless cuts can put your peony back potential years in terms of recovery, and in some cases can be a death sentence. Make sure you aren’t making these peony pruning mistakes – put your pruning shears to the best work possible, and you’ll be doing your favorite shrubs a massive service in preparation for the year ahead. Here’s what to avoid in terms of essential fall peony care, and what to do instead to protect your beloved bloomers for the future.

Peony Pruning Mistakes You Need to Know

Most mistakes when pruning peonies can be remedied in some way, and the chances are they won’t have a massively negative impact on the long-term health of plants, as long as you intervene. However, problems with peony pruning can slow growth. This often results in poor root development or flower production. This is especially true of younger plants which may be more susceptible to damage done by improper pruning techniques.

Plant size and the severity of cuts will also play a role in determining whether or not plants will recover. As with most gardening tasks, prevention is much better than cure. Pruning is a critical aspect of peony care and knowing how to do it right can reap dividends for years (and hopefully decades) to come. So be mindful of the following mistakes pruning peonies. When you cut back peonies, try to follow the sensible maxim ‘think twice, cut once’ with every potential pruning exercise.

1. Poor Timing

Quite often, the big worry is what happens if you don’t cut back peonies well – but one of the key problems that can catch growers out is making cuts at the wrong time. Mistakes when pruning peonies are often the result of poor timing. Determining the best time, however, will greatly depend upon their type. Most herbaceous varieties benefit most from pruning in fall, after the first frost. However, some may require a trim in early spring. Tree peonies are one such example – if you have a tree peony, you are best trimming just as the buds begin to swell in spring.

Pruning too soon is likely to impact plant growth, preventing shrubs from gathering much-needed energy. Tree peonies are still gathering energy over summer and into fall, even if their foliage is looking slightly worse for wear. Peonies pruned before their foliage has died back naturally may also demonstrate poor bud-set or fail to set flowers completely. So make sure that you are familiar with your peony type, and then act accordingly. You may not even need to prune in fall, but do check.

That said, even if you don’t need to prune peonies in the fall, you can use this time to assess and prep your pruning tools. A good sharpening tool, like Sharpal’s 121N Dual-Grit Diamond Sharpening Stone File from Amazon, can help get your pruning shears and other cutting equipment up to scratch ahead of the actual pruning window.

2. Improper Technique

Knowing how far to cut back peonies, and which parts of the peony need to be left, are important considerations. Along with timing, exact technique will also vary according to peony type. Species which die back to the ground each winter will benefit from aggressive pruning. This occurs when all dead or decaying plant matter is removed back to the ground in fall. Though failure to prune at this time is unlikely to harm plants, it can increase the likelihood or recurrence of disease across beds.

Woody peony types require a very different approach, with the plant's structure trimmed no more than approximately one-third of its height. Excessive trimming of tree peonies can result in serious harm to plants, sometimes leading to their loss. A good clean cut is paramount. If the branch is too thick for your shears, use a saw or a good pair of loppers like the Corona DualLink Extendable Bypass Loppers from Amazon, which are great for higher and thicker cuts.

Improper pruning techniques can result in damage to plants that can take time to rectify. This is a common flowering shrub mistake in general – but certainly applies here. If you’re growing herbaceous types, take care when trimming back shrubs in fall. Deep or aggressive cuts may result in injury to the plant crown or growth eyes just beneath the soil. Damage to these parts may result in poor performance the following spring, with many stems failing to grow or remaining stunted in summer.

Woody species can also be injured by improper pruning. New buds, which begin to swell in spring, will be especially delicate. Each cut should be just above healthy growth, at a 45° angle. Avoid cutting through peony buds, which can result in diminished growth or dieback of the stem.

3. Bad Cutting Hygiene

Poor sanitation is one of the most likely pruning mistakes that ruin peonies, even if these perennials are relatively hardy. Good growing practices will be key in helping peony beds look their best. This is evident in the removal of dead or decaying plant matter in fall and spring, after peonies have been pruned. This will help to prevent disease and the spread of plant pathogens, many of which overwinter in the garden.

Good pruning practices also dictate the use of clean tools to prevent the spread of disease. Cleanliness is essential to maintaining a healthy garden, especially when making cuts from which plants will necessarily need to heal. This is true whether you make cuts in summer, fall, winter or spring. It’s also your first line of defence if you are worried about passing any problems on from one plant to another. Sanitizing tools both before and after the pruning process will aid in keeping plants healthy, working to avoid cross-contamination of infected matter.

Ensure your pruning tools are sterile and cleaned properly after each use. Applications of isopropyl alcohol in concentrations of 70%, such as Dealmed Isopropyl Rubbing Alcohol from Amazon, can reduce the risks of fungal diseases.

Do you need more pruning help, timely gardening jobs and seasonal expert advice delivered straight to your inbox? Sign up for the free Gardening Know How Newsletter!

Containers are essential to the creation of a thriving garden and help create multi-season dynamics. Just because the summer is over, that doesn’t mean you can’t transform a quiet corner of your yard, patio, front porch or window space with glorious, living color in tubs, planters, urns, barrels and hanging baskets.

Grow the right fall flowers for pots and you can celebrate the season right up to first frost, and in some cases, as far as the final weeks of the year. Here are some of the most versatile, reliable and glorious fall container flowers you can grow. These are some of the best plants for container gardening that can light up the fall calendar. They’re guaranteed to turn even modest gardening spots into a cacophony of autumnal splendor.

Choose the Best Fall Flowers for Pots

Choosing the best fall flowers for containers will depend on regional variations, planting zones and container sizes, as well as the needs of selected species. Still, there are plenty of options, covering both those that start flowering in summer and last into autumn, and those that are still flowering well through fall. Careful consideration at planting time will help plants to flourish as you transition from summer through fall. Select species of fall plants and flowers for pots will bloom well through autumn, often demonstrating a preference or tolerance to cool growing conditions.

You may need to select dwarf breeds for certain plants to guarantee that they have the best chance of thriving as autumn flowers for pots. Alternatively, you could upscale your containers to ensure you have plenty of room not only for flowering stems but healthy root systems. Some of these flowers work well in isolation, while others make exquisite combination choices as part of thriller, spiller, filler container arrangements.

Make sure potted fall flowers receive good care after planting in containers, tubs, planters and hanging baskets. Add a slow-release food to nourish plants during autumn while actively blooming. Slow-release spikes such as Jobe’s Flower Fertilizer Spikes from Amazon are highly rated and guarantee the longest lasting blooms and plenty of fresh growth.

1. Chrysanthemums

Chrysanthemums are among the most popular autumn flowers for pots. Best known for their warm palette and vibrant color, these cold-tolerant perennials are certain to dazzle through fall. If sourcing live mums for pots, look for a plant that is tightly budded. The more buds there are on the plant, the more flowers you can enjoy through the fall. Blooms are likely to last longer in cooler weather, but mums also look great mixed with other plants for a display with sustained autumnal appeal. Buy The Three Company Store Happy Fall Mums as live plants from Amazon.

Mulching these fall flowers through winter can further aid in plant growth, regulating both temperature and moisture throughout the coldest months of the year. Most chrysanthemums will be hardy through USDA zones 4-9. Buy Back to the Roots Organic Premium Mulch from Amazon for the best fall flowers for pots. Deadhead spent flowerheads using Fiskars Bypass Pruners from Walmart, so your container mums flourish for longer.

2. Asters

Both annual and perennial types of aster are some of the best fall flowers for containers. This is largely due to their prolonged bloom, stretching from mid-summer through the first frost. Their late-season color also gives sanctuary to pollinators such as bees and butterflies in preparation for winter. Though annual species should be planted on a seasonal basis, you can expect perennial types to return dependably. Plants will be hardy through USDA zones 3-8.

Depending on variety, location and container, asters are capable of flowering through October. Aster ‘Wood’s Blue’ from Walmart, available as a live plant, makes a stunning choice. Happy in full sun and well draining soil, it develops masses of purple-blue blooms through fall. For a hot pink twist, buy American Beauties’ Aster ‘Vibrant Dome’ as a live plant from Amazon. Asters make amazing fall flowers if you want plants that will thrive on neglect as well as fill an autumnal gap with color.

3. Calendula

Calendulas are beloved for their early spring bloom. However, their beauty can look amazing in end-of-summer containers, and that their blooms can last well into fall where conditions remain cool. Even in warmer climates, you can have success with successive plantings of calendula in late summer. Plants can mature quickly, blooming in 6-8 weeks. Flowers are beneficial to migrating insects, with flowers persisting well through the arrival of the first frost.

Choose a container with plenty of drainage holes, and give as much direct sunlight as your fall front yard or growing space will provide. You may find that a high phosphorus formula can encourage more blooms, extending the life of your fall containers. It might also help to use a natural product like Garden Safe Slug Pellets from Amazon, as molluscs seem to have a soft spot for calendula plants. You can still buy Calendula Plant Seedlings from Amazon if you hurry.

4. Dianthus

Many species of dianthus make good candidates for fall containers. Most will perform as a perennial or biennial, blooming through summer, but cool weather will help to extend the production of flowers through autumn. Potted specimens such as carnations or pinks are best, maintaining a more compact size. Hardiness and tolerance to cold will vary, but most dianthus are fine through USDA zones 3-9.

Make sure plants receive plenty of sunshine during the flowering season, and a regular supply of water and fertilizer to maintain good health. You may also find it helps to deadhead your potted dianthus to encourage further flowering, depending on variety. The best dianthus varieties for enduring color in fall containers include the Scent First Series featuring ‘Candy Floss’, ‘Sugar Plum’ and ‘Passion’ varieties. Buy Perennial Farm Marketplace’s Dianthus ‘Neon Star’ as live plants from Amazon.

5. Echinacea

Known for their ability to draw pollinators and beneficial insects, echinacea plants are beautiful summer blooming plants that also work well in fall containers. Though many common varieties can grow quite large, several newer introductions are short in stature so thrive in pots and planters. Expect an abundance of brightly colored blooms, persisting well through the arrival of the first frost. Especially popular dwarf varieties of echinacea include ‘Kim's Knee High’, ‘Lilliput Dwarf’ and ‘Paradiso Dwarf’ coneflowers. Echinacea is hardy through USDA zones 4-9.

Coneflowers are naturally drought tolerant, but don’t let container grown coneflowers dry out too much. To allow for as much freedom between plants and roots as possible, opt for the biggest container possible. Deadheading can help you extend the flowering season. Because they are perennials, bear in mind that you will need to divide them and move them to new containers every few years. You can still buy Coneflower ‘Green Twister’ as live plants from Nature Hills if you hurry.

6. Rudbeckia

Several species of rudbeckia are very well-suited to growth in containers. Black-eyed Susans (Rudbeckia hirta) are primarily associated with the arrival of summer, but their vibrant hues last through to autumn, attracting the attention of many pollinators. Especially attractive rudbeckia varieties ‘Goldilocks’ and ‘Sahara’ make a welcome addition to decorative containers near porches or patios.

Hardy in USDA zones 3-9, rudbeckia plants flower best in full sun but are otherwise unfussy container flowers and won’t require fertilizer. For the quintessential autumnal colors, classic yellow is undeniably vivacious, but you can also branch out into other hues, such as deep red ‘Cherry Brandy’ and orange ‘Prairie Sun’ flowers. Buy Perennial Farm Marketplace’s Rudbeckia ‘American Gold Rush’ as a live plant from Amazon.

7. Salvia

Some of the best types of salvia for growth in containers are those which bloom in autumn. Ideal salvia varieties for pots include Salvia greggii, S. leucantha and S. farinacea. Perennial species like these will be tolerant to cold and return dependably. Showy flowers, common in shades of pink and red, will be adored by migrating hummingbirds and a variety of beneficial insects. Most salvia are full sun container plants but they are hardy in USDA zones 3-9, with some variation by species.

Depending on variety, USDA region and growing conditions, salvias are capable of flowering until first frost with an abundance of flower spikes. With color options ranging from midnight blues and purples to jewel-bright pinks, they are an ideal choice for the summer-fall transition, and remain in their prime for as long as there is sunshine. Buy dwarf Salvia ‘Mirage Rose Bicolor’ as a live plant from Amazon.

8. Snapdragon

Popular in beds and mixed borders, snapdragons (Antirrhinum majus) may not seem like an obvious choice for fall containers, but it is possible to enjoy their colors and dramatic structural beauty through the seasonal transition into autumn. Shorter varieties will perform best. Popular container snapdragon options include cultivars belonging to the ‘Snappy’ or ‘Snaptini’ series, bred specifically for their compact size.

While mostly sold as annual flowers that bloom in summer, snapdragons can be grown as short-lived perennials in USDA zones 6-11. With the right conditions they can keep going well into fall. Flowers also seed prolifically, so even in cooler climates they will return each season. You can grow snapdragons in combinations of red, orange, yellow, coral, and pink for sizzling seasonal color that will delight for weeks. Buy Mixed Color Snapdragons in double packs of live plants from Amazon.

Need more ideas for timely gardening jobs and seasonal expert advice delivered straight to your inbox? Sign up for the free Gardening Know How Newsletter!

Few of us enjoy wall-to-wall people, so it’s easy to feel empathy for overgrown garden perennials as summer ends. During the spring and summer months, healthy flower and foliage clumps expand, growing taller and wider. By fall, your garden may be short on the elbow room that plants need to grow and flower in spring.

September is the perfect time to deal with this overcrowding. While dead or diseased plants may need to be removed and tossed, your favorite perennial plants can be divided into several smaller plants, leaving ample room for new growth in springtime.

Divide and Conquer

If a garden plant has grown too tall, it can be pruned down to size with shears like these on Amazon. But if the root structure has increased and is taking up too much space in the garden bed, you need to divide the clump into pieces. This process is known as division. Since it creates new plants, it is often discussed as a form of plant propagation.

The process of division looks a lot like transplanting, except that you cut apart the clump before replanting. It's not a complex procedure:

• Dig up the plant, roots and all using a shovel like this one at Home Depot
• Separate the rootball clump into two or more pieces - you may need a sharp implement like this hori hori knife from Amazon
• Replant one of them in the original space. The others can be replanted around the garden or given away to neighbors.

Since division stresses a plant, it’s best to avoid adding heat stress to the package. Act when the weather is cool but not cold. Fall is often a good season for garden work and many perennials divide best in fall. Act some four weeks before the first hard frost so that the plant’s roots have time to establish before winter.

8 Popular Garden Plants to Divide in Fall

Most perennials are best divided in fall, just after they finish flowering. Here are eight plants that make that list.

1. Asters

When you're growing asters, divide them every three or four years to keep those flowers coming. When you're splitting the clumps, toss out the oldest rhizomes, only keeping young, healthy sections. Replant them shallowly so that the rhizomes stay a little above the soil.

2. Coral Bells

Fall is the best time to divide coral bells if they're overcrowded. Dig up a clump and divide it into two to four sections. Replant each in prepared planting sites.

3. Cranesbill (Hardy Geraniums)

If you're growing cranesbill in your backyard, you know that these tough and beautiful perennials grow in clumps. They bloom all season long and can become overgrown in a few years. The best time to divide them is when they are done flowering in fall.

4. Daylilies

The lovely daylily flowers only live for one day, so it’s sad when – over time – the blooms get smaller and smaller. Dividing daylilies in fall works well to rejuvenate them. Dig up the clumps then divide them, leaving three fans of leaves and ample roots in each division.

5. Hostas

These shade favorites grow fast. Healthily growing hostas can double their size in a few good seasons and will develop dead centers in their crowns that come to look unattractive. That makes them good candidates for fall division every three or four years. Toss out the dead areas.

6. Iris

You can keep an iris growing well for a few years, then inevitably the plants seem to get choked out. Dividing them in fall means better blooms in spring.

7. Peonies

Peonies happen to be my personal favorites, so I never feel I have too many. But as the peony blooms spread beyond their allotted bed, it’s time to divide them and fall’s the best time. Dig up a root clump of roots and carefully clip it loose from the parent plant. Cut it into sections, leaving at least three buds in each division, then replant.

8. Salvia

It’s hard to find a more reliable flowering perennial than salvia, a plant known for its feathery foliage and gorgeous spikes of blooms that attract pollinators. They grow fast and spread, so plan to divide them every few years.

Top Tips for Dividing Perennials

• Wait for cooler weather.
• Water the soil thoroughly the day before dividing perennials.
• Dig up the entire rootball.
• With a sharp spade or shovel.
• When you are dividing, give each section roots and shoots.
• Replant asap to the same depth.
• Water well after transplant and keep the soil moist until the first freeze.

With the sounds of fall crunching and crisping around the edges of your garden, it’s hard not to feel wistful, even as you gaze at the ornamental splashes of color spilling over from one season to the next. While autumnal colors can add some seasonal brilliance, it’s understandable to feel at a loose end, wondering what to do next in your garden. Hopefully, you can occupy yourself with targeted pruning, yard tidyups and shed clearouts – but as things start to wind down, why not do something truly life affirming and invigorating – and plant some spring bulbs?

There are plenty of gorgeous bulbs to plant in September, and planting now is great for the health and development of several key spring bloomers. Starting your spring bulb garden early means you can take advantage of a mass of tempting choices via reputable bulb retailers – plus, you’ll have the satisfaction of knowing you’ve started your new year gardening campaign in earnest, in a relaxed and optimistic way. So have fun planting some of these gorgeous spring flowering bulbs while you have plenty of time on your side – and give yourself something to really look forward to in the new year!

Best Spring Bulbs to Plant in September

Selecting the best bulbs to plant in September will depend on a combination of factors, including an awareness of your USDA region and an understanding of your garden soil, as well as bulb preferences. Indeed, these factors will have some bearing on bulb choices – although hopefully you’ll still have plenty of options!

To help when adding bulbs to your flower garden for spring, make sure you have first checked your soil and made any adjustments necessary to nourish and prepare the earth. Test the soil using a meter like the Raintrip 4-in-1 Meter from Amazon, which tests for pH, nutrient loads and moisture. Condition the planting site with a treatment like Miracle-Gro’s Performance Organics All-Purpose In-Ground soil amendment from Walmart.

Getting on top of this ahead of planting and growing will mean bulbs develop in optimum condition. Then you can get stuck in with planting some of these delightful beauties in readiness for spring.

1. Muscari

These little purple-blue beauties (also known as grape hyacinth) have a relatively broad planting window, but early planting is highly beneficial for establishing healthy roots. As well as being some of the best flower bulbs to plant in September, the bulbs themselves are generally small in size, so you can get away with planting them a few inches deep. It’s best to plant groups of bulbs so each one has a few inches of surrounding space. Muscari bulbs also thrive in containers – just ensure they are well draining and kept in sun or partial shade.

With their tightly packed clusters of grape-shaped blooms, I often call them my little Marge Simpsons, as the flowers remind me of the blue-rinse hairdo associated with Matt Groening’s well-loved matriarch. These charming little spring ornamentals are highly likely to naturalize in your garden, returning yearly in new corners of your garden. Grab Muscari ‘Baby’s Breath’ from Amazon in bundles of 50 bulbs. You can also get unusual new colors, like white ‘Album’ and yellow ‘Golden Fragrance’.

2. Alliums

From delicate fluffy dwarf purple varieties like ‘Millenium’ to audacious mammoths like ‘White Giant’, there’s something fundamentally spectacular about a spring border blessed with a generous smattering of flowering alliums. Ornamental onions can flower from spring to early summer, but as long as you focus on the earliest flowering allium varieties, these are some of the most glorious spring bulbs to plant in September.

Ideal for planting in USDA zones 4-10, these sweeping structural epics thrive in full sun and well-draining, slightly acidic soil, so bear this in mind when planting these delightful hardy perennials. Gorgeous allium bulbs to start in September include ‘Globemaster’, ‘Giganteum’, ‘Christophii’ and ‘Purple Sensation’ alliums. You can buy some exquisite and richly varied allium bulb varieties at Burpee.

3. Crocus

Surely one of the most life-affirming sights of spring, the humble crocus reassures us that the new gardening year (and all its flowering joys) is just beginning. Obviously, you need to focus on spring-flowering crocus varieties, as you can also get autumn-flowering crocus bulbs. Make sure the planting holes are around 6 inches (15cm) deep and 4 inches (10cm) apart, although you can expect these perennial charmers to naturalize and return in quiet new corners of your yard.

Bulbs benefit from around 15 weeks of chilling, allowing them to fully benefit from the cold months ahead of a rich early spring medley. Plant in sweeps along the edges of lawns and garden beds, and feel free to mix up your varieties for a cacophony of uplifting color. One of the most charming crocus varieties for September planting is Crocus ‘Saffron’, available from Walmart, with its lush lavender petals and golden stamens.

4. Daffodil (Narcissus )

When trying to decide which bulbs to plant in September, one of the first to spring to mind (pun not intended) will surely be the daffodil. The subject of one of William Wordsworth’s most memorable lines, thoughts of spring are intertwined with bobbing heads of gentle, unassuming narcissi. Look for early flowering varieties that bloom in February or March, and remember to plant at three times the depth of the individual bulbs.

You hopefully won’t struggle to find traditional gold daffodil varieties to start in September, although there are some interesting modern twists that are equally delightful for spring borders and containers. If you’re intrigued by frilly or double bloom narcissus varieties, you’ll love Narcissus Double Mix from Amazon, with its symphony of gold, cream, pink and orange ruffled trumpets.

5. Early Anemone

With their delicate daisy shapes and generous carpet growth, spring-flowering anemones make highly engaging bulbs to start off in September. This is a wide flowering group, but Grecian windflower (Anemone blanda) and poppy (A. coronaria) anemone varieties are ideal for planting this month. This will depend, again, on your hardiness zone. Planting in September is particularly effective for anemone lovers in zones 7-10. Buy Anemone Windflower bulbs from Amazon for a visual flourish of pink, blue and white petals.

6. Galanthus

Snowdrops are some of the first spring flowers to peep their heads out of the earth in the new year (and if you’re lucky, you may even see them before winter is out, nestling under a gentle frosting of snow). Because they are early starters, it makes sense to plant snowdrop (galanthus) bulbs as early as possible. This way, they can take advantage of the warmer soil, and they have ample time to build up those all important energy reserves.

To give your snowdrops the best chance of success, find a shady (or partially shady) spot with moist (but not waterlogged) soil. They do especially well under a large tree, but can also flourish with lawn plantings and large containers. I’m especially fond of varieties like ‘Wendy’s Gold’ with their intriguing golden markings, but you can’t go wrong with the lush bobbing heads of Willard & May Galanthus Nivalis from Amazon.

7. Fritillaria

Fritillary bulbs are some of my favorite spring flowers, bringing something a little intriguing and quirky to an ornamental display. Depending on the variety and growing region, you can enjoy their gorgeous delicate colors from March until May. September is the perfect time to start Fritillaria meleagris (snake’s head), F. imperialis (crown imperials) and F. affinis (chocolate lily) so bulbs can take full advantage of the soil still being relatively warm. Planting in September means fritillaria roots have plenty of time to establish before spring.

These bulbs aren’t big fans of compacted soil, so work the soil before planting to ensure it is well drained, or plant in large containers or raised beds. Add a layer of sand or grit at the time of planting to help with soil drainage. Snake’s head fritillaria can naturalize on lawns for more delightful spring color. Purple and burgundy blooms are especially popular, but you can also get unique yellow flower varieties like ‘Lutea’ fritillaries. For something unusual and vibrant in your spring borders, try vibrant Fritillaria Imperialis ‘Rubra’ from Nature Hills.

But Don’t Plant This Bulb Yet!

Although the warm soils of September work to the advantage of these bulbs, there is one type of bulb that will suffer from planting too early in the fall. You may well be tempted to plant some tulips – but it’s important to hold off with these for a while.

Planting too early, while the soil is still warm, can expose tulip bulbs to the risk of fungal disease – specifically, a disease known as tulip fire (Botrytis tulipae). This can cause distortion, stunting and rotting, ultimately preventing bulbs from flowering. So September planting would be a mistake – it’s far better for the health and potential of tulips to wait until October or November (depending on your region), so the ground can reach an adequate level of cold sufficient to protect bulbs from disease.

Still, while it’s best to hold off actually planting them, you can absolutely buy some now if you haven’t already. In fact, buying them as soon as possible is a good idea if you want to grab something unusual or unique. There are some gorgeous tulip bulbs available at Burpee – including rich purple ‘Paul Scherer’, fluffy pink and white ‘Double Shake’, and intriguing tulip combo ‘Queen of Night’ and ‘Don Quichotte’, amongst others.

Need more ideas for timely gardening jobs and seasonal expert advice delivered straight to your inbox? Sign up for the free Gardening Know How Newsletter!